2008 FX Nytro Servis Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
2008
FX10X FX10RTX FX10RTRX FX10RTRAX FX10MTX FX10MTRX FX10MTRAX

LIT-12618-02-69 8GL-28197-10
NOTICE
This manual was written by the Yamaha Motor Company primarily for use by Yamaha dealers and their qualified mechanics. It is not possible to put an entire mechanics education into one manual, so it is assumed that persons using this book to perform maintenance and repairs on Yamaha snowmobiles have a basic understanding of the mechanical concepts and procedures inherent in snowmobile repair. Without such knowledge, attempted repairs or service to this model may render it unfit and/or unsafe to use. Yamaha Motor Company, Ltd. is continually striving to improve all models manufactured by Yamaha. Modifications and significant changes in specifications or procedures will be forwarded to all authorized Yamaha dealers and will, where applicable, appear in future editions of this manual.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Particularly important information is distinguished in this manual by the following notations:
The Safety Alert Symbol means ATTENTION! BE ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
WARNING
Failure to follow WARNING instructions could result in severe injury or death to the snowmobile operator, a bystander, or a person inspecting or repairing the snowmobile.
CAUTION:
A CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid damage to the snowmobile.
NOTE:
A NOTE provides key information that can make procedures easier or clearer.
MANUAL FORMAT
All of the procedures in this manual are organized in a sequential, step-by-step format. The information has been compiled to provide the mechanic with an easy to read, handy reference that contains comprehensive explanations of all inspection, repair, assembly, and disassembly operations. In this revised format, the condition of a faulty component will precede an arrow symbol and the course of action required to correct the problem will follow the symbol, e.g., Bearings Pitting/damage Replace.
EXPLODED DIAGRAM
FX10X, FX10RTX, FX10RTRX, FX10RTRAX, FX10MTX, FX10MTRX, FX10MTRAX SERVICE MANUAL 2007 by Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A. 1st Edition, July 2007 All rights reserved. Any reprinting or unauthorized use without the written permission of Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A. is expressly prohibited. Printed in U.S.A. P/N.LIT-12618-02-69 Each chapter provides exploded diagrams before each disassembly section to facilitate correct disassembly and assembly procedures.
GEN INFO
3
INSP ADJ
4
ILLUSTRATED SYMBOLS (Refer to the illustration)

Illustrated symbols 1 to 9 are designed as thumb tabs to indicate the chapters number and content.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 General information Periodic inspection and adjustment Chassis Power train Engine Cooling system Fuel injection system Electrical Specifications
CHAS
5
POWR TR
6
ENG
7
COOL
8
FI
9
ELEC
SPEC
0 A B
T.
Illustrated symbols 0 to F are used to identify the specifications which appear.

0 A B C D E F Filling fluid Lubricant Tightening torque Wear limit, clearance Engine speed Special tool Electrical data (, V, A)
R.
G
LT
5
L
Illustrated symbols G to R in the exploded diagram indicate grade of lubricant and location of lubrication point.
G H I J K L M N O P Q R Apply locking agent (LOCTITE) Apply Yamabond No.5 Apply engine oil Apply gear oil Apply molybdenum disulfide oil Apply brake fluid Apply wheel bearing grease Apply low-temperature lithium-soap-based grease Apply molybdenum disulfide grease Apply silicone grease ESSO beacon 325 grease or Aeroshell grease #7A Use new one
E
M
B
G
N
LS
M
O
M
BF
P
S
New
INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION PERIODIC INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT CHASSIS POWER TRAIN ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
GEN INFO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
+
INSP ADJ
CHAS
POWR TR
ENG
COOL
FI
ELEC
8 9
SPEC
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION

SNOWMOBILE IDENTIFICATION ................... 1-1 FRAME SERIAL NUMBER ......................... 1-1 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER........................ 1-1 IMPORTANT INFORMATION .......................... 1-2 PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY........................................... 1-2 ALL REPLACEMENT PARTS..................... 1-2 GASKETS, OIL SEALS, AND O-RINGS..... 1-3 LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS............................................................ 1-3 BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS ..................... 1-3 CIRCLIPS ................................................... 1-3 LOCTITE ................................................... 1-3 SPECIAL TOOLS ............................................. 1-4 FOR TUNE UP............................................ 1-4 FOR ENGINE SERVICE............................. 1-4 FOR POWER TRAIN SERVICE ................. 1-7 FOR FUEL INJECTION SERVICE ............. 1-8 FOR ELECTRICAL SERVICE .................... 1-8
THROTTLE BODY JOINTS INSPECTION ............................................ 2-23 CHECKING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT ................................................. 2-23 EXHAUST SYSTEM INSPECTION .......... 2-25 POWER TRAIN ............................................... 2-26 SHEAVE OFFSET ADJUSTMENT ........... 2-26 DRIVE V-BELT.......................................... 2-28 ENGAGEMENT SPEED CHECK.............. 2-30 PARKING BRAKE PAD INSPECTION ..... 2-31 PARKING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT............ 2-31 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION ....... 2-32 BRAKE PAD INSPECTION....................... 2-33 BRAKE HOSE INSPECTION.................... 2-33 AIR BLEEDING (HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM) .................................................. 2-34 DRIVE CHAIN ........................................... 2-35 TRACK TENSION ADJUSTMENT............ 2-37 SLIDE RUNNER INSPECTION ................ 2-39 MAXIMIZING DRIVE TRACK LIFE ........... 2-39 CHASSIS ........................................................ 2-41 SKI/SKI RUNNER ..................................... 2-41 STEERING SYSTEM ................................ 2-41 BRAKE LEVER ADJUSTMENT ................ 2-43 LUBRICATION .......................................... 2-43 ELECTRICAL ................................................. 2-45 HEADLIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT ....... 2-45 HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT ......... 2-46 BATTERY INSPECTION........................... 2-46 FUSE INSPECTION.................................. 2-52 TUNING .......................................................... 2-54 CLUTCH.................................................... 2-54 GEAR SELECTION................................... 2-56 FRONT SUSPENSION ............................. 2-63 REAR SUSPENSION................................ 2-67
CHAPTER 2. PERIODIC INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

INTRODUCTION............................................... 2-1 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM .............. 2-1 GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART .................................... 2-2 ENGINE ............................................................ 2-3 SPARK PLUGS........................................... 2-3 FUEL LINE INSPECTION........................... 2-3 COOLING SYSTEM.................................... 2-4 VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT ........ 2-7 THROTTLE BODY SYNCHRONIZATION ............................... 2-12 THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT.......................................... 2-14 THROTTLE OVERRIDE SYSTEM (T.O.R.S.) CHECK .................................... 2-16 COMPRESSION PRESSURE MEASUREMENT ...................................... 2-17 ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION .......... 2-19 ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT ................. 2-20 CYLINDER HEAD BREATHER HOSE INSPECTION ............................................ 2-23
CHAPTER 3. CHASSIS
COVERS ........................................................... 3-1 INSTALLATION........................................... 3-3 STEERING ........................................................ 3-4 FX10............................................................ 3-4 FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA .................. 3-6 FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA ................. 3-8 REMOVAL................................................. 3-11 INSPECTION ............................................ 3-11 INSTALLATION......................................... 3-12 SKI .................................................................. 3-16 FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA....... 3-16
FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA ............... 3-17 INSPECTION ............................................ 3-18 FRONT SUSPENSION ................................... 3-19 FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA....... 3-19 FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA ............... 3-21 HANDLING NOTES .................................. 3-23 INSPECTION ............................................ 3-23 INSTALLATION ........................................ 3-24
SLIDE RAIL SUSPENSION ............................ 4-43 FX10.......................................................... 4-43 FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA ................ 4-49 FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA ............... 4-55 HANDLING NOTES .................................. 4-61 REMOVAL................................................. 4-61 INSPECTION ............................................ 4-61 ASSEMBLY............................................... 4-62 INSTALLATION......................................... 4-66 FRONT AXLE AND TRACK ........................... 4-67 INSPECTION ............................................ 4-68 INSTALLATION......................................... 4-68
CHAPTER 4. POWER TRAIN

PRIMARY SHEAVE AND DRIVE V-BELT ....... 4-1 REMOVAL .................................................. 4-3 DISASSEMBLY........................................... 4-3 INSPECTION .............................................. 4-4 ASSEMBLY................................................. 4-6 INSTALLATION .......................................... 4-9 SECONDARY SHEAVE ................................. 4-11 DISASSEMBLY......................................... 4-13 INSPECTION ............................................ 4-13 ASSEMBLY............................................... 4-14 INSTALLATION ........................................ 4-16 DRIVE CHAIN ................................................. 4-17 WITHOUT REVERSE MODEL ................. 4-17 REMOVAL ................................................ 4-19 INSPECTION ............................................ 4-19 INSTALLATION ........................................ 4-21 WITH REVERSE MODEL......................... 4-22 REMOVAL ................................................ 4-25 INSPECTION ............................................ 4-25 INSTALLATION ........................................ 4-26 SECONDARY SHAFT .................................... 4-28 INSPECTION ............................................ 4-29 SECONDARY SHAFT AND DRIVE CHAIN COVER INSTALLATION .............. 4-30 BRAKE ........................................................... 4-32 BRAKE PAD ............................................. 4-32 BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT ................. 4-33 BRAKE CALIPER AND PARKING BRAKE..................................... 4-35 BRAKE CALIPER DISASSEMBLY ........... 4-37 BRAKE CALIPER INSPECTION AND REPAIR ............................................ 4-37 BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY ................. 4-38 BRAKE CALIPER INSTALLATION........... 4-38 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER................... 4-39 INSPECTION ............................................ 4-41 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY............................................... 4-41 INSTALLATION ........................................ 4-42
CHAPTER 5. ENGINE
SEAT AND FUEL TANK................................... 5-1 REMOVAL................................................... 5-3 INSTALLATION........................................... 5-4 EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER ..................... 5-5 INSTALLATION........................................... 5-7 OIL TANK ......................................................... 5-9 ENGINE ASSEMBLY ..................................... 5-10 HOSES AND LEADS ................................ 5-10 ENGINE ASSEMBLY ................................ 5-12 REMOVAL................................................. 5-13 INSTALLATION......................................... 5-13 CAMSHAFTS .................................................. 5-15 CYLINDER HEAD COVER ....................... 5-15 CAMSHAFTS ............................................ 5-16 REMOVAL................................................. 5-17 INSPECTION ............................................ 5-18 INSTALLATION......................................... 5-22 CYLINDER HEAD ........................................... 5-26 REMOVAL................................................. 5-27 INSPECTION ............................................ 5-27 INSTALLATION......................................... 5-28 VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ................... 5-30 REMOVAL................................................. 5-31 INSPECTION ............................................ 5-32 INSTALLATION......................................... 5-36 AC MAGNETO ROTOR AND STARTER CLUTCH ......................................................... 5-39 REMOVAL................................................. 5-40 INSPECTION ............................................ 5-41 INSTALLATION......................................... 5-42
OIL PAN AND OIL PUMP .............................. 5-44 REMOVAL ................................................ 5-47 INSPECTION ............................................ 5-47 INSTALLATION ........................................ 5-49 CRANKCASE ................................................. 5-51 REMOVAL ................................................ 5-53 INSPECTION ............................................ 5-53 INSTALLATION ........................................ 5-54 CONNECTING RODS AND PISTONS ........... 5-57 REMOVAL ................................................ 5-58 INSPECTION ............................................ 5-59 INSTALLATION ........................................ 5-65 CRANKSHAFT AND BALANCER SHAFT .... 5-68 REMOVE .................................................. 5-70 INSPECTION ............................................ 5-71 INSTALLATION ........................................ 5-74
ISC (IDLE SPEED CONTROL) UNIT........ 7-27 AIR FILTER CASE ......................................... 7-28 THROTTLE BODY .......................................... 7-29 INJECTORS.............................................. 7-30 REMOVAL................................................. 7-32 INSPECTION ............................................ 7-32 FUEL PRESSURE INSPECTION ............. 7-33 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .......... 7-34
CHAPTER 8. ELECTRICAL
SWITCH INSPECTION ..................................... 8-1 SWITCH INSPECTION ............................... 8-1 INSPECTING A SWITCH SHOWN IN THE MANUAL ............................................. 8-1 IGNITION SYSTEM .......................................... 8-2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................... 8-2 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................ 8-4 IGNITION SPARK GAP .............................. 8-6 IGNITION COIL........................................... 8-6 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR ......... 8-7 THROTTLE OVERRIDE SYSTEM (T.O.R.S.).................................................... 8-8 ENGINE STOP SWITCH ............................ 8-9 THROTTLE SWITCH .................................. 8-9 MAIN SWITCH .......................................... 8-10 ELECTRICAL STARTING SYSTEM .............. 8-11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................. 8-11 TROUBLESHOOTING .............................. 8-12 STARTER MOTOR ................................... 8-14 CHARGING SYSTEM ..................................... 8-18 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................. 8-18 TROUBLESHOOTING .............................. 8-19 BATTERY.................................................. 8-20 STATOR COIL .......................................... 8-20 LIGHTING SYSTEM ....................................... 8-22 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................. 8-22 TROUBLESHOOTING .............................. 8-24 BULB(S) .................................................... 8-27 HEADLIGHT BEAM SWITCH ................... 8-27 HEADLIGHT RELAY................................. 8-28 LOAD CONTROL RELAY ......................... 8-28 SIGNAL SYSTEM ........................................... 8-30 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................. 8-30 TROUBLESHOOTING .............................. 8-32 BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH ........................... 8-38
CHAPTER 6. COOLING SYSTEM

RADIATOR ....................................................... 6-1 INSPECTION .............................................. 6-3 INSTALLATION .......................................... 6-4 THERMOSTAT ................................................. 6-5 INSPECTION .............................................. 6-6 INSTALLATION .......................................... 6-6 WATER PUMP.................................................. 6-7 REMOVAL .................................................. 6-9 DISASSEMBLY........................................... 6-9 INSPECTION ............................................ 6-10 ASSEMBLY............................................... 6-10 INSTALLATION ........................................ 6-11 OIL COOLER AND HEAT EXCHANGER ...... 6-12 INSPECTION ............................................ 6-14
CHAPTER 7. FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM

FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ............................. 7-1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................... 7-2 ECU SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION ....... 7-4 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION TABLE ... 7-4 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART .................. 7-6 DIAGNOSTIC MODE.................................. 7-7 TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS.............. 7-13 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH ........................ 7-26 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................... 7-26
DC BACK BUZZER (FX10/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) ......... 8-38 COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR .... 8-39 OIL LEVEL SWITCH................................. 8-40 FUEL SENDER......................................... 8-40 SPEED SENSOR...................................... 8-41 GRIP WARMER SYSTEM .............................. 8-42 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................. 8-42 TROUBLESHOOTING.............................. 8-44 GRIP WARMER AND THUMB WARMER.................................................. 8-45 GRIP/THUMB WARMER ADJUSTMENT SWITCH.................................................... 8-45 COOLING SYSTEM........................................ 8-46 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................. 8-46 TROUBLESHOOTING.............................. 8-48 RADIATOR FAN MOTOR......................... 8-49 RADIATOR FAN MOTOR RELAY ............ 8-49
CHAPTER 9. SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................... 9-1 MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ................ 9-5 ENGINE ...................................................... 9-5 POWER TRAIN......................................... 9-10 CHASSIS .................................................. 9-16 ELECTRICAL............................................ 9-18 TIGHTENING TORQUE.................................. 9-20 ENGINE .................................................... 9-20 POWER TRAIN......................................... 9-22 CHASSIS .................................................. 9-25 GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ....... 9-26 DEFINITION OF UNITS .................................. 9-26 CABLE ROUTING .......................................... 9-28
SNOWMOBILE IDENTIFICATION
GEN INFO
GENERAL INFORMATION
SNOWMOBILE IDENTIFICATION
FRAME SERIAL NUMBER
The frame serial number 1 is located on the right-hand side of the frame (just below the front of the seat).
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The engine serial number 1 is located on the right-hand side of the crankcase.
NOTE:
Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-1
IMPORTANT INFORMATION IMPORTANT INFORMATION
GEN INFO
PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove all dirt, mud, dust, and foreign material before removal and disassembly. While cleaning, take care to protect the electrical parts, such as relays, switches, motor, resistors, controllers, etc., from high pressure water splashes. 2. Use proper tools and cleaning equipment. Refer to SPECIAL TOOLS.
3. When disassembling the snowmobile, keep mated parts together. This includes gears, cylinders, pistons, and other parts that have been mated through normal wear. Mated parts must be reused or replaced as an assembly.
4. During disassembly of the snowmobile, clean all parts and place them in trays in the order of disassembly. This will speed up assembly time and help ensure that all parts are reinstalled correctly.
5. Keep all parts away from any source of fire.
6. Be sure to keep to the tightening torque specifications. When tightening bolts, nuts, and screws, start with those that have larger diameters, and proceed from the inside to the outside in a crisscross pattern.
ALL REPLACEMENT PARTS

We recommend using genuine Yamaha parts for all replacements. Use oil and grease recommended by Yamaha for assembly and adjustments.
1-2
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
GASKETS, OIL SEALS, AND O-RINGS
GEN INFO
1. All gaskets, seals, and O-rings should be replaced when an engine is overhauled. All gasket surfaces, oil seal lips, and O-rings must be cleaned. 2. Properly oil all mating parts and bearings during reassembly. Apply grease to the oil seal lips.
LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS

All lock washers/plates 1 and cotter pins must be replaced if they are removed. Lock tab(s) should be bent along the bolt or nut flat(s) after the bolt or nut has been properly tightened.
BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS

Install the bearings 1 and oil seals 2 with their manufacturer marks or numbers facing outwards. (In other words, the stamped letters must be on the side exposed to view.) When installing oil seals, apply a light coating of low temperature lithium-soap-based grease to the seal lips. Oil the bearings liberally when installing.
CAUTION:
Do not use compressed air to spin the bearings dry. This causes damage to the surface of the bearings.
CIRCLIPS
All circlips should be inspected carefully before reassembly. Always replace piston pin clips after one use. Replace misshapen circlips. When installing a circlip 1, make sure that the sharp edged corner 2 is positioned opposite to the thrust 3 it receives. See the sectional view.
4 Shaft
LOCTITE
After installing fasteners that have LOCTITE applied, wait 24 hours before using the snowmobile. This will give the LOCTITE time to dry properly.
1-3
SPECIAL TOOLS SPECIAL TOOLS
GEN INFO
Some special tools are necessary for a completely accurate tune-up and assembly. Using the correct special tool will help prevent damage that can be caused by the use of improper tools or improvised techniques.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the correct part number when ordering the tool, since the part number may differ according to country. For USA and Canada, use part number starting with YB-, YM-, YU- or YS-. For others, use part number starting with 90890-.
FOR TUNE UP
Dial indicator gauge P/N: YU-A8428 Dial gauge P/N: 90890-03097 This gauge is used for runout measurements. Angle gauge Use goods on the market. This tool is used to tighten to specified angles.
Steering linkage alignment plate P/N: YS-01531 90890-01531 Locks steering column and pivot arm in place while adjusting the steering linkage for front-end alignment.
FOR ENGINE SERVICE

Piston pin puller P/N: YU-01304 Piston pin puller set P/N: 90890-01304 This tool is used to remove the piston pin. Heavy duty puller P/N: YU-33270-B Flywheel puller P/N: 90890-01362 Crankshaft protector P/N: YM-33282 Flywheel puller attachment P/N: 90890-04089 These tools are used to remove the magneto rotor.
1-4
SPECIAL TOOLS
Radiator pressure tester P/N: YU-24460-01 Radiator cap tester P/N: 90890-01325 This tester is used to check the cooling system. Radiator pressure tester adapter P/N: YU-33984 Radiator cap tester adapter P/N: 90890-01352 This adapter is used to check the cooling system.
GEN INFO
Oil filter wrench P/N: YM-01469 90890-01469 This tool is needed to loosen or tighten the oil filter cartridge.
Carburetor synchronizer P/N: YU-44456 Vacuum gauge P/N: 90890-03094 This tool is used to synchronize the throttle bodies. Engine compression tester P/N: YU-33223 Compression gauge P/N: 90890-03081 This tool is used to measure engine compression. Carburetor angle driver 2 P/N:90890-03173 This tool is used to synchronize the throttle bodies.
Valve spring compressor P/N: YM-04019 90890-04019 Valve spring compressor adapter 19.5 mm P/N: YM-04114 Valve spring compressor attachment P/N: 90890-04114 These tools are used to remove or install the valve assemblies.
1-5
SPECIAL TOOLS
Bearing driver 40 mm P/N: YM-04058 Middle driven shaft bearing driver P/N: 90890-04058 Mechanical seal installer P/N: 90890-04145 These tools are used to install the water pump seal.
GEN INFO
Universal magneto & rotor holder P/N: YU-01235 Rotor holding tool P/N: 90890-01235 This tool is used to hold the camshaft sprockets and oil pump driven gear. Valve guide remover (4.5 mm) P/N: YM-04116 Valve guide remover (4.5) P/N: 90890-04116 This tool is used to remove or install the valve guides. Valve guide installer (4.5 mm) P/N: YM-04117 Valve guide installer (4.5) P/N: 90890-04117 This tool is used to install the valve guides. Valve guide reamer (4.5 mm) P/N: YM-04118 Valve guide reamer (4.5) P/N: 90890-04118 This tool is used to rebore the new valve guides. Valve lapping tool P/N: YM-A8998 Valve lapper P/N: 90890-04101 This tool is needed to remove and install the valve lifters. Piston ring compressor P/N: YM-08037 90890-05158 This tool is used to compress the piston rings when installing the piston into the cylinder.
1-6
SPECIAL TOOLS
GEN INFO
Opama pet-4000 spark checker P/N: YM-34487 Ignition checker P/N: 90890-06754 This tool is used to check the ignition system component. Engine mount spacer wrench P/N: YS-01516 90890-01516 Used to turn the engine mounting bolt spacer when removing/installing engine. Yamaha bond No. 1215 P/N: 90890-85505 (Three Bond No.1215) This bond is used to seal two mating surfaces (e.g., crankcase mating surfaces.)
FOR POWER TRAIN SERVICE

Primary clutch holder P/N: YS-01880-A Sheave holder P/N: 90890-01701 This tool is used to hold the primary sheave and AC magneto rotor. Primary sheave puller (18 mm) P/N: YS-01881-A 1, YS-01881-1 2 90890-01898 This tool is used for removing the primary sheave.
Clutch spider separator P/N: YS-28890-C 90890-01711 This tool is used when disassembling and assembling the primary sheave.
Clutch separator adapter P/N: YS-34480 90890-01740 This tool is used when disassembling and assembling the primary sheave.
YXR clutch bushing jig kit P/N: YS-39752 90890-01528 This tool is used for removal and installation of primary clutch weight and roller bushings.
1-7
SPECIAL TOOLS
GEN INFO
Clutch bushing press P/N: YS-42424 90890-01529 This tool is used for removing and installing the post bushings (primary sheave cap bush, sliding sheave bush and torque cam bush). Track clip installer P/N: YS-91045-C 90890-01721 This tool is used for installing the track clip.
FOR FUEL INJECTION SERVICE

Fuel pressure adapter P/N: YM-03176 90890-03176 This tool is needed to measure fuel pressure. Pressure gauge P/N: YU-03153 90890-03153 This tool is used to measure fuel pressure.
FOR ELECTRICAL SERVICE

Analog pocket tester P/N: YU-03112-C Pocket tester P/N: 90890-03112 This instrument is necessary for checking the electrical components. Engine tachometer P/N: YU-08036-C 90793-80009 This tool is used to check engine speed.
Model 88 Multimeter with tachometer P/N: YU-A1927 Digital circuit tester P/N: 90890-03174 This instrument is necessary for checking the electrical components.
1-8
INTRODUCTION/PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
INSP ADJ
PERIODIC INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

INTRODUCTION
This chapter includes all information necessary to perform recommended inspections and adjustments. These preventive maintenance procedures, if followed, will ensure more reliable snowmobile operation and a longer service life. In addition, the need for costly overhaul work will be greatly reduced. This information applies to snowmobiles already in service as well as new snowmobiles that are being prepared for sale. All service technicians should be familiar with this entire chapter.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

INITIAL ITEM REMARKS 1 month or 800 km (500 mi) (40 hr) EVERY Seasonally or 4000 km (2500 mi) (200 hr)
Spark plugs Valve clearance Crankcase breather system Fuel filter Fuel line Fuel injection Exhaust system
Check condition. Adjust gap and clean. Replace if necessary. Check and adjust valve clearance when engine is cold. Check breather hose for cracks or damage. Replace if necessary. Check condition. Replace fuel pump assembly if necessary. Check fuel hose for cracks or damage. Replace if necessary. Check synchronization. Adjust if necessary. Check for leakage. Tighten or replace gasket if necessary. Every 40000 km (25000 mi)
It is recommended that these items be serviced by a Yamaha dealer.
2-1
GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART GENERAL MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION CHART
INSP ADJ
INITIAL EVERY Seasonally or 4000 km (2500 mi) (200 hr)
Every 20000 km (12000 mi)
ITEM
REMARKS
1 month or 800 km (500 mi) (40 hr)
Engine oil Engine oil filter cartridge Cooling system
Change (warm engine before draining) Replace. Check coolant level. Air bleed the cooling system if necessary. Check engagement and shift speed. Adjust if necessary. Whenever operating elevation is changed.
Primary and secondary clutches
Inspect sheaves for wear and damage. Inspect weights/rollers and bushings for wear for primary. Inspect ramp shoes/bushings for wear for secondary. Replace if necessary. Initial at 500 km (300 mi) and every 800 km (500 mi) thereafter.
Lubricate with specified grease. Drive chain Drive chain oil Brake and parking brake Control cables Disc brake installation Slide runners Skis and ski runners Steering system Steering bearings Ski and front suspension Suspension component Fittings and fasteners Battery Check chain slack. Adjust if necessary. Check oil level. Change. Adjust free play and/or replace pads if necessary. Change brake fluid. Make sure that operation is smooth. Lubricate if necessary. Check for slight free play. Lubricate shaft with specified grease as required. Check for wear and damage. Replace if necessary. Check for wear and damage. Replace if necessary. Check toe-out. Adjust if necessary. Check bearing assemblies for looseness. Lubricate with specified grease. Lubricate with specified grease. Lubricate with specified grease. Make sure that all nuts, bolts and screws are properly tightened. Tighten if necessary. Check condition. Charge if necessary. Every 1600 km (1000 mi) See NOTE following this chart.
It is recommended that these items be serviced by a Yamaha dealer.
NOTE:
Brake system: After disassembling the master cylinder or caliper cylinder, always change the brake fluid. Regularly check the brake fluid level and add fluid if necessary. Replace the oil seals of the master cylinder and caliper cylinder every two years. Replace the brake hose every four years, or if cracked or damaged.
2-2
SPARK PLUGS/FUEL LINE INSPECTION ENGINE

SPARK PLUGS
INSP ADJ
1. Remove: Left side cover Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 2. Remove: Ignition coils Spark plugs 3. Inspect: Electrodes 1 Damage/wear Replace the spark plug. Insulator color 2 Abnormal color Replace the spark plug Normal color is medium-to-light tan. 4. Measure: Spark plug gap a Out of specification Regap. Use a wire thickness gauge. Spark plug gap: 0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.031 in) If necessary, clean the spark plugs with a spark plug cleaner. Standard spark plug: NGK CR9E (NGK) Before installing a spark plug, clean the gasket surface and spark plug surface. 5. Install: Spark plugs Spark plug: 13 Nm (1.3 m kg, 9.4 ft lb)
NOTE:
Finger-tighten a the spark plug before torquing b it to specification.
FUEL LINE INSPECTION

1. Remove: Fuel tank cover Refer to SEAT AND FUEL TANK in CHAPTER 5. 2. Inspect: Fuel hose 1 Cracks/damage Replace.
T.
R.
2-3
COOLING SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant replacement
INSP ADJ
NOTE:
The coolant should be changed at least every season. 1. Place the snowmobile on a level surface. 2. Remove: Right lower cover Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 3. Remove: Radiator cap 1
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Pressurized scalding hot fluid and steam may be blown out, which could cause serious injury. When the engine has cooled, place a thick rag or a towel over the radiator cap. Slowly turn the cap counterclockwise until it stop. This allows any residual pressure to escape. When the hissing sound has stopped, press down on the cap while turning it counterclockwise to remove it. 4. Place an open container under the thermostat outlet hose, coolant reservoir hose and, for FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA only, heat exchanger. 5. Disconnect: Thermostat outlet hose 2 Coolant reservoir hose 3 6. Remove: Heat exchanger drain bolt 4 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 7. Drain the coolant.
NOTE:
Lift up the tail of the snowmobile to drain the coolant.
WARNING
Coolant is poisonous. It is harmful or fatal if swallowed. If coolant is swallowed, induce vomiting immediately and get immediate medical attention. If coolant splashes in your eyes, thoroughly wash them with water and consult a doctor. If coolant splashes on your skin or clothes, quickly wash it away with soap and water.
2-4
COOLING SYSTEM
8. Connect: Coolant reservoir hose Thermostat outlet hose 9. Fill: Cooling system
INSP ADJ
Recommended coolant: High quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing corrosion inhibitors Coolant mixing ratio (coolant:water): 3:2 (60%:40%) Total amount: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA 3.40 L (2.99 Imp qt, 3.59 US qt) FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA 4.70 L (4.14 Imp qt, 4.97 US qt)
CAUTION:
Hard water or salt water is harmful to engine parts. If soft water is not available, use boiled or distilled water. Do not use water containing impurities or oil. 10. Bleed the air from the cooling system.
1 2
11. Inspect: Cooling system Decrease of pressure (leaks) Repair as required. Inspection steps: Attach the cooling system tester 1 and adapter 2 to the radiator filler 3. Radiator cap tester: 90890-01325 Radiator pressure tester: YU-24460-01 Radiator cap tester adapter: 90890-01352 Radiator pressure tester adapter: YU-33984 Apply 100 kPa (1.0 kg/cm2, 14 psi). Measure the pressure with the gauge.
2-5
COOLING SYSTEM
Air bleeding steps:
INSP ADJ
FX10MT/FX10MTR/
NOTE:
For models other than FX10MTRA, skip steps 13.
Remove the cap 1 on the heat exchanger pipe. While slowly adding coolant to the radiator filler, drain the coolant until no more air bubbles appear. Install the cap 1. Add coolant to the full level a. Install the radiator cap. Apply and lock the parking brake. Start the engine and run it at less than the clutch engagement speed until the coolant circulates (approximately 3 ~ 5 minutes). The heat exchanger will be warm to the touch (FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA).
FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA
WARNING
To avoid severe injury or death: Make sure the snowmobile is securely supported with a suitable stand. Do not exceed the clutch engagement speed. Drive line damage and excessive V-belt wear could occur, or the snowmobile could unexpectedly move forward if the clutch engages. Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. Remove the radiator cap and bleed the cooling system again, as described above. No air bubbles OK. Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the LOW mark b, add coolant until it reaches the FULL mark c.
c b
2-6
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

NOTE:
INSP ADJ

Valve clearance adjustment should be made on a cold engine, at room temperature. When the valve clearance is to be measured or adjusted, the piston must be at the top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke. 1. Drain: Engine oil Refer to ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT. 2. Remove: Fuel tank Refer to SEAT AND FUEL TANK in CHAPTER 5. Oil tank Refer to OIL TANK in CHAPTER 5.
3. Remove: Cylinder head cover Refer to CAMSHAFTS in CHAPTER 5. Timing mark accessing screw 1 Crankshaft end accessing screw 2
1
4. Measure: Valve clearance Out of specification Adjust. Valve clearance (cold): Intake valve: 0.15 ~ 0.22 mm (0.0059 ~ 0.0087 in) Exhaust valve: 0.21 ~ 0.25 mm (0.0083 ~ 0.0098 in) Checking steps: Turn the crankshaft clockwise. When piston #3 is at TDC on the compression stroke, align the TDC mark a on the AC magneto rotor with the mark b on the AC magneto cover.
b a
EX
IN
NOTE:
TDC on the compression stroke can be found when the camshaft lobes are turned away from each other.
2-7
INSP ADJ
Measure the valve clearance with a thickness gauge 1.
NOTE:
If the valve clearance is incorrect, record the measured reading. Measure the valve clearance in the following sequence.
Valve clearance measuring sequence Cylinder #3 #2 #1

Front For each cylinder, starting with cylinder #3 at TDC, turn the crankshaft clockwise as specified in the following table. Degrees that the crankshaft is turned clockwise Cylinder Combustion cycle
Cylinder #2 Cylinder #1
120 240
5. Remove: Intake camshaft Exhaust camshaft
NOTE:
Refer to CAMSHAFTS in CHAPTER 5. When removing the timing chain and camshafts, fasten a wire to the timing chain to retrieve it if it falls into the crankcase.
2-8

6. Adjust: Valve clearance
INSP ADJ
Adjustment steps: Remove the valve lifter 1 and the valve pad 2 with a valve lapper 3. Valve lapper 90890-04101 Valve lapping tool YM-A8998
NOTE:
Cover the timing chain opening with a rag to prevent the valve pad from falling into the crankcase. Make a note of the position of each valve lifter 1 and valve pad 2 so that they can be installed in the correct place. Select the proper valve pad from the following table. Valve pad thickness range Nos. 120 ~ 240 1.20 ~ 2.40 mm (0.047 ~ 0.094 in) Available valve pads 25 thicknesses in 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) increments
NOTE:
The thickness a of each valve pad is marked in hundredths of millimeters on the side that touches the valve lifter. Since valve pads of various sizes are originally installed, the valve pad number must be rounded in order to reach the closest equivalent to the original. Round off the original valve pad number according to the following table. Last digit 0 or 2 5 8 Rounded value 0 5 10
2-9
INSP ADJ
EXAMPLE: Original valve pad number = 148 (thickness = 1.48 mm (0.058 in)) Rounded value = 150 Locate the rounded number of the original valve pad and the measured valve clearance in the valve pad selection table. The point where the column and row intersect is the new valve pad number.
NOTE:
The new valve pad number is only an approximation. The valve clearance must be measured again and the above steps should be repeated if the measurement is still incorrect.
2-10

VALVE PAD SELECTION TABLE INTAKE
0.00 ~ 0.04 0.05 ~ 0.09 0.10 ~ 0.14 0.15 ~ 0.22 0.23 ~ 0.27 0.28 ~ 0.32 0.33 ~ 0.37 0.38 ~ 0.42 0.43 ~ 0.47 0.48 ~ 0.52 0.53 ~ 0.57 0.58 ~ 0.62 0.63 ~ 0.67 0.68 ~ 0.72 0.73 ~ 0.77 0.78 ~ 0.82 0.83 ~ 0.87 0.88 ~ 0.92 0.93 ~ 0.97 0.98 ~ 1.02 1.03 ~ 1.07 1.08 ~ 1.12 1.13 ~ 1.17 1.18 ~ 1.22 1.23 ~ 1.27 1.28 ~ 1.32 1.33 ~ 1.37 1.38 ~ 1.42
Measured clearance
INSP ADJ
INSTALLED PAD NUMBER

120 125 130 135 120 120 125 120 125 130 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 140 125 130 135 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 145 130 135 140 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 150 135 140 145 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 155 140 145 150 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 160 145 150 155 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 165 150 155 160 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 170 155 160 165 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 175 180 185 160 165 170 165 170 175 170 175 180 Specification 180 185 190 185 190 195 190 195 200 195 200 205 200 205 210 205 210 215 210 215 220 215 220 225 220 225 230 225 230 235 230 235 240 235 240 240 190 175 180 185 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 195 180 185 190 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 200 185 190 195 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 205 190 195 200 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 210 195 200 205 215 220 225 230 235 240 215 200 205 210 220 225 230 235 240 220 205 210 215 225 210 215 220 230 215 220 225 235 220 225 230 240 225 230 235
exa
225 230 235 240 230 235 240 235 240 240
EXAMPLE: VALVE CLEARANCE: 0.15 ~ 0.22 mm (0.0059 ~ 0.0087 in) Installed is 150 Measured clearance is 0.30 mm (0.0118 in) Replace 150 pad with 160 pad
EXHAUST
0.00 ~ 0.02 0.03 ~ 0.07 0.08 ~ 0.12 0.13 ~ 0.17 0.18 ~ 0.20 0.21 ~ 0.25 0.26 ~ 0.30 0.31 ~ 0.35 0.36 ~ 0.40 0.41 ~ 0.45 0.46 ~ 0.50 0.51 ~ 0.55 0.56 ~ 0.60 0.61 ~ 0.65 0.66 ~ 0.70 0.71 ~ 0.75 0.76 ~ 0.80 0.81 ~ 0.85 0.86 ~ 0.90 0.91 ~ 0.95 0.96 ~ 1.00 1.01 ~ 1.05 1.06 ~ 1.10 1.11 ~ 1.15 1.16 ~ 1.20 1.21 ~ 1.25 1.26 ~ 1.30 1.31 ~ 1.35 1.36 ~ 1.40 1.41 ~ 1.45
Measured clearance
INSTALLED PAD NUMBER

120 125 130 135 140 145 120 120 125 120 125 130 120 125 130 135 120 125 130 135 140 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 150 125 130 135 140 145 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 155 130 135 140 145 150 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 160 135 140 145 150 155 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 165 140 145 150 155 160 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 170 145 150 155 160 165 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 175 180 185 150 155 160 155 160 165 160 165 170 165 170 175 170 175 180 Specification 180 185 190 185 190 195 190 195 200 195 200 205 200 205 210 205 210 215 210 215 220 215 220 225 220 225 230 225 230 235 230 235 240 235 240 240 190 165 170 175 180 185 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 195 170 175 180 185 190 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 200 175 180 185 190 195 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 205 180 185 190 195 200 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 210 185 190 195 200 205 215 220 225 230 235 240 215 190 195 200 205 210 220 225 230 235 240 220 195 200 205 210 215 225 200 205 210 215 220 230 205 210 215 220 225 235 210 215 220 225 230 240 215 220 225 230 235
exa
225 230 235 240 230 235 240 235 240 240
EXAMPLE: VALVE CLEARANCE: 0.21 ~ 0.25 mm (0.0083 ~ 0.0098 in) Installed is 175 Measured clearance is 0.35 mm (0.0138 in) Replace 175 pad with 185 pad
2-11
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT/ THROTTLE BODY SYNCHRONIZATION
INSP ADJ
Install the new valve pad 1 and the valve lifter 2.
NOTE:
Apply molybdenum disulfide oil to the valve pad and the valve lifter. The valve lifter must turn smoothly when rotated by hand. Install the valve lifter and the valve pad in the correct place. Install the exhaust and intake camshafts, timing chain and camshaft caps. Camshaft cap bolt: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
NOTE:
Refer to CAMSHAFTS in CHAPTER 5. Lubricate the camshaft caps, camshaft lobes, camshaft journals and camshaft cap bolts. Align the camshaft marks with the camshaft cap marks. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise several turns to seat the parts. Measure the valve clearance again. If the valve clearance is still out of specification, repeat all of the valve clearance adjustment steps until the specified clearance is obtained. 7. Install: All removed parts
NOTE:
For installation, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Add: Engine oil Refer to ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT.
THROTTLE BODY SYNCHRONIZATION NOTE:

Prior to synchronizing the throttle bodies, the valve clearance should be properly adjusted. 1. Remove: Fuel tank Refer to SEAT AND FUEL TANK in CHAPTER 5.
T.
R.
2-12
THROTTLE BODY SYNCHRONIZATION

2. Remove: Vacuum caps 1
INSP ADJ
3. Install: Vacuum gauge 1
Vacuum gauge: 90890-03094 Carburetor synchronizer: YU-44456 4. Install: Fuel tank Refer to SEAT AND FUEL TANK in CHAPTER 5. 5. Start the engine and let it warm up for several minutes, and then let it run at specified engine idling speed. Engine idle speed: 1,450 ~ 1,550 r/min 6. Adjust: Throttle body synchronization
2-13
THROTTLE BODY SYNCHRONIZATION THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT
INSP ADJ
Adjustment steps: With throttle body #1 as standard, adjust throttle body #1 and #2 using the synchronizing screws 1. Carburetor angle driver 2: 90890-03173
1
NOTE:
After each step, rev the engine two or three times, each time for less than a second, and check the synchronization again. Vacuum pressure at engine idling speed: 25.37 ~ 28.03 kPa (0.25 ~ 0.28 kg/cm2, 3.61~ 3.99 psi)
NOTE:
The difference in vacuum pressure between two throttle bodies should not exceed 1.3 kPa (0.01 kg/cm2, 0.18 psi). 7. Stop the engine and remove the measuring equipment. 8. Adjust: Throttle cable free play Refer to THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT.
THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT NOTE:

Adjust the throttle cable free play while the cable is in the cable guide. 1. Measure: Throttle cable free play a Out of specification Adjust. Throttle cable free play: 3.0 ~ 4.0 mm (0.12 ~ 0.16 in)
2-14
THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT

2
2. Adjust: Throttle cable free play
INSP ADJ
Throttle body side adjustment steps: Remove the left side cover. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. Loosen the locknut 1. Turn the adjusting nut 2 in direction a or b until the specified free play is obtained. Direction a Direction b Free play is increased. Free play is decreased.
Tighten the locknut.
NOTE:
If the specified throttle cable free play cannot be obtained on the throttle body side of the cable, use the adjusting nut on the handlebar side.
1 b 2 a
Handlebar side adjustment steps: Slide back the rubber cover. Loosen the locknut 1. Turn the adjusting nut 2 in direction a or b until the specified free play is obtained. Direction a Direction b Free play is increased. Free play is decreased.
Tighten the locknut. Slide the rubber cover to its original position.
NOTE:
After adjusting the free play, turn the handlebar to right and left, and make sure that the engine idling does not run faster.
2-15
THROTTLE OVERRIDE SYSTEM (T.O.R.S.) CHECK
INSP ADJ
THROTTLE OVERRIDE SYSTEM (T.O.R.S.) CHECK
WARNING
When checking the T.O.R.S.: Be sure the parking brake is applied. Be sure the throttle lever moves smoothly. Do not rev the engine to the point that the clutch engages, otherwise, the snowmobile could start moving forward unexpectedly, which could cause an accident. 1. Start the engine. 2. Hold the pivot point of the throttle lever away from the throttle switch by putting your thumb (above) and forefinger (below) between the throttle lever pivot 1 and engine stop switch housing 2. While holding as described above, press the throttle lever 3 gradually. The T.O.R.S. will be activated and the engine speed will be limited to less than the clutch engagement speed. Engagement speed: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA 3,550 ~ 3,950 r/min FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada 3,300 ~ 3,700 r/min FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe 3,100 ~ 3,500 r/min
WARNING
If the engine speed does not decrease to less than the clutch engagement speed, stop the engine by turning the main switch to the off position and check the electrical system.
2-16
COMPRESSION PRESSURE MEASUREMENT
INSP ADJ
COMPRESSION PRESSURE MEASUREMENT NOTE:

Insufficient compression pressure will result in a loss of performance. 1. Measure: Valve clearance Out of specification Adjust. Refer to VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT. 2. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off. 3. Remove: Fuel tank Refer to SEAT AND FUEL TANK in CHAPTER 5. 4. Remove: Spark plug
CAUTION:
Before removing the spark plugs, use compressed air to blow away any dirt accumulated in the spark plug wells to prevent it from falling into the cylinders.
5. Install: Compression gauge 1 Compression gauge: 90890-03081 Engine compression tester: YU-33223
2-17
COMPRESSION PRESSURE MEASUREMENT
INSP ADJ
6. Measure: Compression pressure Above the maximum pressure Inspect the cylinder head, valve surfaces, and piston crown for carbon deposits. Below the minimum pressure Squirt a few drops of oil into the affected cylinder and measure again. Refer to the following table. Compression pressure (with oil applied into cylinder) Reading Higher than without oil Diagnosis Piston ring(-s) wear or damage Repair. Piston, valves, cylinder head gasket or piston possibly defective Repair. Compression pressure (at sea level)
Same as without oil
Compression pressure (at sea level): Standard: 1,500 kPa (15.0 kg/cm2, 213.3 psi) at 400 r/min Minimum: 1,400 kPa (14.0 kg/cm2, 199.1 psi) at 400 r/min Maximum: 1,600 kPa (16.0 kg/cm2, 227.5 psi) at 400 r/min Measurement steps: Set the engine stop switch to RUN and turn the main switch to START. With the throttle wide open, crank the engine until the reading on the compression gauge stabilizes.
WARNING
To prevent sparking, disconnect all ignition coil couplers before cranking the engine.
NOTE:
The difference in compression pressure between cylinders should not exceed 100 kPa (1 kg/cm2, 14.2 psi). 7. Install: Spark plug Spark plug: 13 Nm (1.3 m kg, 9.4 ft lb)
T.
R.
2-18
ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION

1. Inspect: Engine oil level
INSP ADJ
ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION
1 2
CAUTION:
Do not run the engine with too much or not enough oil in the oil tank. Oil could flow into the air filter and the engine could be damaged. Inspection steps: Place the snowmobile on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Start the engine, warm it up for 10 ~ 15 minutes, and then turn off. Remove the right side cover. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. Disconnect the oil level switch coupler 1.
CAUTION:
Disconnect the oil level switch coupler before removing the oil level gauge. Otherwise the lead can twist and become severed. Remove the oil level gauge 2, wipe it clean, insert it back into the filler hole (without screwing it in), and then remove it again to check the oil level. The engine oil level should be between the maximum level mark H a and minimum level mark L b. Below the minimum level mark Add the recommended engine oil to the proper level.
-40 -20 0 20 40 60F
CAUTION:
When adding the engine oil, be careful not to fill above the maximum level mark H and minimum level mark L on the oil level gauge. Do not allow foreign materials to enter the oil tank. Recommended engine oil type: For USA/Canada YAMALUBE 4-S (0W-30) or SAE 0W-30 For Europe SAE 0W-30 Recommended engine oil grade: API service SG type or higher, JASO standard MA
USA/Canada Europe
YAMALUBE 4-S (0W-30) or SAE 0W-30
-40
-29
-18
-7
16C
-40 -29 -18 -7 4 16C
SAE 0W-30
2-19
ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION/ ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT

NOTE:
INSP ADJ
Before checking the engine oil level, wait a few minutes until the oil has settled. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off. Check the engine oil level again.
NOTE:
Before checking the engine oil level, wait a few minutes until the oil has settled.
CAUTION:
Use only 4-stroke engine oil. Engine oil also lubricates the starter clutch. In order to prevent clutch slippage, do not mix any chemical additives with the oil or use oils of a higher grade than CD. In addition, do not use oils labeled ENERGY CONSERVING II or higher.
ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT

1. Place the snowmobile on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Start the engine, warm up for several minutes, and then turn it off. 3. Remove: Lower cover (left and right) Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 4. Place containers under the engine oil pan and oil tank. 5. Remove: Bottom panel 1 6. Disconnect: Oil level switch coupler Refer to ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION. 7. Remove: Oil level gauge Refer to ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION.
1
8. Remove: Cylinder head oil filler cap 1
2-20
INSP ADJ
9. Remove: Oil pan engine oil drain bolt 1
NOTE:
A mark a is stamped in the oil pan near the oil pan drain bolt.
10. Remove: Oil tank engine oil drain bolt 1 11. Drain: Engine oil (completely from the oil pan and oil tank) 12. If the oil filter cartridge is also to be replaced, perform the following procedure.
1
2
Replacement steps: Remove the oil filter cartridge 1 with an oil filter wrench 2.
NOTE:
Make sure that the O-ring is removed together with the oil filter cartridge. If the O-ring remains attached to the crankcase, oil leakage may occur. Oil filter wrench: 90890-01469 YM-01469
Apply a thin coat of engine oil onto the O-ring 3 of the new oil filter cartridge.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the O-ring 3 is positioned correctly in the groove of the oil filter cartridge. Tighten the new oil filter cartridge to specification with an oil filter wrench. Oil filter cartridge: 17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft lb)
T.
R.
2-21
INSP ADJ
13. Install: Drain bolts (along with the new gaskets) Oil tank engine oil drain bolt: 16 Nm (1.6 m kg, 11 ft lb) Oil pan engine oil drain bolt: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
14. Fill: Engine oil (with the specified amount of the recommended engine oil) Add 2.0 L (1.76 Imp qt, 2.11 US qt) of the recommended engine oil to the oil tank, and then install and tighten the oil level gauge and the cylinder head oil filler cap. Quantity: Total amount: 3.90 L (3.43 Imp qt, 4.12 US qt) Periodic oil change: 3.00 L (2.64 Imp qt, 3.17 US qt) With oil filter cartridge replacement: 3.20 L (2.82 Imp qt, 3.38 US qt) 15. Inspect: Engine and oil tank (for oil leaks) 16. Inspect: Engine oil level Refer to ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION.
17. Inspect: Engine oil pressure
T.
R.
1
Inspection steps: Slightly loosen the oil check bolt 1. Start the engine and keep it idling until engine oil starts to seep from the oil check bolt. If no engine oil comes out after one minute, turn the engine off so that it will not seize. Check the engine oil passages, the oil filter and the oil pump for damage or leakage. Start the engine after solving the problem(-s) and check the engine oil pressure again. Tighten the oil check bolt to specification. Oil check bolt: 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb)
T.
R.
2-22
CYLINDER HEAD BREATHER HOSE INSPECTION/ THROTTLE BODY JOINTS INSPECTION/ CHECKING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT
INSP ADJ
CYLINDER HEAD BREATHER HOSE INSPECTION

1. Inspect: Cylinder head breather hose 1 Cracks/damage Replace. Loosen connection Connect properly.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the cylinder head breather hose is routed correctly.
THROTTLE BODY JOINTS INSPECTION

1. Inspect: Throttle body joints 1 Cracks/damage Replace the defective parts. Refer to THROTTLE BODY in CHAPTER 7.
CHECKING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT
1. Remove: Headlight stay Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 2. Remove: Air filter case cover 1
NOTE:
Slide the air filter case cover toward the right side of the snowmobile and remove it. 3. Lift up the air filter element frame 1 and remove the air filter element.
2-23
CHECKING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT

4. Clean: Air filter element
INSP ADJ
NOTE:
Remove the snow. 5. Inspect: Air filter element Damage/clogs Replace. 6. Install: Air filter element Air filter element frame Air filter case cover
NOTE:
Push down on the air filter element frame until a click is heard.
2-24
EXHAUST SYSTEM INSPECTION

B A
INSP ADJ
EXHAUST SYSTEM INSPECTION
8 9 (6) 6 (3)
5 4 7 2
1. Remove: Fuel tank Refer to SEAT AND FUEL TANK in CHAPTER 5. 2. Inspect: Exhaust pipe joints 1 Exhaust pipe 2 Muffler 3 Exhaust pipe bands 4 Muffler band 5 Cracks/damage Replace. Exhaust pipe joint gasket 6 Muffler gasket 7 Exhaust gas leaks Replace. 3. Inspect: Tightening torque Exhaust pipe joint bolt 8: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) Exhaust pipe band bolt 9: 9 Nm (0.9 m kg, 6.5 ft lb) Muffler bolt (rear side) 0: 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) Muffler bolt (front side) A: 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) Muffler band bolt B: 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb) Exhaust pipe bolt C: 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
1
T.
4. Install: Fuel tank Refer to SEAT AND FUEL TANK in CHAPTER 5.
R.
2-25
SHEAVE OFFSET ADJUSTMENT POWER TRAIN
INSP ADJ
SHEAVE OFFSET ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove: Left side cover Drive guard Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 2. Remove: Drive V-belt 3. Measure: Sheave offset a Use a straightedge that is approximately 470 mm (18.5 in) long, 20 mm (0.79 in) wide, and 4 mm (0.16 in) thick. Out of specification Adjust. Sheave offset: 13.5 ~ 16.5 mm (0.53 ~ 0.65 in)
NOTE:
Push the secondary sheave inward towards the frame, and then measure the sheave offset.
2 1
4. Adjust: Sheave offset Adjustment steps: Apply the brake to lock the secondary sheave. Remove the secondary sheave bolt 1, washer 2, shim(s) (left), and secondary sheave 3. Install the appropriate shim(s) (right) 4 from the following table so that the sheave offset is within specification. Shim size Part number 90201-286K9 Thickness 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
2-26
SHEAVE OFFSET ADJUSTMENT

Install the secondary sheave bolt and washer.
INSP ADJ
sheave, secondary
Secondary sheave bolt: 64 Nm (6.4 m kg, 46 ft lb)
Recheck the sheave offset. If out of specification, repeat the above steps.
NOTE:
When adjusting the sheave offset, the secondary sheave free play (clearance) should be adjusted.
5. Measure: Secondary sheave free play (clearance) a Use a feeler gauge. Out of specification Adjust. Secondary sheave free play (clearance): 1.0 ~ 2.0 mm (0.04 ~ 0.08 in)
6. Adjust: Secondary sheave free play (clearance) Adjustment steps: Apply the parking brake to lock the secondary sheave. Remove the secondary sheave bolt 1 and washer 2. Install the appropriate shim(s) (left) 3 from the following table so that the secondary sheave free play is within specification. Shim size Part number 90201-252F1 90201-25527 Thickness 0.5 mm (0.02 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
T.
R.
2-27
DRIVE V-BELT
DRIVE V-BELT
INSP ADJ
WARNING
When installing the new V-belt, make sure that it is positioned from 1.5 mm (0.06 in) above the edge of the secondary sheave to 0.5 mm (0.02 in) below the edge a. If the V-belt is not positioned correctly, the clutch engagement speed will be changed. The snowmobile may move unexpectedly when the engine is started. Adjust the V-belt position by removing or adding a spacer 1 on each adjusting bolt 2.
CAUTION:
As the V-belt wears, adjustment may be necessary. To ensure proper clutch performance, the V-belt position should be adjusted by adding a spacer on each adjusting bolt when the V-belt position reaches 1.5 mm (0.06 in) below the edge. New belt width: 34.1 mm (1.34 in) Belt wear limit width: 32.5 mm (1.28 in)
1. Measure: V-belt position a
NOTE:
Install the new V-belt onto the secondary sheave only. Do not force the V-belt between the sheaves; the sliding and fixed sheaves must touch each other. Standard V-belt height: 0.5 ~ 1.5 mm (0.02 ~ 0.06 in)
2-28
DRIVE V-BELT
INSP ADJ
Adjustment Remove a spacer
2. Adjust the position of the V-belt by removing or adding a spacer 1 on each adjusting bolt 2. V-belt position More than 1.5 mm (0.06 in) above the edge From 1.5 mm (0.06 in) above the edge to 0.5 mm (0.02 in) below the edge More than 0.5 mm (0.02 in) below the edge Part number 90201-061H1 90201-06037
Not necessary (It is correct.)
Add spacer
Thickness 0.5 mm (0.02 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
3. Tighten: Secondary sheave adjusting bolt 2 Secondary sheave adjusting bolt: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
4. Inspect: Drive V-belt Cracks/damage/wear Replace. Oil or grease on the V-belt Check the primary and secondary sheaves.
5. Inspect: Primary sheave Secondary sheave Oil or grease on the primary and secondary sheaves Use a rag soaked in lacquer thinner or solvent to remove the oil or grease, and then check the primary and secondary sheaves.
T.
R.
2-29
DRIVE V-BELT/ ENGAGEMENT SPEED CHECK
INSP ADJ
6. Measure: Drive V-belt circumference a Out of specification Replace. V-belt circumference: 1,129 ~ 1,137 mm (44.4 ~ 44.8 in)
ENGAGEMENT SPEED CHECK

1. Place the snowmobile on a level surface. 2. Inspect: Clutch engagement speed Inspection steps: Start the engine, and open the throttle lever gradually. Check the engine speed when the snowmobile starts moving forward. Out of specification Adjust the primary sheave. Engagement speed: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA 3,550 ~ 3,950 r/min FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada 3,300 ~ 3,700 r/min FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe 3,100 ~ 3,500 r/min
2-30
PARKING BRAKE PAD INSPECTION/ PARKING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT

a a
INSP ADJ
PARKING BRAKE PAD INSPECTION

1. Remove: Right side cover Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 2. Inspect: Parking brake pad Wear limit a reached Replace the parking brake assembly. Parking brake pad wear limit: 1.2 mm (0.05 in)
PARKING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT

1. Remove: Right side cover Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 2. Measure: Parking brake cable distance Out of specification Adjust. Parking brake cable distance: 43.5 ~ 46.5 mm (1.713 ~ 1.831 in) 3. Adjust: Parking brake cable Adjustment steps: Loosen the locknut 1. Turn the adjusting nut 2 in or out until the specified distance a is obtained. Turning in Turning out Distance is increased. Distance is decreased.
Tighten the locknut. Parking brake cable locknut: 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb)
T.
R.
2-31
PARKING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT/ BRAKE FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION
INSP ADJ
4. Measure: Brake pad clearance (a + b) Out of specification Adjust. Brake pad clearance (a + b): 1.5 ~ 2.0 mm (0.059 ~ 0.079 in) 5. Adjust: Brake pad clearance Adjustment steps: Loosen the locknut 1. Turn the adjusting bolt 2 in or out until the specified clearance between the parking brake pad 3 and brake disc 4 is obtained. Tighten the locknut. Parking brake adjusting locknut: 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 1.1 ft lb)
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION

1. Place the snowmobile on a level surface. 2. Check: Fluid level Fluid level is under the lower level line a Fill to the proper level. Recommended brake fluid: DOT 4
NOTE:
For a correct reading of the brake fluid level, make sure that the top of the handlebar brake master cylinder reservoir is horizontal.
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may corrode painted surfaces or plastic parts. Always clean up spilled fluid immediately.
T.
R.
2-32
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION/ BRAKE PAD INSPECTION/BRAKE HOSE INSPECTION

WARNING
INSP ADJ
Use only the designated brake fluid. Other fluids may deteriorate the rubber seals, causing leakage and poor brake performance. Refill with the same type of fluid. Mixing fluids may result in a harmful chemical reaction leading to poor brake performance. When refilling, be careful that water does not enter the brake master cylinder reservoir. Water will significantly lower the boiling point of the fluid and may cause vapor lock.
BRAKE PAD INSPECTION

1. Remove: Right side cover Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 2. Apply the brake lever. 3. Inspect: Brake pad wear limit a Wear indicator groove 1 almost disappeared Replace as a set. Wear limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
BRAKE HOSE INSPECTION

1. Inspect: Brake hose Cracks/damage/wear Replace. 2. Check: Fluid leakage Apply the brake lever several times. Fluid leakage Replace the defective parts.
2-33
AIR BLEEDING (HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM)
INSP ADJ
AIR BLEEDING (HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM)
WARNING
Bleed the brake system in the following cases: The system has been disassembled. A brake hose is loosened or removed. The brake fluid has been very low. Brake operation is faulty. If the brake system is not properly bled a loss of braking performance may occur. 1. Remove: Right side cover Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 2. Bleed: Brake system Air bleeding steps: a. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with the proper brake fluid. b. Install the diaphragm. Be careful not to spill any fluid or allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to overflow. c. Connect clear plastic hoses 1 tightly to the brake caliper bleed screws 2. d. Place the other end of the hoses in a container. e. Slowly apply the brake lever several times. f. Pull the lever in, then hold the lever in position. g. Loosen the bleed screws and allow the brake lever to travel towards its limit. h. Tighten the bleed screws when the brake lever limit has been reached, then release the lever. i. Repeat steps (e) to (h) until all of the air bubbles have disappeared from the fluid. j. Tighten the bleed screws. Bleed screw: 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb)
2 1
NOTE:
If bleeding is difficult, it may be necessary to let the brake fluid settle for a few hours. Repeat the bleeding procedure when the tiny bubbles in the system have disappeared. k. Add brake fluid to the proper level. Refer to BRAKE FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION.
WARNING
After bleeding the brake system, check the brake operation.
T.
R.
2-34
DRIVE CHAIN
DRIVE CHAIN
Oil level inspection
INSP ADJ
WARNING
The engine and muffler will be very hot after the engine has run. Avoid touching a hot engine and muffler while they are still hot with any part of your body or clothing during inspection or repair. 1. Remove: Right side cover Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 2. Place the snowmobile on a level surface. 3. Check: Oil level
Checking steps: Remove the dipstick 1 and wipe it off with a clean rag, and then screw it back into the filler hole. Remove the dipstick and check that the oil level is within the range show at the bottom of the dipstick. If the oil does not reach the bottom of the dipstick, add sufficient oil of the recommended type to raise it to the correct level.
FX10RT/FX10MT FX10/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA
Recommended oil: Gear oil GL-3 75W or 80W
CAUTION:

Make sure that no foreign material enters the drive chain.
2-35
DRIVE CHAIN
INSP ADJ
Oil replacement Oil replacement steps: Remove the right lower cover. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. Place the drive chain cover under the drain hole. Remove the oil drain bolt (along with the gasket) 1 and drain the oil.
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove any oil from the heat protector. Install the new gasket and oil drain bolt 1. Oil drain bolt: 16 Nm (1.6 m kg, 11 ft lb) Recommended oil: Gear oil GL-3 75W or 80W Oil capacity: 0.20 L (0.18 Imp qt, 0.21 US qt)
1 2
Chain slack adjustment 1. Adjust: Drive chain slack Adjustment steps: Loosen the locknut 1. Turn the adjusting bolt 2 clockwise until it is finger tight, and then loosen it 1/4 turn. Hold the adjusting bolt 2 in place while tightening the chain adjusting locknut 1. Drive chain adjusting locknut: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
2-36
TRACK TENSION ADJUSTMENT
INSP ADJ
WARNING
A broken track or track fittings, and debris thrown by the track could be dangerous to an operator or bystanders. Observe the following precautions. Do not allow anyone to stand behind the snowmobile when the engine is running. When the rear of the snowmobile is raised to allow the track to spin, a suitable stand must be used to support the rear of the snowmobile. Never allow anyone to hold the rear of the snowmobile off the ground to allow the track to spin. Never allow anyone near a rotating track. Inspect the condition of the track frequently. Replace the track if it is damaged to a level where the fabric reinforcement material is visible. 1. Lift the rear of the snowmobile onto a suitable stand to raise the track off the ground. 2. Measure: Track deflection a Using a spring scale 1, pull down on the center of the track with 100 N (10 kg, 22 lb) of force. Out of specification Adjust. Track deflection: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA 25.0 ~ 30.0 mm (0.98 ~ 1.18 in) FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA 30.0 ~ 35.0 mm (1.18 ~ 1.38 in)
2-37

3. Adjust: Track deflection
INSP ADJ
Adjustment steps: a. Place the snowmobile onto a suitable stand to raise the track off of the ground. b. Loosen the rear axle nut 1. c. Start the engine and rotate the track once or twice. Stop the engine. d. Check the track alignment with the slide runner 2. If the alignment is incorrect, turn the left and right adjusters to adjust. Track alignment 3 Left adjuster 4 Right adjuster
5 6 7 a Slide runner Track Track metal Gap Forward
Shifted to right Turn out Turn in
Shifted to left Turn in Turn out
e. Adjust the track deflection until the specified amount is obtained. Track deflection 3 Left adjuster 4 Right adjuster More than specified Turn in Turn in Less than specified Turn out Turn out
CAUTION:
The adjusters should be turned an equal amount. f. Recheck the alignment and deflection. If necessary, repeat steps (c) to (e) until the specified amount is obtained. g. Tighten the rear axle nut. Rear axle nut: 75 Nm (7.5 m kg, 54 ft lb)
T.
R.
2-38
SLIDE RUNNER INSPECTION/ MAXIMIZING DRIVE TRACK LIFE
INSP ADJ
SLIDE RUNNER INSPECTION

1. Inspect: Slide runner 1 Cracks/damage/wear Replace. 2. Measure: Slide runner wear limit a Out of specification Replace. Slide runner wear limit: 10.5 mm (0.41 in)
MAXIMIZING DRIVE TRACK LIFE

Recommendations Track tension During initial break-in, the new drive track will tend to stretch quickly as the track settles. Be sure to correct the track tension and alignment frequently. (See pages 2-37 ~ 2-38 for adjustment procedures.) A loose track can slip (ratchet), derail or catch on suspension parts causing severe damage. Do not overtighten the drive track, otherwise it may increase the friction between the track and the slide runners, resulting in the rapid wear of both components. Also, this may put an excessive load on the suspension components, resulting in component failure. Marginal snow The drive track and the slide runners are lubricated and cooled by snow and water. To prevent the drive track and slide runners from overheating, avoid sustained high-speed usage in areas such as icy trails, frozen lakes and rivers that have minimal snow coverage. An overheated track will be weakened internally, which may cause failure or damage.
2-39
MAXIMIZING DRIVE TRACK LIFE
INSP ADJ
Off-trail riding Avoid off-trail riding until there is sufficient snow coverage. It generally takes several feet of snow to provide a good overall base to properly cover debris, such as rocks, logs, etc. If snow coverage is not sufficient, stay on trails to avoid impact damage to the drive track. Studded track In general, track life will be shortened when studs are installed. Drilling stud holes into the drive track will cut the internal fibers, which weakens the track. Avoid spinning the drive track. Studs may catch on an object and pull out of the track, leaving tears and damage around the already weakened area. To minimize possible damage, consult your stud manufacturer for installation and stud pattern recommendations. Yamaha does not recommend track studding.
2-40
SKI/SKI RUNNER/STEERING SYSTEM CHASSIS

SKI/SKI RUNNER
INSP ADJ
1. Inspect: Ski Ski runner Damage/wear Replace. Ski runner thickness a Plastic ski thickness b Out of specification Replace. Ski runner wear limit: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA 8 mm (0.31 in) FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA 6 mm (0.24 in) Plastic ski wear limit: FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA 12 mm (0.47 in) FX10 13 mm (0.51 in) FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA 24 mm (0.95 in)
CAUTION:
To avoid scratching, wearing and damaging the plastic skis, be careful when loading and unloading the snowmobile and avoid riding in areas with little or no snow and on surfaces with sharp edges such as concrete, curbs, etc.
STEERING SYSTEM
Free play check 1. Check: Steering system free play Move the handlebar up and down and back and forth. Turn the handlebar slightly to the right and left. Excessive free play Check that the handlebar, tie rod ends and relay rod ends are installed securely in position. If free play still exists, check the steering bearing, front suspension links and ski mounting area for wear. Replace if necessary.
2-41
STEERING SYSTEM
INSP ADJ
Toe-out adjustment 1. Place the snowmobile on a level surface. 2. Measure: Ski toe-out (a c) Ski stance b Point the skis forward. Out of specification Adjust. Ski toe-out: 0 ~ 15 mm (0 ~ 0.59 in) Ski stance (center to center): FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA 1,050 mm (41.3 in) FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA 980 mm (38.6 in)
3. Adjust: Ski toe-out
1
LT
1
LT
Adjustment steps: Remove the shroud. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. Loosen the locknuts (tie-rods) 1. Turn the tie rods 2 in or out until the specified toe-out is obtained. Tighten the locknuts (tie-rods) 1. Tie-rod end locknut: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) LOCTITE
CAUTION:
After tightening the inside and outside ball joint locknuts 1, make sure the tie rods 2 can be rotated freely through the ball joint travel. If not, loosen the locknuts 1 and reposition the ball joint so that the tie rods 2 can be rotated freely. Tighten the locknuts to specification.
T.
R.
2-42
BRAKE LEVER ADJUSTMENT/LUBRICATION

1 c a 2b
1. Adjust: Brake lever position a
INSP ADJ
BRAKE LEVER ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment steps: While pushing the brake lever forward, loosen the locknut 1. While pushing the brake lever forward, turn the adjusting bolt 2 in direction b or c until the brake lever is in the desired position. Tighten the locknut.
CAUTION:
Be sure to tighten the locknut, as failing to do so will cause poor brake performance.
LUBRICATION
Brake lever, throttle lever and throttle cable end 1. Lubricate the brake lever pivot, throttle lever and the ends of the throttle cables. Recommended lubricant: Throttle lever and throttle cable end: ESSO Beacon 325 Grease or Aeroshell Grease #7A Brake lever pivot: Silicon grease
WARNING
Apply a dab of grease onto only the end of the cables. Do not grease the throttle cables. They could freeze and cause a loss of control.
2-43
LUBRICATION
INSP ADJ
Rear suspension 1. Use a grease gun to inject grease into the nipples. 2. Apply grease to the pivoting parts. Recommended lubricant: ESSO Beacon 325 Grease or Aeroshell Grease #7A
1 2 FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA Nipple Nipple (both sides)
2-44
HEADLIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT ELECTRICAL
INSP ADJ
HEADLIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT
The following procedure applies to both of the headlight bulbs. 1. Remove: Shroud Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 2. Disconnect: Headlight coupler 1 3. Remove: Headlight bulb cover 2 4. Detach: Headlight bulb holder 3 5. Remove: Headlight bulb 4 6. Install: Headlight bulb New Secure the new headlight bulb with the headlight bulb holder.
CAUTION:
Avoid touching the glass part of the headlight bulb to keep it free from oil, otherwise the transparency of the glass, the life of the bulb and the luminous flux will be adversely affected. If the headlight bulb gets soiled, thoroughly clean it with a cloth moistened with alcohol or lacquer thinner. 7. Attach: Headlight bulb holder 8. Install: Headlight bulb cover 9. Connect: Headlight coupler 10. Install: Shroud Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3.
2-45
HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT/BATTERY INSPECTION
INSP ADJ
HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT

1. Place the snowmobile on a level surface. 2. Place the snowmobile in front of a wall at the recommended distance D. Refer to the table below. 3. Measure the distance H from the floor to the center of the headlight and place a mark on the wall at that height. 4. With a person sitting on the snowmobile, apply the parking brake, start the engine and let it idle. 5. Switch on the headlight high beam and check the height of the projected beam on the wall. The projection should be at the position marked in step 3 or 1/2 lower (set range S). D S 3.0 m (10 ft) 26 mm (1.0 in)
H: Height
7.6 m (25 ft) 66 mm (2.6 in)

S: Set range
D: Distance
6. Adjust: Headlight beam (vertically) Adjustment steps: Remove the shroud. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. Turn the adjusting screw 1 in direction a or b to adjust the headlight beams. Direction a Direction b Headlight beam is raised. Headlight beam is lowered.
b a
a b 1
BATTERY INSPECTION
WARNING
Batteries generate explosive hydrogen gas and contain electrolyte which is made of poisonous and highly caustic sulfuric acid. Therefore, always follow these preventive measures: Wear protective eye gear when handling or working near batteries. Charge batteries in a well-ventilated area. Keep batteries away from fire, sparks or open flames (e.g., welding equipment, lighted cigarettes). DO NOT SMOKE when charging or handling batteries. KEEP BATTERIES AND ELECTROLYTE OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. Avoid bodily contact with electrolyte as it can cause severe burns or permanent eye injury.
2-46
BATTERY INSPECTION
INSP ADJ
First aid in case of bodily contact: External SKIN Wash with water. EYES Flush with water for 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. Internal Drink large quantities of water or milk followed with milk of magnesia, beaten egg or vegetable oil. Get immediate medical attention.
CAUTION:
This is a sealed battery. Never remove the sealing caps because the balance between cells will not be maintained and battery performance will deteriorate. Charging time, charging amperage and charging voltage for a MF battery are different from those of conventional batteries. The MF battery should be charged as explained in the charging method illustrations. If the battery is overcharged, the electrolyte level will drop considerably. Therefore, take special care when charging the battery.
NOTE:
Since MF batteries are sealed, it is not possible to check the charge state of the battery by measuring the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Therefore, the charge of the battery has to be checked by measuring the voltage at the battery terminals. 1. Remove: Right side cover Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3.
2. Disconnect: Battery leads (from the battery terminals)
1 2 3
2-47
CAUTION:
First, disconnect the negative battery lead 1, then the positive battery lead 2. 3. Remove: Battery bracket 3
BATTERY INSPECTION
4. Remove: Battery 5. Inspect: Battery charge
INSP ADJ
Inspection steps: Connect a pocket tester to the battery terminals. Positive tester probe positive battery terminal Negative tester probe negative battery terminal
NOTE:
The charge state of a MF battery can be checked by measuring its open-circuit voltage (i.e., the voltage when the positive terminal is disconnected). No charging is necessary when the open-circuit voltage equals or exceeds 12.8 V. Check the charge of the battery, as shown in the charts and the following example. Example Open-circuit voltage = 12.0 V Charging time = 6.5 hours Charge of the battery = 20 ~ 30%
Open-circuit voltage (V) Charging time (hours) Relationship between the open-circuit voltage and the charging time at 20 C (68 F) These values vary with the temperature, the condition of the battery plates, and the electrolyte level. Time (minutes) Charging Ambient temperature 20 C (68 F) Check the open-circuit voltage. Charging condition of the battery (%)
2-48
BATTERY INSPECTION
INSP ADJ
6. Charge: Battery (refer to the appropriate charging method illustration)
WARNING
Do not quick charge a battery.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the battery vent is free of obstructions. Never remove the MF battery sealing caps. Do not use a high-rate battery charger. They force a high-amperage current into the battery quickly and can cause battery overheating and battery plate damage. If it is impossible to regulate the charging current on the battery charger, be careful not to overcharge the battery. When charging a battery, be sure to remove it from the snowmobile. (If charging has to be done with the battery mounted on the snowmobile, disconnect the negative lead from the battery terminal.) To reduce the chance of sparks, do not plug in the battery charger until the battery charger leads are connected to the battery. Before removing the battery charger lead clips from the battery terminals, be sure to turn off the battery charger. Make sure that the battery charger lead clips are in full contact with the battery terminal and that they are not shorted. A corroded battery charger lead clip may generate heat in the contact area and a weak clip spring may cause sparks. If the battery becomes hot to the touch at any time during the charging process, disconnect the battery charger and let the battery cool before reconnecting it. Hot batteries can explode! As shown in the following illustration, the open-circuit voltage of a MF battery stabilizes about 30 minutes after charging has been completed. Therefore, wait 30 minutes after charging is completed before measuring the open-circuit voltage.
2-49
BATTERY INSPECTION
Charging method using a variable voltage charger
Charger AMP meter
INSP ADJ
Measure the open-circuit voltage prior to charging.
NOTE: Voltage should be measured 30 minutes after the snowmobile is stopped. NOTE: Set the charging voltage at 16 ~ 17 V. (If the setting is lower, charging will be insufficient. If too high, the battery will be overcharged.)
Connect a charged and AMP meter to the battery and start charging.
YES
Make sure that the current is higher than the standard charging current written on the battery.
NO
By turning the charging voltage adjust dial, set the charging voltage at 20 ~ 24 V.
Adjust the voltage so that the current is at the standard charging level.
YES
Monitor the amperage for 3 ~ 5 minutes to check if the standard charging current is reached. NO
Set the time according to the charging time suitable for the open-circuit voltage. Refer to BATTERY INSPECTION.
If the current does not exceed the standard charging current after 5 minutes, replace the battery.
If charging requires more than 5 hours, it is advisable to check the charging current after a lapse of 5 hours. If there is any change in the amperage, readjust the voltage to obtain the standard charging current.
Measure the battery open-circuit voltage after leaving the battery unused for more than 30 minutes. 12.8 V or more --- Charging is complete. 12.7 V or less --- Recharging is required. Under 12.0 V --- Replace the battery.
2-50
BATTERY INSPECTION
Charging method using a constant voltage charger Measure the open-circuit voltage prior to charging.
INSP ADJ
NOTE: Voltage should be measured 30 minutes after the snowmobile is stopped.
Connect a charger and AMP meter to the battery and start charging.
YES
Make sure that the current is higher than the standard charging current written on the battery.
NO
Charge the battery until the batterys charging voltage is 15 V.

NOTE: Set the charging time at 20 hours (maximum).
This type of battery charger cannot charge the MF battery. A variable voltage charger is recommended.
Charger
Measure the battery open-circuit voltage after leaving the battery unused for more than 30 minutes. 12.8 V or more --- Charging is complete. 12.7 V or less --- Recharging is required. Under 12.0 V --- Replace the battery.
AMP meter Volt meter
2-51
BATTERY INSPECTION/FUSE INSPECTION

7. Install: Battery 8. Install: Battery bracket 9. Connect: Battery leads (to the battery terminals)
INSP ADJ
2 1
CAUTION:
First, connect the positive battery lead 1, then the negative battery lead 2. 10. Check: Battery terminals Dirt Clean with a wire brush. Loose connection Connect properly. 11. Lubricate: Battery terminals Recommended lubricant: Dielectric grease
FUSE INSPECTION
The following procedure applies to all of the fuses.
CAUTION:
To avoid a short circuit, always turn the main switch off when checking or replacing a fuse. 1. Remove: Right side cover Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. 2. Inspect: Continuity Inspection steps: Connect the pocket tester to the fuse and check the continuity.
NOTE:
Set the pocket tester selector to 1. Pocket tester: 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester: YU-03112-C If the pocket tester indicates , replace the fuse.
2-52
FUSE INSPECTION
2 8
3. Replace: Blown fuse
INSP ADJ
1
Replacing steps: Turn the main switch off. Install a new fuse of the correct amperage. Turn the main switch on and verify if the electrical circuit is operational. If the fuse immediately blows again, check the electrical circuit. Item Amperage 40 A 10 A 20 A 3A 3A 20 A 10 A 20 A 10 A 3A Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
6 7 4 5 3
1 Main fuse 2 Fuel injection system fuse 3 Headlight fuse 4 Signal fuse 5 Auxiliary DC jack fuse*1 6 Ignition fuse 7 Radiator fan motor fuse 8 Reserve fuse
*1:
WARNING
Never use a fuse with an amperage other than that specified. Improvising or using a fuse with the wrong amperage rating may cause extensive damage to the electrical system, cause the lighting, ignition, grip warmer, signal and meter systems to malfunction and could possibly cause a fire.
2-53
CLUTCH TUNING
CLUTCH
High altitude Specifications
Elevation Engine idle speed Engagement r/min Shift r/min Secondary reduction ratio (number of links) Primary sheave spring Color Free length Preload Spring rate Wire diameter Outside diameter Weight (ID)
INSP ADJ
S Silver
P Pink Y Yellow Model: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA

~ 800 m (~ 2,500 ft) 1,500 50 r/min Approx. 3,750 r/min Approx. 8,750 r/min 21/39 (68 L) 600 ~ 1,400 m (2,000 ~ 4,500 ft) Steel 13.9 (CENTER) Steel 13.9 (IN) 1,200 ~ 2,000 m (4,000 ~ 6,500 ft) Approx. 3,850 r/min 20/39 (68 L) Steel 13.3 (OUT) Steel 10.3 (CENTER) Steel 10.3 (IN) 1,800 ~ 2,600 m (6,000 ~ 8,500 ft) None (IN)
2,400 ~ 3,000 m (8,000 ~ 10,000 ft) Approx. 3,950 r/min 19/39 (68 L) Steel 13.9 (OUT) None (CENTER)
90501-582L1 Y-S-Y 87.4 mm (3.44 in) 343 N (35 kg, 77 lb) 24.5 N/mm (2.5 kg/mm, 140 lb/in) 5.8 mm (0.228 in) 59.5 mm (2.34 in) 8GL-17605-00 (8GL00) Steel 10.3 (OUT)
Weight rivet
Steel 17.2 (CENTER) Steel 17.2 (IN)
Weight bushing Roller outer dia. Roller bushing Pri. clutch shim Secondary sheave spring Color Free length Preload rate Wire diameter Outside diameter Sec. torque cam angle Sec. clutch shim
VESPEL TP-8549 15.6 mm (0.614 in) VESPEL TP-8549 None 90508-60012 P 75 mm (2.95 in) 80 (2-6) 1,211 kgmm/rad 6.0 mm (0.236 in) 69.5 mm (2.74 in) 43 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
2-54
CLUTCH
Br Brown L Blue W White Specifications
Elevation Engine idle speed Engagement r/min Shift r/min Secondary reduction ratio (number of links) Primary sheave spring Color Free length Preload Spring rate Wire diameter Outside diameter Weight (ID)
INSP ADJ
G Green P Pink
Model: FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA
~ 800 m (~ 2,500 ft) 1,500 50 r/min Approx. 3,300 r/min Approx. 8,750 r/min 22/40 (70 L) 600 ~ 1,400 m (2,000 ~ 4,500 ft) Steel 13.3 (OUT) Steel 13.3 (CENTER) Steel 13.3 (IN) 1,200 ~ 2,000 m (4,000 ~ 6,500 ft) Approx. 3,400 r/min 21/40 (70 L) Aluminum with-hole 13.3 (OUT) 1,800 ~ 2,600 m (6,000 ~ 8,500 ft) 20/40 (68 L) 2,400 ~ 3,000 m (8,000 ~ 10,000 ft) Approx. 3,500 r/min None (OUT)
90501-580A2 L-Br-L 98.4 mm (3.87 in) 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) 19.6 N/mm (2.0 kg/mm, 112 lb) 5.8 mm (0.228 in) 59.5 mm (2.34 in) 8FS-17605-00 (8FS00) Steel 17.2 (OUT)
90501-603L3 G-W-G 89.8 mm (3.54 in) 441 N (45 kg, 99 lb) 27.0 N/mm (2.75 kg/mm, 154 lb/mm) 6.0 mm (0.236 in) Steel with-hole 13.3 (OUT) None (CENTER) None (IN)
Weight rivet
Steel 17.2 (CENTER) Steel with-hole 13.3 (IN)
Weight bushing Roller outer dia. Roller bushing Pri. clutch shim Secondary sheave spring Color Free length Preload rate Wire diameter Outside diameter Sec. torque cam angle Sec. clutch shim
VESPEL TP-8549 16.5 mm (0.650 in) VESPEL TP-8549 None 90508-60012 P 75 mm (2.95 in) 70 (1-6) 1,211 kgmm/rad 6.0 mm (0.236 in) 69.5 mm (2.74 in) 39 1.0 mm (0.039 in)
2-55
CLUTCH/GEAR SELECTION
INSP ADJ
The clutch may require tuning depending upon where the snowmobile will be operated and the desired handling characteristics. The clutch can be tuned by changing the engagement and shifting speeds. Clutch engagement speed is defined as the engine speed at which the snowmobile first begins to move from a complete stop. Clutch shifting speed is defined as the engine speed reached when the snowmobile has travelled 800 m (2,500 ft) after being started at full-throttle from a dead stop. Normally, when a snowmobile reaches shifting speed, the vehicle speed increases but the engine speed remains nearly constant. Under unfavorable conditions (wet snow, icy snow, hills, or rough terrain), however, engine speed may decrease after the shifting speed has been reached.
Engine speed Good condition Clutch shifting speed Clutch engagement speed Starting position Distance travelled 800 m (2,500 ft)
GEAR SELECTION
The reduction ratio of the driven gear to the drive gear must be set according to the snow conditions. If there are many rough surfaces or unfavorable snow conditions, the drive/driven gear ratio should be increased. If the surfaces are fairly smooth or better snow conditions exist, decrease the ratio. Gear ratio chart The drive and driven gears and the chains shown in the gear ratio chart are available as options. The figures containing a decimal point represent the drive/driven gear ratios, while the bottom numbers designate the number of links in the chain.
2-56
GEAR SELECTION
1 Chain and sprocket part number Parts name Teeth & links 18 teeth 19 teeth 20 teeth Parts no. 8FA-17682-80 8FA-17682-90 8FA-17682-00
INSP ADJ
Standard
FX10MT/ FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA FX10MTR Europe/ FX10MTRA Europe
Drive sprocket
21 teeth
8FA-17682-10
22 teeth 23 teeth 24 teeth 37 teeth 38 teeth 38 teeth Driven sprocket 39 teeth 39 teeth 40 teeth 40 teeth 68 links Chain 70 links
8FA-17682-20 8FA-17682-30 8FA-17682-40 8DW-47587-71 8DW-47587-81 8FB-47587-80 8DW-47587-91 8FB-47587-90 8DW-47587-01 8FB-47587-00 94890-09068
FX10RT FX10/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA FX10MT FX10MTR/FX10MTRA FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA/FX10MT/ FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada FX10MTR Europe/ FX10MTRA Europe
94890-09070
2 Gear ratio Drive gear Driven gear 37 teeth 38 teeth 39 teeth 40 teeth 18 teeth 2.17 68 links 2.22 68 links 19 teeth 2.05 68 links 2.11 68 links 20 teeth 1.90 68 links 1.95 68 links 2.00 68 links 21 teeth 1.76 68 links 1.81 68 links 1.86 68 links 1.91 70 links 22 teeth 1.68 68 links 1.73 68 links 1.77 70 links 1.82 70 links 23 teeth 1.61 68 links 1.65 70 links 1.70 70 links 1.74 70 links 24 teeth 1.54 70 links 1.58 70 links 1.63 70 links 1.67 70 links
2-57
GEAR SELECTION
3 Secondary sheave spring
Part No. 90508-500B1 90508-536A9 90508-556A2 90508-556A7 Spring rate N mm/rad (kg mm/rad) 6003 (613) 7147 (729) 8314 (848) 9460 (965) Preload N/mm (kg/mm) (lb/in) 6.2 (0.63), 35.40 7.3 (0.74), 41.68 8.5 (0.87), 48.53 10.2 (1.04), 58.24 Color Brown Red Green Silver Wire gauge Free length No. of coils mm (in) mm (in) 5.0 (0.197) 5.3 (0.209) 5.5 (0.217) 5.5 (0.217) 5.19 5.53 5.53 4.86 75 (2.95) 75 (2.95) 75 (2.95) 75 (2.95)
INSP ADJ
Outside diameter mm (in) 69.5 (2.736) 69.5 (2.736) 69.5 (2.736) 69.5 (2.736) FX10/FX10RT/ FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA/ FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA Standard
90508-60012
11876 (1211)
12.3 (1.26), 70.23
Pink
6.0 (0.236)
5.53
75 (2.95)
69.5 (2.736)
90508-60007
12654 (1290)
13.5 (1.38) 77.08
White
6.0 (0.236)
5.19
75 (2.95)
69.5 (2.736)
4 Secondary spring twist angle Seat Sheave 1 2 3 5 Torque cam (secondary spring seat) 0 10 20 30 3 40 50 60 6 70 80 90 9 100 110 120
Effects Quicker upshifting during acceleration
Part no. 8FA-17604-00 8BV-17604-71 8BV-17604-51 8BV-17604-31 8BV-17604-11
Cam angle 51-43 47 45 43 41 39
Identification mark 8BVFA 8BV71 8BV51 8BV31 8BV11 8BV91
Standard
FX10/FX10RT/ FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA
Quicker backshifting under load
8BV-17604-91
FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA
2-58
GEAR SELECTION
6 Primary spring
INSP ADJ
Parts No. 90501-550A2 90501-551L3 90501-551L9 90501-552L5 90501-580A1 90501-580A2 90501-581L5 90501-581L6 90501-582L1 90501-582L2 90501-582L6 90501-582L7 90501-583L0 90501-583L1 90501-583L4 90501-583L5 90501-600A1 90501-601L7 90501-601L8 90501-602L3 90501-602L8 90501-602L9 90501-603L2
Spring rate N/mm (kg/mm) 19.6 (2.00) 19.6 (2.00) 19.6 (2.00) 19.6 (2.00) 24.5 (2.50) 19.6 (2.00) 24.5 (2.50) 27.0 (2.75) 24.5 (2.50) 27.0 (2.75) 22.1 (2.25) 24.5 (2.50) 19.6 (2.00) 22.1 (2.25) 22.1 (2.25) 22.1 (2.25) 29.4 (3.00) 29.4 (3.00) 31.9 (3.25) 29.4 (3.00) 27.0 (2.75) 29.4 (3.00) 24.5 (2.50)
Preload N (kg) 196 (20) 294 (30) 343 (35) 392 (40) 196 (20) 490 (50) 294 (30) 294 (30) 343 (35) 343 (35) 392 (40) 392 (40) 441 (45) 441 (45) 343 (35) 294 (30) 196 (20) 294 (30) 294 (30) 343 (35) 392 (40) 392 (40) 441 (45)
Color Blue-Blue-Blue Blue-Pink-Blue Blue-Silver-Blue Blue-Green-Blue Yellow-Blue-Yellow Blue-Brown-Blue Yellow-Pink-Yellow Green-Pink-Green Yellow-Silver-Yellow Green-Silver-Green White-Green-White Yellow-Green-Yellow Blue-White-Blue White-White-White White-Silver-White White-Pink-White Pink-Blue-Pink Pink-Pink-Pink Orange-Pink-Orange Pink-Silver-Pink Green-Green-Green Pink-Green-Pink Yellow-White-Yellow
Wire gauge mm (in) 5.5 (0.217) 5.5 (0.217) 5.5 (0.217) 5.5 (0.217) 5.8 (0.228) 5.8 (0.228) 5.8 (0.228) 5.8 (0.228) 5.8 (0.228) 5.8 (0.228) 5.8 (0.228) 5.8 (0.228) 5.8 (0.228) 5.8 (0.228) 5.8 (0.228) 5.8 (0.228) 6.0 (0.236) 6.0 (0.236) 6.0 (0.236) 6.0 (0.236) 6.0 (0.236) 6.0 (0.236) 6.0 (0.236)
Outside diameter mm (in) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34) 59.5 (2.34)
No. of coils 4.89 4.91 4.91 4.91 4.91 5.64 4.92 4.66 4.92 4.66 5.25 4.92 5.65 5.25 5.25 5.25 4.81 4.82 4.60 4.82 5.08 4.82 5.39
Free length mm (in) 83.4 (3.28) 88.4 (3.48) 90.9 (3.58) 93.4 (3.68) 81.4 (3.20) 98.4 (3.87) 85.4 (3.36) 84.3 (3.32) 87.4 (3.44) 86.1 (3.39) 91.2 (3.59) 89.4 (3.52) 95.9 (3.78) 93.4 (3.68) 89.0 (3.50) 86.7 (3.41) 80.1 (3.15) 83.4 (3.28) 82.6 (3.25) 85.1 (3.35) 87.9 (3.46) 86.7 (3.41) 91.4 (3.60)
Standard
FX10MTR Europe/ FX10MTRA Europe
90501-603L3
27.0 (2.75)
441 (45)
Green-White-Green
6.0 (0.236)
59.5 (2.34)
5.08
89.8 (3.54)
FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada
90501-624L8
31.9 (3.25)
343 (35)
Orange-Silver-Orange
6.2 (0.244)
59.5 (2.34)
5.00
84.2 (3.31)
2-59
GEAR SELECTION
7 Clutch weight Parts No. Weight g (oz) without bush and rivets Shape & ID mark
INSP ADJ
Standard
8BU 10
8BU-17605-20
45.41 (1.603)
8DJ-17605-00
37.77 (1.333)
8ES 00
8ES-17605-00
54.63 (1.928)
8FA 00
8FA-17605-10
63.81 (2.252)
8FN 00
8FN-17605-00
75.28 (2.657)
8 FP 00
8FP-17605-00
67.81 (2.394)
8 FS 00
8FS-17605-00
65.52 (2.313)
8G L 00
8GL-17605-00
49.43 (1.745)
2-60
GEAR SELECTION
8 Weight rivets
Parts No. Material Length mm (in) Weight g (oz) Standard
INSP ADJ
Effects
90261-06033
Steel
17.2 (0.677)
4.5 (0.159)
IN: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA CENTER: FX10/FX10RT/ FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/ FX10MTR Europe/ FX10MTRA Europe OUT: FX10MTR Europe/ FX10MTRA Europe
Increased force
90269-06006 90261-06034 90261-06019 90266-06002 90261-06015 90261-06028 90266-06001
Steel Steel Steel Steel Steel Aluminum Aluminum
17.2 (0.677) 13.9 (0.547) 13.3 (0.524) 13.3 (0.524) 10.3 (0.406) 10.3 (0.406) 13.3 (0.524)
3.6 (0.127) with hole 3.6 (0.127) 3.1 (0.109) 2.44 (0.086) with hole 2.44 (0.086) 0.85 (0.030) 0.85 (0.030) with hole FX10MT/ FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada Decreased force IN: FX10MTR Europe/ FX10MTRA Europe OUT: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA
None
2-61
GEAR SELECTION
9 Rollers
I.D. 9 mm (0.354 in) Roller with bushing part number 8FG-17624-00 Outside diameter mm (in) 14.5 (0.57) Bushing type (P/N) VESPEL TP-8549 Identification mark (Width) Grooved & Machined Standard
INSP ADJ
Effects
Increased force
90386-09001 8FG-17624-10 15.0 (0.59) VESPEL TP-8549
(14.6 mm [0.57 in]) Grooved
90386-09001 8FG-17624-20 15.6 (0.61) VESPEL TP-8549
(14.6 mm [0.57 in]) No Mark FX10/FX10RT/ FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA
90386-09001 8FG-17624-30 16.0 (0.63) VESPEL TP-8549
(14.6 mm [0.57 in]) Grooved & Grooved
90386-09001 8FG-17624-40 16.5 (0.65) VESPEL TP-8549
(14.6 mm [0.57 in]) Machined
FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA Decreased force
90386-09001
(14.6 mm [0.57 in])
2-62
FRONT SUSPENSION
INSP ADJ
FRONT SUSPENSION
Spring preload 1. Adjust: Spring preload Adjustment steps: Loosen the locknut 1. Turn the spring seat 2 in or out. FX10 Spring seat distance Preload Length a Standard Short Hard Min. 250 mm (9.84 in) 260 mm (10.24 in) Long Soft Max. 260 mm (10.24 in)
2 1 a
21
FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA Spring seat distance Preload Length a Standard Short Hard Min. 246 mm (9.69 in) 256 mm (10.08 in) Long Soft Max. 256 mm (10.08 in)
FX10 FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA
CAUTION:
Be sure that the left and right spring preload are the same.
WARNING
These shock absorbers contain highly pressurized nitrogen gas. Do not tamper with or attempt to open the shock absorber assemblies. Do not subject the shock absorber assemblies to flames or high heat, which could cause it to explode.
2-63
FRONT SUSPENSION
INSP ADJ
Rebound damping force adjustment (FX10) The rebound damping force can be adjusted by turning the adjusting knob 1.
20 clicks out 11 clicks out 3 clicks out
Adjusting knob position Rebound damping force
Minimum
Standard
Maximum
Direction b* Soft
Direction a Hard
* With the adjusting knob fully turned lightly in direction a
CAUTION:
Do not continue to turn the adjusting knob in direction a after it stops. The shock absorber can be damaged and rebound damping force adjustments cannot be made. Do not turn the adjusting knob in direction b more than 20 clicks. Even if the adjusting knob is continually turned after 20 clicks, there will be no change in the rebound damping force. Be sure to stop the adjusting knob at a position where there is a click. The damping forces for the left and right ski shock absorbers must be adjusted to the same settings. Uneven settings can cause poor handling and loss of stability.
2-64
FRONT SUSPENSION
INSP ADJ
Compression damping force adjustment (FX10) The compression damping force can be adjusted by turning the adjusting knob 1.
Adjusting knob position Compression damping force
Minimum
Standard
Maximum
Direction b* Soft
Direction a Hard
* With the adjusting knob fully turned lightly in direction a
CAUTION:
Do not continue to turn the adjusting knob in direction a after it stops. The shock absorber can be damaged and compression damping force adjustments cannot be made. Do not turn the adjusting knob in direction b more than 12 clicks. Even if the adjusting knob is continually turned after 12 clicks, there will be no change in the compression damping force. Be sure to stop the adjusting knob at a position where there is a click. The damping forces for the left and right ski shock absorbers must be adjusted to the same settings. Uneven settings can cause poor handling and loss of stability.
Air pressure adjustment (FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA)
CAUTION:
The left and right shock absorber air pressure must be set to the same setting. Uneven settings can cause poor handling and loss of stability. This snowmobile is equipped with FOX shock absorbers as standard equipment. The air pressure of the shock absorbers can be adjusted using the shock absorber pump 1 included with your snowmobile.
2-65
FRONT SUSPENSION
Adjustment steps:
INSP ADJ
WARNING
1
Support the snowmobile securely on a suitable stand before adjusting the shock absorbers.
CAUTION:
Make sure that there is no load on the shock absorbers and that they are fully extended before making any air pressure adjustments. Place the snowmobile on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Lift the front of the snowmobile onto a suitable stand to raise the skis off the ground. Remove the air valve cap 1 from the shock absorber. Install the hose connector 2 of the shock absorber pump onto the air valve of the shock absorber and tighten it approximately six turns until the pressure registers on the pump gauge.
CAUTION:
Do not overtighten the connector onto the air valve as this will damage the connector seal.
NOTE:
If the shock absorber has no air pressure, the gauge reading will be zero. To increase the air pressure, operate the pump a few times. The pressure should increase slowly. If the pressure increases rapidly, check to make sure that the pump is properly connected and tightened onto the air valve. To decrease the air pressure, push the bleed valve button 3.
NOTE:
To allow pressure to escape from the pump and the shock absorber, push the button halfway down and hold it. To allow only a small amount of pressure to escape, push the button all the way down and quickly release it. Remove the hose connector from the air valve.
NOTE:
When removing the connector, the sound of air escaping may be heard, but this is from the pump hose, not the shock absorber.
2-66
FRONT SUSPENSION/REAR SUSPENSION
INSP ADJ
Air pressure range: 345 kPa (3.4 kg/cm, 50 psi) to 1,034 kPa (10.3 kg/cm, 150 psi) Recommended air pressure: 517 kPa (5.3 kg/cm, 75 psi)
CAUTION:
Do not exceed 1,034 kPa (10.3 kg/cm, 150 psi). Install the air valve cap.
NOTE:
If the front suspension bottoms too easily or rolls too much during cornering, increase the air pressure by 34 kPa (0.3 kg/cm, 5 psi). If the suspension is too firm and you want a more compliant ride, decrease the air pressure by 34 kPa (0.3 kg/cm, 5 psi).
REAR SUSPENSION
Stopper band 1. Adjust: Stopper band length
CAUTION:
Make sure the left and right rear suspension stopper bands are adjusted evenly. (FX10MT/ FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
NOTE:
This adjustment affects the handling characteristics of the snowmobile.
2-67
REAR SUSPENSION
INSP ADJ
1 No.5 No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1
Adjustment steps: Remove the stopper band bolts 1, nuts and washers. Adjust the length of the stopper bands 2 by inserting the bolts in different holes. Standard setting: No. 1 hole Tighten the stopper band nuts. Stopper band nut: 4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb)
T.
R.
2 1
No.5 No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA (front side) FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA (rear side) FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA
1 2
No.6 No.5 No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1
2-68
REAR SUSPENSION
Choosing other settings:
INSP ADJ
CAUTION:
The standard settings work well under most general riding conditions. The suspension can be adjusted to work better in one condition, but only at the expense of another. Keep this in mind when you adjust the suspension. : No. 5 hole : No. 6 hole (shortest) More weight on skis: Heavy steering/ oversteer More maneuverability Favors: hardpack snow, ice, smooth trails, tight turns
No. 1 hole (longest) Less weight on skis: Light steering/ understeer Better acceleration and speed Favors: deep snow, straight line acceleration, top speed
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA
Spring preload 1. Adjust: Spring preload Adjustment step: Front side Loosen the locknut 1. Turn the spring seat 2 in or out. FX10 Spring seat distance Preload Length a Standard Short Hard Min. 186 mm (7.32 in) 196 mm (7.72 in) Long Soft Max. 196 mm (7.72 in)
FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA Spring seat distance Preload Standard Short Hard Min. 182 mm (7.17 in) 192 mm (7.56 in) Long Soft Max. 192 mm (7.56 in)
1
Length a
FX10 FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA
2-69
REAR SUSPENSION
INSP ADJ
2 3 4 5
Turn the adjusting ring 3 to the proper position. Spring adjuster position Preload Standard 1 Soft 3
Hard
WARNING
This shock absorber contains highly pressurized nitrogen gas. Do not tamper with or attempt to open the shock absorber assembly. Do not subject the shock absorber assembly to flames or high heat, which could cause it to explode.
Rear side Turn the spring preload adjuster 1 to proper position. Spring preload adjuster position Spring preload Standard S Soft M Medium M H Hard
WARNING
Always adjust both spring preload (left and right) to the same setting. Uneven adjustment can cause poor handling and loss of stability.
2-70
REAR SUSPENSION
1 b a
INSP ADJ
Damping force adjustment Rebound damping force (Front side) (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) The damping force can be adjusted by turning the adjusting dial 1.
Adjusting dial position Rebound damping force
Minimum
Standard
Maximum
Direction b* Soft
Direction a Hard
* With the adjusting dial fully turned lightly in direction a
CAUTION:
Do not continue to turn the adjusting dial in direction a after it stops. The shock absorber can be damaged and damping force adjustments cannot be made. Do not turn the adjusting dial in direction b more than 20 clicks. Even if the adjusting dial is continually turned after 20 clicks, there will be no change in the damping force. Be sure to stop the adjusting dial at a position where there is a click.
2-71
REAR SUSPENSION
1 a b
INSP ADJ
Rebound damping force (Rear side) (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) The damping force can be adjusted by turning the adjusting dial 1.
Adjusting dial position Rebound damping force
Minimum
Standard
Maximum
Direction b* Soft
Direction a Hard
* With the adjusting dial fully turned lightly in direction a
CAUTION:
Do not continue to turn the adjusting dial in direction a after it stops. The shock absorber can be damaged and damping force adjustments cannot be made. Do not turn the adjusting dial in direction b more than 20 clicks. Even if the adjusting dial is continually turned after 20 clicks, there will be no change in the damping force. Be sure to stop the adjusting dial at a position where there is a click.
2-72
REAR SUSPENSION
1
INSP ADJ
Compression damping force (Front side) (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) The compression damping force can be adjusted by turning the adjusting screw 1.
Adjusting screw position Compression damping force
Minimum
Standard
Maximum
Direction b* Soft
Direction a Hard
* With the adjusting screw fully turned lightly in direction a
CAUTION:
Do not continue to turn the adjusting screw in direction a after it stops. The shock absorber can be damaged and compression damping force adjustments cannot be made. Do not turn the adjusting screw in direction b more than 12 clicks. Even if the adjusting screw is continually turned after 12 clicks, there will be no change in the compression damping force. Be sure to stop the adjusting screw at a position where there is a click.
2-73
REAR SUSPENSION
INSP ADJ
Compression damping force (Rear side) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) The compression damping force can be adjusted by turning the adjusting screw 1.
12 clicks out
6 clicks out
2 clicks out
Adjusting screw position Compression damping force
Minimum
Standard
Maximum
Direction b* Soft
Direction a Hard
* With the adjusting screw fully turned lightly in direction a
CAUTION:
Do not continue to turn the adjusting screw in direction a after it stops. The shock absorber can be damaged and compression damping force adjustments cannot be made. Do not turn the adjusting screw in direction b more than 12 clicks. Even if the adjusting screw is continually turned after 12 clicks, there will be no change in the compression damping force. Be sure to stop the adjusting screw at a position where there is a click.
2-74
REAR SUSPENSION
INSP ADJ
Control rod (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 1. Adjust: Control rod stroke a
CAUTION:
a
Make sure the adjusting nut ends are set at the same position on each side. Adjustment steps: Loosen the locknut 1. Turn the adjusting nut 2 in or out to adjust the control rod stroke. Adjusting nut position Effect 1 Increase weight transfer 2 2 3 Decrease weight transfer
1 2 3 2 1
Standard
WARNING
Never adjust the control rods beyond the maximum range indicated on the rods with red paint 3. While holding the adjusting nut securely, tighten the locknut 1.
3
T.
Locknut: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb)
R.
2-75
COVERS
CHAS
CHASSIS
COVERS
: 4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb) 1 (6) (6) 2 6 (3) 9 10 3 (3) (3) 5 8 4 New 14 12 13 11 3
FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA
New
(4)
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Job name/Part name Covers removal Windshield Shroud Side cover (left and right) Main switch coupler Auxiliary DC jack coupler Speedometer coupler Speedometer Main switch Auxiliary DC jack Speedometer cover Headlight coupler Headlight assembly Plastic band Headlight stay
Qty 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 6 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below.
Disconnect. Disconnect. FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA Disconnect.
FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA Disconnect.
3-1
COVERS
: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) : 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
CHAS
17 18
16 20 (3) 19
15
21 (4)
Order 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
19
17
Job name/Part name Drive guard pin Drive guard Lower cover (left and right) Storage pouch Reflector Front cover Front bumper
Qty 1 1 2 1 2 1 1
Remarks
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-2
COVERS
INSTALLATION
1. Install: Headlight assembly 1
CHAS
Installed position a: 16.0 mm (0.63 in)

2 Headlight stay
3-3
STEERING STEERING
FX10
CHAS
: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) 20 18 3
20
19 17 1 (4) 21
14
3 22
15
4
LT
4 5 6 2 23 16
8 7
5 10 5 6 5
LT
2 12 11 10
13
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Job name/Part name Handlebar removal Shroud/Side covers/Speedometer cover Handlebar cover Wind deflector (left and right) Wind deflector bracket holder Wind deflector bracket (left and right) Plastic band Rubber cover Grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch coupler Brake light switch coupler Headlight beam switch coupler Grip warmer coupler Throttle switch coupler Engine stop switch coupler Thumb warmer coupler
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to COVERS.
1 2 2 2 4 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect.
3-4
STEERING
: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) 20 18 3 (4) 21 20 19 17 1
CHAS
14
3 22
15
4
LT
4 5 6 2 23 16
8 7
5 10 5 6 5
LT
2 12 11 10
13
Order 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Job name/Part name Left handlebar switch Brake master cylinder holder Master cylinder assembly Right handlebar switch cover Throttle cable holder Throttle cable Right handlebar switch/throttle lever assembly Upper handlebar holder Handlebar Lower handlebar holder
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
Remarks
Disconnect.
NOTE:
After installing all parts, refer to CABLE ROUTING in CHAPTER 9, to check the cable and lead routing. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-5
STEERING
FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA
CHAS
: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) 20 18 3
20
19 17 1 (4) 21
14
3 15 22
4
LT
4 5 2 23 24 16
8 7
6 23
5 10 5 6 5
LT
2 12 11 10
13
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Job name/Part name Handlebar removal Shroud/Side covers/Speedometer cover Handlebar cover Wind deflector (left and right) Wind deflector bracket holder Wind deflector bracket (left and right) Plastic band Rubber cover Grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch coupler Brake light switch coupler Headlight beam switch coupler Grip warmer coupler Throttle switch coupler Engine stop switch coupler Thumb warmer coupler
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to COVERS.
1 2 2 2 4 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
3-6
STEERING
: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) 20 18 3 (4) 21 20 19 17 1
CHAS
14
3 15 22
4
LT
4 5 2 23 24 16
8 7
6 23
5 10 5 6 5
LT
2 12 11 10
13
Order 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Job name/Part name Left handlebar switch Brake master cylinder holder Master cylinder assembly Right handlebar switch cover Throttle cable holder Throttle cable Right handlebar switch/throttle lever assembly Handlebar holder Handlebar Steering joint holder Steering joint
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1
Remarks
Disconnect.
NOTE:
3-7
STEERING
CHAS
: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) 15 17
17 16 14 (4) 18
1 11
12 19
2 5 4 3
20
13
2 7 2 3 2 10 9 8 7
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Job name/Part name Handlebar removal Shroud/Side covers/Speedometer cover Handlebar cover Plastic band Rubber cover Grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch coupler Brake light switch coupler Headlight beam switch coupler Grip warmer coupler Throttle switch coupler Engine stop switch coupler Thumb warmer coupler Left handlebar switch Brake master cylinder holder Master cylinder assembly Right handlebar switch cover
Qty
1 4 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to COVERS. FX10MTRA
3-8
STEERING
: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) 15 17 17 16 14 (4) 18
CHAS
1 11
12 19
2 5 4 3
20
13
2 7 2 3 2 10 9 8 7
Order 15 16 17 18 19 20
Job name/Part name Throttle cable holder Throttle cable Right handlebar switch/throttle lever assembly Upper handlebar holder Handlebar Steering joint
Qty 1 1 1 2 1 1
Remarks Disconnect.
NOTE:
3-9
STEERING
: 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) : 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) : 28 Nm (2.8 m kg, 20 ft lb) :
35 Nm (3.5 m kg, 25 ft lb)
CHAS
5 4 7
: 67 Nm (6.7 m kg, 48 ft lb) New 1 New New New 1

LT
6 2
4 8
4 11
5 10
LT LT LT
9
LT
LT LT
New 12 New New
10 9
LT LT
New
Order
Job name/Part name Steering column and tie rod removal Headlight stay/Side covers Bottom panel Lock washer Bearing holder Plate Bearing Collar Steering column Steering column Steering shaft Tie rod Dust boots Collar Pivot arm
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to COVERS. Refer to ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT in CHAPTER 2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA FX10/FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA
3-10
STEERING
REMOVAL
CHAS
1. Straighten the lock washer tabs.
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Handlebar Steering column Bends/cracks/damage Replace.
WARNING
Do not attempt to straighten a bent column. This may dangerously weaken the column. 2. Inspect: Bearings (steering column) Collars Bearings (pivot arm) Wear/damage Replace. Steering column (bearing contact surfaces) Scratches/wear/damage Replace. 3. Inspect: Tie rods Steering shaft Bends/cracks/damage Replace.
WARNING
Do not attempt to straighten bent rods. This may dangerously weaken the rods. 4. Check: Rod end movement Rod end free play exists Replace the rod end. Rod end turns roughly Replace the rod end.
3-11
STEERING
INSTALLATION
CHAS
a b
1. Install: Tie rod 1 Locknuts 2 Joints 3 Tie rod part number Set length a 544.0 mm (21.42 in) 518.0 mm (20.39 in) Tie rod length b 475.5 mm (18.72 in) 449.5 mm (17.70 in)
2 3
8GL-23830-00 (FX10/FX10RT/ FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) 8HA-23830-00 (FX10MT/ FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA)
2. Check: Tie rod angle c Tie rod angle: 32
CAUTION:
After tightening the inside and outside ball joint locknut 2, make sure the tie rod 1 can be rotated freely through the ball joint travel. If not, loosen the locknut 2 and re-position the ball joint so that the tie rod 1 can be rotated freely. Tighten the locknut to specification.
Left side Right side
3. Install: Tie rods 1
NOTE:
Make sure that the indentation a on the tie rod faces out.
1 a
CAUTION:
Always use new cotter pins. Tie rod end locknut: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) LOCTITE Tie rod and pivot arm nut: 35 Nm (3.5 m kg, 25 ft lb) Tie rod and steering knuckle nut: 28 Nm (2.8 m kg, 20 ft lb)
T.
R.
3-12
STEERING
4. Install: Steering shaft 1 Locknuts 2 Joints 3 Steering shaft part number
CHAS
a b
Set length a 232.2 mm (9.14 in)
Shaft length b 174.2 mm (6.86 in)
3 2
8GL-23820-00
CAUTION:
Always use new cotter pin. Steering shaft and pivot arm nut: 35 Nm (3.5 m kg, 25 ft lb) Steering shaft and steering column nut: 35 Nm (3.5 m kg, 25 ft lb)
T.
R.
5. Bend the lock washer tab along a flat side of the bolt. 6. Adjust: Skis Adjustment steps: Temporarily install the handlebar. Hold the handlebar straight and check that the skis are at right angles to the handlebar. Install the steering linkage alignment plate 1.
2 4 1 3
NOTE:
To install the steering linkage alignment plate, turn the handlebar completely to the right, position the plate behind the steering column 2, and then fit the steering column into the cutout in the plate and fit the nut 3 into the hole in the plate. Then, while turning the handlebar to face it straight ahead, fit the bolt 4 into the hole in the plate. Steering linkage alignment plate: 90890-01531, YS-01531
3-13
STEERING
F W D
CHAS
Loosen the steering shaft locknuts 5. Adjust the steering shaft 6 by turning so that the pivot arm point right under.
5 b d a c
Turning the steering shaft in direction a Turning the steering shaft in direction b
Turning the ski in direction c Turning the ski in direction d
Tighten the steering shaft locknuts 5. Steering shaft locknut: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) LOCTITE
Adjust each angle of right and left skis by turning the tie rod respectively. Measure the ski toe-out. Refer to STEERING SYSTEM in CHAPTER 2.
7. Install: For FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA Steering joint 1 Steering joint holders 2
NOTE:
Install the steering joint with the shallow cutout a facing forward. Align the centerline of the steering joint with the centerline of the steering column 3 as shown in the illustration. The steering joint holders should be installed with punch marks b facing forward.
T.
R.
FW
CAUTION:
b 3 2 1
First, tighten the bolts on the front side of the steering joint holder, and then on the rear side.
3-14
STEERING
a
8. Install: Handlebar 1 Handlebar holders 2
CHAS
NOTE:
The handlebar holders should be installed with the punch marks a facing forward. Align the punch mark b on the handlebar with the upper surface of the lower handlebar holder. (FX10) Align the punch mark b on the handlebar with the upper surface of the steering joint. (FX10RT/ FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA)
1 b 2
CAUTION:
First, tighten the bolts on the front side of the handlebar holder, and then on the rear side. Handlebar holder bolt: 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
1 2
9. Install: For FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA Wind deflector bracket holder 1 Wind deflector bracket 2
NOTE:
Align the end of the wind deflector bracket with the punch mark a on the handlebar.
T.
R.
a
10. Install: Handlebar protector 1 (FX10/FX10RT/ FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MTRA)
NOTE:
Install the handlebar cover 1, making sure not to pinch the cables, leads, etc. 11. Adjust: Throttle cable free play Refer to THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT in CHAPTER 2.
3-15
SKI SKI
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA
CHAS
: 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb) : 17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft lb) : 19 Nm (1.9 m kg, 13 ft lb) : 48 Nm (4.8 m kg, 35 ft lb)
Order
Job name/Part name Ski removal
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. The following procedure applies to both of the ski.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cotter pin Nut Bolt Collar Collar Washer Collar Ski stopper Ski
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-16
SKI
CHAS
Order
Job name/Part name Ski removal
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. The following procedure applies to both of the ski.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cotter pin Nut Bolt Collar Collar Washer Collar Ski stopper Ski
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
3-17
SKI
INSPECTION
CHAS
The following procedure applies of all of the skis and related components. 1. Inspect: Ski Ski runner Ski stopper Ski handle Wear/cracks/damage Replace. Mounting bolt Collars Wear/damage Replace.
3-18
FRONT SUSPENSION FRONT SUSPENSION

FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA
CHAS
: : : : : 11 12 1
28 Nm (2.8 m kg, 20 ft lb) 34 Nm (3.4 m kg, 24 ft lb) 45 Nm (4.5 m kg, 32 ft lb) 65 Nm (6.5 m kg, 47 ft lb) 90 Nm (9.0 m kg, 65 ft lb)
10 3 16 17 17 16 15 14 13 18 New 5 9 9 8 7
LT
New 6 4
Order
Job name/Part name Front suspension removal
Qty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Lower cover/Front bumper Ski Shock absorber Shock absorber Collar Tie rod Steering knuckle Upper arm ball joint Upper arm Collar Bushing Pivot arm cover Stabilizer holder Bushing
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. The following procedure applies to both of the front suspension. Refer to COVERS. Refer to SKI. FX10 FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA FX10 Disconnect.
3-19
FRONT SUSPENSION
: : : : : 11 12 10 3 16 17 17 16 15 14 13 18 New 5 9 9 8 7
LT
CHAS
New 6 4
Order 13 14 15 16 17 18
Job name/Part name Stabilizer joint Stabilizer Lower arm Collar Bushing Lower arm ball joint
Qty 1 1 1 2 4 1
Remarks
3-20
FRONT SUSPENSION
CHAS
: : : : : 10 11 1
9 2 15 16 16 15 14 13 12 17 New 4 8 8 7 6
LT
New 5 3
Order
Job name/Part name Front suspension removal
Qty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Lower cover/Front bumper Ski Shock absorber Collar Tie rod Steering knuckle Upper arm ball joint Upper arm Collar Bushing Pivot arm cover Stabilizer holder Bushing
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. The following procedure applies to both of the front suspension. Refer to COVERS. Refer to SKI.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
Disconnect.
3-21
FRONT SUSPENSION
: : : : : 10 11 9 2 15 16 16 15 1
CHAS
14 8 12 17 New 4 8 7 6
LT
New 5 3
13
Order 12 13 14 15 16 17
Job name/Part name Stabilizer joint Stabilizer Lower arm Collar Bushing Lower arm ball joint
Qty 1 1 1 2 4 1
Remarks
3-22
FRONT SUSPENSION
HANDLING NOTES
CHAS
WARNING
This shock absorber contains highly compressed nitrogen gas. Before handling the shock absorber read and make sure that you understand the following information. The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for property damage or personal injury that may result from improper handling. Do not tamper or attempt to open the gas chamber. Do not subject the shock absorber to flames or any other source of high heat. This may cause the unit to explode due to excessive gas pressure. Do not deform or damage the gas chamber in any way. Gas chamber damage will result in poor damping performance.
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Shock absorbers Oil (gas) leaks/bends/damage Replace. 2. Inspect: Steering knuckles Cracks/bends/damage Replace. 3. Inspect: Upper arms Lower arms Cracks/bends/damage Replace. Bushings Wear/scratches/damage Replace. Upper arm ball joints Lower arm ball joints Damage/pitting Replace. 4. Inspect: Stabilizer Cracks/bends/damage Replace. Bushings Wear/scratches/damage Replace. Stabilizer joints Damage/pitting Replace.
3-23
FRONT SUSPENSION
INSTALLATION
CHAS
3 a
1. Install: Stabilizer 1 Bushing 2 Stabilizer holder 3
NOTE:
Install the stabilizer holder in the direction shown in the illustration.

a Forward
a 1
2. Install: Shock absorber 1
NOTE:
Install the shock absorber with the air valve a facing outward. (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) Install the shock absorber with the charging valve b facing inward. (FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA)
1 b
3-24
FRONT SUSPENSION
Ski alignment
CHAS
NOTE:
Be sure to verify the spring preload setting before adjusting the ski toe-out since this adjustments may affect the ski toe-out setting. Point the skis straight forward and measure the amount of ski toe-out. Ski toe-out: 0 ~ 15 mm (0 ~ 0.59 in) a b = Toe-out Refer to STEERING SYSTEM in CHAPTER 2.
3-25
PRIMARY SHEAVE AND DRIVE V-BELT
POWR TR
s
POWER TRAIN
: 1st 120 Nm (12.0 m kg, 85 ft lb) 2nd 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb)
2 1
E
Order
1 2
Job name/Part name Primary sheave and drive V-belt removal Left side cover/Drive guard V-belt Primary sheave assembly
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3.
1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-1
POWR TR
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E F
Job name/Part name Primary sheave disassembly Primary sheave cap Primary sheave spring Collar Roller Washer Collar Weight Washer Fixed sheave Stopper Sliding sheave Bushing Spider Slider Slider O-ring
Qty 1 1 3 3 6 3 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 3 3 3
Left-handed thread.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4-2

REMOVAL
POWR TR
1. Remove: Primary sheave assembly 1
NOTE:
Use the primary sheave holder 2 and primary sheave puller 3. Sheave holder: 90890-01701 Primary clutch holder: YS-01880-A Primary sheave puller (18 mm): 90890-01898, YS-01881-A, YS-01881-1
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove: Fixed sheave 1 Stopper 2 Sliding sheave 3 Bushing 4 Spider 5 Removal steps: Immerse the primary sheave assembly in 80 ~ 100 C (176 ~ 212 F) water for several minutes. Attach the lower piece of the clutch spider separator 6 onto a rigid table using suitable mounting bolts. Then, install the clutch separator adapter 7 onto the separator. Clutch spider separator: 90890-01711, YS-28890-C Clutch separator adapter: 90890-01740, YS-34480
4-3
POWR TR
Fit the primary sheave assembly onto the adapter and secure the supporting plates 8.
NOTE:
Securely fit the projections on the adapter into the fixed sheave holes. Set the bar wrench 9 onto the spider and turn the special tool clockwise to loosen the spider. Clutch spider separator (bar wrench): 90890-01711, YS-28890-C
CAUTION:
The spider has a left-handed thread. Since a high torque is required to loosen the spider, make sure that the spider, fixed sheave and special tool are well secured. Loosen the spider carefully to prevent cracks and damage to the sheaves and spider. Remove the fixed sheave, fixed sheave stopper, and sliding sheave from the spider.
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Spider Sliding sheave Fixed sheave Primary sheave cap Cracks/damage Replace.
4-4
POWR TR
2. Inspect: Primary sheave spring 1 Cracks/damage Replace. 3. Measure: Primary sheave spring (standard) free length a Out of specification Replace the primary sheave spring. Primary sheave spring (standard) free length: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA 87.4 mm (3.44 in) FX10MT USA/Canada/FX10MTR USA/Canada 89.8 mm (3.54 in) FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe 98.4 mm (3.87 in)
NOTE:
When changing the primary sheave springs, refer to GEAR SELECTION in CHAPTER 2. 4. Inspect: Primary sheave cap bush 1 Sliding sheave bush 2 Cracks/damage Replace. Clutch bushing press: 90890-01529, YS-42424
5. Inspect: Weight 1 Roller 2 Bushing 3 Slider 4 Rivet 5 O-ring 6 Collar Wear/scratches/damage Replace. Slider inside clearance A1 + A2 : Min. 0 mm (0 in) Max. 0.3 mm (0.0118 in)
4-5
POWR TR
Rivet replacement steps: Remove old rivet with the appropriate drill. Insert the rivet 1 from the ID mark 2 side. Press or peen the rivet head so that the diameter a of the rivet head measures 8.2 mm (0.32 in) or larger.
6. Measure: Bushing inside diameter Out of specification Replace as a set. Bushing inside diameter: Roller : New: 9.077 mm (0.357 in) Wear limit: 9.3 mm (0.366 in) Weight : New: 8.077 mm (0.318 in) Wear limit: 8.3 mm (0.327 in)
NOTE:
When replacing the weight and roller bushings, use the YXR clutch bushing jig kit. YXR clutch bushing jig kit: 90890-01528, YS-39752
Removing Installing
ASSEMBLY
1. Install: Sliding sheave (onto the spider)
NOTE:
Be sure the sliding sheave match mark (X) is aligned with the spider match mark (X).
4-6

2. Install: Fixed sheave (onto the spider)
POWR TR
NOTE:
Clean the threads. Apply LOCTITE #648 to the fixed sheave as shown.
CAUTION:
LOCTITE should be applied only to the specified area. Never apply it to the bushings and other areas.
a 16 mm (0.63 in) b 30 mm (1.18 in)
3. Install: Fixed sheave stoppers 1
NOTE:
Stopper tapered portion should face fixed sheave.
4. Tighten: Spider Tightening steps: Finger-tighten the spider until it is stopped by the fixed sheave stopper. Hold the fixed sheave with the clutch spider separator 1. Clutch spider separator: 90890-01711, YS-28890-C
NOTE:
Securely fit the projections on the clutch separator adapter 2 into the fixed sheave holes.
4-7
POWR TR
Tighten the spider to specification using the bar wrench 3. Clutch spider separator (bar wrench): 90890-01711, YS-28890-C Spider: 200 Nm (20.0 m kg, 145 ft lb)
CAUTION:
The spider has a left-handed thread.
WARNING
Do not operate the primary sheave until the LOCTITE has dried completely. Wait 24 hours before operating the primary sheave. Since a high torque is required to tighten the spider, make sure the spider, fixed sheave, and special tool are well secured. Tighten the spider carefully to prevent cracks and damage to the sheaves and spider.
2 1
5. Install: Weight Bolts 1 Nuts 2 Set bolts 3 Nut: 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) Set bolt: 4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb) LOCTITE
T.
R.
LT
T.
R.
NOTE:
To maintain the primary sheave balance, the bolts 1 must be installed with their threaded portions pointing in a counterclockwise direction, as illustrated.
4-8
POWR TR
6. Install: Primary sheave spring 1 Primary sheave cap 2
NOTE:
Be sure the sheave cap match mark (X) is aligned with the spider match mark (X). Primary sheave cap bolt: 14 Nm (1.4 m kg, 10 ft lb)
INSTALLATION
1. Install: Primary sheave assembly
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove any oil or grease from the tapered portion of the crankshaft and spider using a cloth dampened with thinner.
2. Apply: Engine oil (to threads of primary sheave bolt)
3. Tighten: Primary sheave bolt 1
3 1
Tightening steps: Hold the primary sheave 2 using the sheave holder 3 and tighten the primary sheave bolt to specification. Sheave holder: 90890-01701 Primary clutch holder: YS-01880-A Primary sheave bolt: 1st: 120 Nm (12.0 m kg, 85 ft lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
4-9
POWR TR
Loosen the primary sheave bolt completely. Retighten the primary sheave bolt to specification. Primary sheave bolt: 2nd: 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb)
4. Adjust: V-belt position Refer to DRIVE V-BELT in CHAPTER 2. Sheave offset Secondary sheave free play (clearance) Refer to SHEAVE OFFSET ADJUSTMENT in CHAPTER 2.
T.
R.
4-10
SECONDARY SHEAVE SECONDARY SHEAVE

: 64 Nm (6.4 m kg, 46 ft lb)
POWR TR
3 4 2 1
Order
Job name/Part name Secondary sheave removal
Qty
NOTE:
Apply the brake to lock the secondary sheave. Left side cover/Drive guard V-belt 1 2 3 4 5 6 Washer Shim (left) Collar Secondary sheave assembly Shim (right) Washer 1 1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. Refer to PRIMARY SHEAVE AND DRIVE VBELT. Refer to SHEAVE OFFSET ADJUSTMENT in CHAPTER 2.
Refer to SHEAVE OFFSET ADJUSTMENT in CHAPTER 2.
4-11
SECONDARY SHEAVE
POWR TR
Order 1 2 3 4 5
Job name/Part name Secondary sheave disassembly Spring seat Secondary sheave spring Fixed sheave Stopper Sliding sheave
Qty 1 1 1 1 1
4-12
SECONDARY SHEAVE
DISASSEMBLY
POWR TR
WARNING
Use extreme CAUTION when disassembling the secondary sheave since serious injury can occur due to the sudden release of spring tension. Use the sheave compressor to contain the spring tension before removing the spring seat nuts. Do not attempt this procedure unless you have the proper tools and understand the instructions thoroughly.
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Sliding sheave Fixed sheave Spring seat Cracks/damage Replace. Stopper Wear/damage Replace.
2. Inspect: Bushing (spring seat) 1 Sliding sheave (V-belt contact surface) 2 Scratches/wear/damage Replace. Sliding bushing 3 Unsymmetrical wear/damage Replace.
3. Inspect: Secondary sheave spring 1 Cracks/damage Replace. 4. Measure: Secondary sheave spring (standard) free length a Below specification Replace the secondary sheave spring. Secondary sheave spring (standard) free length: 75.0 mm (2.95 in)
4-13
SECONDARY SHEAVE
POWR TR
5. Measure: Ramp shoe thickness a Out of specification Replace the ramp shoe. Wear limit: 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
ASSEMBLY
1. Install: Secondary sheave spring 1 Spring seat 2
NOTE:
Hook the end of the secondary sheave spring into the spring holes in the fixed sheave. Hook the other end of the spring into the holes in the spring seat. Standard spring position: 2-6 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 1-6 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
Installation steps: Hold the spring seat 1 and turn the fixed sheave 2 counterclockwise to the specified angle a.
NOTE:
The holes in the spring seat should align with the bolts on the sliding sheave. a = (sheave hole number + spring seat hole number) 10 Twist angle: 80 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) 70 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Push down on the spring seat until the bolts come through the holes. While pushing down on the spring seat, install the nuts and tighten them to the specified torque. Spring seat nut: 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
T.
R.
4-14
SECONDARY SHEAVE
POWR TR
2. Measure: Secondary sheave clearance a Out of specification Adjust. Secondary sheave clearance: 35.0 ~ 35.8 mm (1.38 ~ 1.41 in) 3. Calculate: Shim thickness
NOTE:
For example, if the clearance is 36 mm (1.42 in), install a 0.5 mm (0.02 in) shim on each bolt so the clearance is 35.5 mm (1.40 in). 4. Adjust: Secondary sheave clearance
Adjustment steps: Disassemble the secondary sheave. Remove the bolts and original shims 1. Install new shims of the proper thickness and reassemble the secondary sheave. Measure the secondary sheave clearance again. Repeat these steps until the clearance is within specification.
NOTE:
Yamaha recommends keeping the original shims. Shims: Part number 90201-061H1 90201-06037 Thickness 0.5 mm (0.02 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
4-15
SECONDARY SHEAVE
INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate: Splines (fixed sheave)
POWR TR
Recommended grease: ESSO beacon 325 grease or Aeroshell grease #7A 2. Tighten: Secondary sheave bolt Secondary sheave bolt: 64 Nm (6.4 m kg, 46 ft lb)
3. Adjust: V-belt position Refer to DRIVE V-BELT in CHAPTER 2. Sheave offset Secondary sheave free play (clearance) Refer to SHEAVE OFFSET ADJUSTMENT in CHAPTER 2.
T.
R.
4-16
DRIVE CHAIN DRIVE CHAIN

WITHOUT REVERSE MODEL
POWR TR
: 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 16 Nm (1.6 m kg, 11 ft lb)
: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) : 28 Nm (2.8 m kg, 20 ft lb) : 90 Nm (9.0 m kg, 65 ft lb) New 8 14
15
16
New 3 4 1 2 New
LT
7 17 (5) 5 New 6 New
13 18
New 10 11 New
Qty
12
Order Job name/Part name Drive chain removal Right lower cover Brake caliper/Parking brake Shim Washer Brake disc Collar Drain bolt Chain tension adjusting bolt Collar Drive chain cover Rubber seal Chain tensioner Washer Collar
9 New
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. Refer to BRAKE. t = 0.5 t = 1.0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Drain. Loosen.
t = 0.5
4-17
DRIVE CHAIN
: 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 16 Nm (1.6 m kg, 11 ft lb) : 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) : 28 Nm (2.8 m kg, 20 ft lb) : 90 Nm (9.0 m kg, 65 ft lb) New 8 New 3 4 1 2 New
LT
POWR TR
15
16
14
7 17 (5) 5 New 6 New
13 18
New 10 11 New
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1
12
Order 13 14 15 16 17 18 Job name/Part name Drive chain Collar Drive sprocket Collar Driven sprocket Collar
9 New
Remarks
4-18
DRIVE CHAIN
REMOVAL
1. Remove: Driven sprocket 1
POWR TR
NOTE:
1 2
While holding the front axle assembly with spanner wrench 2, loosen the driven sprocket nut.
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Drive chain cover Cracks/damage Replace. Oil seals (drive chain cover) Wear/damage Replace. Bearings Pitting/damage Replace.
Replacement steps: Remove the circlip (drive chain cover). Remove the bearing(s) using a general bearing puller. Install the new bearing(s).
NOTE:
Use a socket 1 that is the same size as the outside diameter of the bearing race.
CAUTION:
Do not strike the inner race 2 or ball bearings 3. Contact only the outer race 4. Install a new circlip (drive chain cover).
CAUTION:
Always use new circlips. 2. Inspect: Drive sprocket Driven sprocket Chain tensioner Pitting/wear/damage Replace the defective part(s).
4-19
DRIVE CHAIN
POWR TR
3. Measure: 14 link section a of the drive chain Using a spring scale, pull on the drive chain with 36 kg (80 lb) of force b. Out of specification Replace the drive chain. Maximum 14 link drive chain section length: 133.35 mm (5.25 in) Limit: 137.35 mm (5.41 in)
NOTE:
Measure the length between drive chain pin 1 and E as shown. Perform this measurement at two or three different places. If replacement is necessary, always replace the chain and the sprockets as a set.
4. Inspect: Drive chain Stiffness Clean and lubricate or replace.
5. Measure: Brake disc thickness a Measure the brake disc thickness 1 ~ 3 mm (0.04 ~ 0.12 in) from the edge of the brake disc. Out of specification Replace. Minimum thickness: 3.5 mm (0.14 in)
4-20
DRIVE CHAIN
INSTALLATION
POWR TR
1. During installation, pay attention to the following.

Make sure that the bearing seals face towards the drive chain as shown. Properly install the rubber seal onto the drive chain cover, making sure that there are no gaps.
C1 C2 C3 C4
Be sure to install the collars in their original positions, otherwise the brake disc and secondary shaft will stick.
C4
0.2 ~ 0.7 mm (0.008 ~ 0.028 in)
: ESSO beacon 325 grease or Aeroshell grease #7A
C3 C1
For the secondary shaft and drive chain cover installation, refer to SECONDARY SHAFT. 2. Fill: Drive chain oil Refer to DRIVE CHAIN in CHAPTER 2. 3. Adjust: Drive chain slack Refer to DRIVE CHAIN in CHAPTER 2.
C2
4-21
DRIVE CHAIN
WITH REVERSE MODEL
POWR TR
: 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 16 Nm (1.6 m kg, 11 ft lb) 8 9
: 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) : 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) : 28 Nm (2.8 m kg, 20 ft lb)
: 55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft lb)
29 10 New 1 2 4 New 3 12 5
LT
30
31
11
New 28
13 22 23 24
25
26
New New 18 27 33 32 17 19 New 15 6

LT LT
20 21
14 16 New
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Job name/Part name Drive chain removal Right lower cover Brake caliper/Parking brake Shim Washer Brake disc Collar Drain bolt Chain tension adjusting bolt Gear position switch connector Cover Shift lever assembly Fuse holder Shift rod Collar
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. Refer to BRAKE. t = 0.5 t = 1.0
Drain. Loosen. Disconnect.
4-22
DRIVE CHAIN
: 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 16 Nm (1.6 m kg, 11 ft lb) 8 9 29 10 New 1 2 4 New 3 12 5
LT
POWR TR
: 55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft lb)
30
31
11
New 28
13 22 23 24
25
26
New New 18 27 33 32 17 19 New 15 6

LT LT
20 21
14 16 New
Order 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
Job name/Part name Drive chain cover Rubber seal Chain tensioner Washer Collar Counter gear Spring Retainer Spring Reverse driven gear assembly Journal Washer Forward driven sprocket Collar Reverse drive gear Drive chain
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
t = 0.5
4-23
DRIVE CHAIN
: 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 16 Nm (1.6 m kg, 11 ft lb) 8 9 29 10 New 1 2 4 New 3 12 5
LT
POWR TR
: 55 Nm (5.5 m kg, 40 ft lb)
30
31
11
New 28
13 22 23 24
25
26
New New 18 27 33 32 17 19 New 15 6

LT LT
20 21
14 16 New
Order 29 30 31 32 33
Job name/Part name Collar Drive sprocket Collar Plate Shaft
Qty 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
4-24
DRIVE CHAIN
REMOVAL
1. Remove: Reverse driven gear 1
POWR TR
NOTE:
While holding the front axle assembly with spanner wrench 2, loosen the reverse driven gear bolt.
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Drive chain cover Cracks/damage Replace. Shift fork Pitting/wear/damage Replace. Oil seals Wear/damage Replace. Bearings Pitting/damage Replace. 2. Inspect: Drive sprocket Forward driven sprocket Reverse drive gear Counter gear Journal Chain tensioner Pitting/wear/damage Replace the defective part(s). Reverse driven gear Reverse gear dog Wear/damage Replace the reverse driven gear assembly. Spring Damage Replace the reverse driven gear assembly. Drive chain Wear/damage Replace. Shift Clean or replace. Shift lever assembly Wear/damage Bearings Pitting/damage Replace. For the bearing replacement and drive chain inspection, refer to WITHOUT REVERSE MODEL.
4-25
DRIVE CHAIN
INSTALLATION
POWR TR
1. During installation, pay attention to the following.

Properly install the rubber seal onto the drive chain cover, making sure that there are no gaps.
B1 B2 B3
B2 B1
B3
Be sure to install the collars in their original positions, otherwise the brake disc and secondary shaft will stick.
0.2 ~ 0.7 mm (0.008 ~ 0.028 in)
: ESSO beacon 325 grease or Aeroshell grease #7A
For the secondary shaft and drive chain cover installation, refer to SECONDARY SHAFT.
4-26
DRIVE CHAIN
2. Install: Shift rod 1 3. Adjust: Shift rod length a
POWR TR
Adjustment steps: Move the shift lever to the FWD. position. Loosen the locknuts 2. Turn the shift rod 1 so that shift rod free play is 0 mm (in direction where a can be shortened appropriately) and then turn back the shift rod 1/2 turns. Tighten the locknuts. Shift rod end locknut: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
4. Fill: Drive chain oil Refer to DRIVE CHAIN in CHAPTER 2. 5. Adjust: Drive chain slack Refer to DRIVE CHAIN in CHAPTER 2.
T.
R.
4-27
SECONDARY SHAFT SECONDARY SHAFT

: 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb)
POWR TR
New 8 9 New 10
7 New 6 5 4 2
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Job name/Part name Secondary shaft removal Secondary sheave Drive chain Secondary shaft assembly Bearing housing Circlip Circlip Bearing Washer Secondary shaft Circlip Bearing Oil seal
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to SECONDARY SHEAVE. Refer to DRIVE CHAIN.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-28
SECONDARY SHAFT
INSPECTION
POWR TR
2 1 3 2
1. Inspect: Secondary shaft 1 Scratches (excessive)/damage Replace. Splines 2 Wear/damage Replace the secondary shaft. Bearing contact surface 3 Scratches/wear/damage Replace the secondary shaft.
4-29
SECONDARY SHAFT
POWR TR
SECONDARY SHAFT AND DRIVE CHAIN COVER INSTALLATION

1. Install: Secondary shaft Drive chain cover
3 4 a 5 6
T.
Installation steps: Install the secondary shaft. Tighten the bolts 1. Bearing housing bolt: 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb)
Install the drive chain, drive sprocket and driven sprocket. Install the drive chain cover 2.
Properly install the rubber seal onto the drive chain cover, making sure that there are no gaps.
R.
Tighten the bolts 3. Drive chain cover bolt: M8 bolt: 28 Nm (2.8 m kg, 20 ft lb) M6 bolt: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) LOCTITE
T.
R.
Install the collar. Tighten the collar set bolt 4. Collar set bolt: 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) LOCTITE
Install the brake disc. Adjust the brake disc clearance. 2. Measure: Brake disc clearance a Out of the specification Adjust. Brake disc clearance: 0.2 ~ 0.7 mm (0.008 ~ 0.028 in)
T.
R.
4-30
SECONDARY SHAFT
3. Adjust: Brake disc clearance
POWR TR
Adjustment steps: Remove the circlip 5. Adjust the brake disc clearance by adding or removing shim(s) 6. Shim size Part number 90201-222F0 90201-225A4 Install the new circlip. Thickness 0.5 mm (0.02 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
4-31
BRAKE BRAKE
BRAKE PAD
POWR TR
: 2 Nm (0.2 m kg, 1.4 ft lb) : 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) : 17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft lb) : 48 Nm (4.8 m kg, 35 ft lb)
4 2 1 5
Order
Job name/Part name Brake pad removal Right side cover Battery Screw plug Retaining pin Brake pad spring Brake pad Brake caliper assembly
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. Refer to BATTERY INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2.
1 2 3 4 5
1 1 1 2 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-32
BRAKE
CAUTION:
POWR TR
Disc brake components rarely require disassembly. DO NOT: Do not disassemble components unless absolutely necessary. Do not use solvents on internal brake components. Do not use contaminated brake fluid for cleaning. Use only clean brake fluid. Do not allow brake fluid to contact the eyes, otherwise eye injury may occur. Do not allow brake fluid to contact painted surfaces or plastic parts otherwise damage may occur. Do not disconnect any hydraulic connection, otherwise the entire system must be disassembled, drained, cleaned, and then properly filled and bled after reassembly.
BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT NOTE:

It is not necessary to disassemble the brake caliper and brake hose in order to replace the brake pads.
1. Remove: Brake pads
NOTE:
Do not depress the brake lever when the caliper or disc is off the snowmobile otherwise the brake pads will be forced shut. Install a new brake pad spring when the brake pads are replaced. Replace the pads as a set if either one is found to be worn to the wear limit a. Wear limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
4-33
BRAKE
1 2
2. Install: Brake pads Brake pad spring
POWR TR
Installation steps: Connect suitable hoses 1 tightly to the caliper bleed screws 2. Put the other end of each hose into an open container. Loosen the caliper bleed screws and push the pistons into the caliper with your finger. Tighten the caliper bleed screws 2. Bleed screw: 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb)
Install the brake pads and brake pad spring. 3. Check: Brake fluid level Refer to BRAKE FLUID LEVEL INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. 4. Check: Brake lever operation A soft or spongy feeling Bleed brake system. Refer to AIR BLEEDING (HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM) in CHAPTER 2.
T.
R.
4-34
BRAKE
BRAKE CALIPER AND PARKING BRAKE
POWR TR
: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb) : 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb) : 48 Nm (4.8 m kg, 35 ft lb) 1 New
2 5 4 6
S
New New 6
S
Order Job name/Part name Brake caliper and parking brake removal Right side cover Battery Brake fluid Brake hose Brake caliper assembly Parking brake cable Spring Parking brake assembly Collar Qty Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. Refer to BATTERY INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. Drain. Disconnect. Disconnect.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1 1 1 1 2
4-35
BRAKE
POWR TR
: 2 Nm (0.2 m kg, 1.4 ft lb) : 8

S 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb)
: 17 Nm (1.7 m kg, 12 ft lb) 7 New 6 New
5 8 3
BF
5 7 New 6 New 5 4 5
S S
6 New 7 New
BF
2 1
6 New
BF
7 New
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Job name/Part name Brake caliper disassembly Screw plug Retaining pin Brake pad spring Brake pad Brake caliper piston Brake caliper piston dust seal Brake caliper piston seal Bleed screw
Qty 1 1 1 2 4 4 4 2
4-36
BRAKE
NOTE:
POWR TR
BRAKE CALIPER DISASSEMBLY

Before disassembling a caliper, drain brake fluid from brake hose, master cylinder, brake caliper and brake reservoir of their brake fluid. 1. Remove: Brake caliper pistons Brake caliper piston dust seals Brake caliper piston seals Removal steps: Using a piece of wood, lock the pistons. Blow compressed air into the hose joint opening a to force out the pistons from the caliper body.
WARNING
Never try to pry out the pistons.
BRAKE CALIPER INSPECTION AND REPAIR

Recommended brake component replacement schedule Brake pads Piston dust seals Piston seals Brake hose Brake fluid As required Every two years Every two years Every four years Only when brakes are disassembled.
WARNING
All internal brake components should be cleaned only with new brake fluid. Do not use solvents as they will cause seals to swell and distort.
4-37
BRAKE
POWR TR
1. Inspect: Brake caliper pistons Scratches/rust/wear Replace the caliper assembly. Brake caliper cylinder Wear/scratches Replace the caliper assembly. Brake caliper body Cracks/damage Replace. Brake fluid delivery passage (caliper body) Blow out with compressed air.
WARNING
Replace the piston seals and piston dust seals whenever a caliper is disassembled.
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY
WARNING
All internal parts should be cleaned only with new brake fluid. Internal parts should be lubricated with brake fluid when installed. Recommended brake fluid: DOT 4 Replace the piston seals and piston dust seals whenever a caliper is disassembled.
1 a
BRAKE CALIPER INSTALLATION

1. Install: Brake hose 1
CAUTION:
When installing the brake hose 1 onto the brake caliper 2, make sure that the brake pipe touches the projection a on the brake caliper.
2
Brake hose union bolt: 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb)
T.
R.
4-38
BRAKE
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
POWR TR
: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) : 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb) 1 2 3 10 New 6
S
5 New 4
4 1
LT
3
LT
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Job name/Part name Brake master cylinder removal Brake fluid Left handlebar switch Left wind deflector Wind deflector bracket holder Left wind deflector bracket Brake switch Brake lever Brake hose union bolt Brake master cylinder holder Parking brake cable Parking brake lever Master cylinder assembly
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Drain. Refer to STEERING in CHAPTER 3.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Disconnect.
4-39
BRAKE
: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) : 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb) 1 2 3 10 New 6
S
POWR TR
5 New 4
4 1
LT
3
LT
Order 1 2 3 4 5
Job name/Part name Brake master cylinder disassembly Brake master cylinder reservoir cap Brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm holder Brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm Brake master cylinder kit Brake master cylinder body
Qty 1 1 1 1 1
4-40
BRAKE
INSPECTION
POWR TR
1. Inspect: Brake master cylinder 1 Wear/scratches Replace the master cylinder assembly. Brake master cylinder body 2 Cracks/damage Replace. Brake fluid delivery passage (master cylinder body) Blow out with compressed air. 2. Inspect: Brake master cylinder kit Scratches/wear/damage Replace as a set. 3. Inspect: Brake master cylinder reservoir Cracks/damage Replace. Brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm Damage/wear Replace. 4. Inspect: Brake hose Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
WARNING
All internal parts should be cleaned only with new brake fluid. Internal parts should be lubricated with brake fluid when installed. Recommended brake fluid: DOT 4
4-41
BRAKE
INSTALLATION
1. Install: Brake hose
POWR TR
CAUTION:
When installing the brake hose onto the brake master cylinder, make sure that the brake pipe touches the projection a as shown.
a
Union bolt (brake hose): 30 Nm (3.0 m kg, 22 ft lb)
T.
2 1
2. Install: Left wind deflector bracket 1 Wind deflector bracket holder 2
NOTE:
Align the end of the wind deflector bracket with the punch mark a on the handlebar.
R.
4-42
SLIDE RAIL SUSPENSION SLIDE RAIL SUSPENSION

FX10
POWR TR
: 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb) : 69 Nm (6.9 m kg, 50 ft lb)
LT
Order
Job name/Part name Slide rail suspension removal Rear axle nut Tension adjuster Slide rail suspension
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Loosen. Loosen. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-43
SLIDE RAIL SUSPENSION

5 1 2 2 3 2
LT LT
POWR TR
: 4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb) 8 New : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 49 Nm (4.9 m kg, 35 ft lb) : 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb) B 0 New C A C New B
New 9
2 1 6 7 7 6 0 9 New 8
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Job name/Part name Slide rail suspension disassembly Collar Bushing Stopper band Front pivot arm Slide runner Suspension wheel Suspension wheel bracket Suspension wheel Circlip Spring end guide
Qty 2 4 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
NOTE:
Apply grease to the inner surface of each spring end guide.
A B C
Spring end guide bracket Front pivot arm bracket Collar
2 2 2
4-44

: 49 Nm (4.9 m kg, 35 ft lb) : 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb) : 72 Nm (7.2 m kg, 52 ft lb) E D J K K F E G L M N
POWR TR
I L
LT
I H
LT LT LT
Order D E F G H I J K L M N
Job name/Part name Front shock absorber Spacer Collar Collar Shaft Collar Shaft Bushing Washer Shaft Front suspension bracket
Qty 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1
Remarks
4-45

Y New b c T U V [
LT
POWR TR
X ^ a
LT
c R S R Q W [ V Y b
New
X
LT
O P R
S R O
\
LT
g f f g
LT
Order O P Q R S T U V W X Y
Job name/Part name Collar Rear suspension bracket Rear shock absorber Spacer Collar Wheel bracket Guide wheel Guide plate Bushing Tension spring Collar
Qty 2 2 1 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Remarks
4-46

Y New b c T U V [
LT
POWR TR
X ^ a
LT
c R S R Q W [ V Y b
New
X
LT
O P R
S R O
\
LT
g f f g
LT
Order Z [ \ ] _ a b c d e f g
Job name/Part name Shaft Collar Pull rod Stopper band Shaft Rear pivot arm Circlip Adjuster Rear pivot arm bracket Shaft Collar Stopper
Qty 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2
Remarks
4-47
POWR TR
: 75 Nm (7.5 m kg, 54 ft lb)
i k n o j m
l l
o i k
Order h i j k l m n o
Job name/Part name Rear axle Guide wheel Guide wheel Collar Tension adjuster Collar Collar Sliding frame
Qty 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2
Remarks
4-48

FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA
POWR TR
: 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb) : 69 Nm (6.9 m kg, 50 ft lb)
LT
Order
Qty
4-49

5 1 2 2 3 2
LT LT
POWR TR
: 4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb) A New : 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 49 Nm (4.9 m kg, 35 ft lb) : 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb) E F C New D 4 New F E
New B
2 1 C New
6 New 7 9 0
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C
8 0 6
Qty 2 4 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
New B
Job name/Part name Slide rail suspension disassembly Collar Bushing Stopper band Front pivot arm Slide runner Suspension wheel Circlip Holder Bracket Suspension wheel bracket Suspension wheel Circlip Spring end guide
NOTE:
D E F
Spring end guide bracket Front pivot arm bracket Collar

4-50
2 2 2

: 49 Nm (4.9 m kg, 35 ft lb) : 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb) : 72 Nm (7.2 m kg, 52 ft lb) J G N L H M G O
LT
POWR TR
K M
P Q L R
LT LT LT
Order G H I J K L M N O P Q R
Job name/Part name Spacer Collar Shaft Shaft Collar Bushing Washer Front shock absorber Collar Shaft Front suspension bracket Gas cylinder bracket
Qty 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
4-51

] New f g X Y Z a
LT
POWR TR
\ d e
LT
g V W V U [ a Z ]
LT
h New \ c
S T V Y
W V S
b
LT
k j j k
LT
Order S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ]
Job name/Part name Collar Rear suspension bracket Rear shock absorber Spacer Collar Wheel bracket Guide wheel Guide plate Bushing Tension spring Collar
Qty 2 2 1 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Remarks
4-52

] New f g X Y Z a
LT
POWR TR
\ d e
LT
g V W V U [ a Z ]
LT
h New \ c
S T V Y
W V S
b
LT
k j j k
LT
Order _ a b c d e f g h i j k
Job name/Part name Shaft Collar Pull rod Stopper band Shaft Rear pivot arm Circlip Adjuster Rear pivot arm bracket Shaft Collar Stopper
Qty 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2
Remarks
4-53
POWR TR
: 75 Nm (7.5 m kg, 54 ft lb)
m o r s n q
p p
s m o
Order l m n o p q r s
Qty 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2
Remarks
4-54

POWR TR
: 72 Nm (7.2 m kg, 52 ft lb)
LT
LT
Order
Qty
4-55

6 : New : A : : : C M
POWR TR
New
4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb) 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) 49 Nm (4.9 m kg, 35 ft lb) 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb) 72 Nm (7.2 m kg, 52 ft lb)
J K
H H G I H
59
E B F
0 D
H 3
M A New L New J 3 New K
4 2
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C
Job name/Part name Slide rail suspension disassembly Stopper band Shaft Collar Collar Front pivot arm Bushing Shaft Collar Shaft Collar Suspension wheel Shaft Bushing
Qty 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2
4-56

6 : New : A : : : C M
POWR TR
New
4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb) 6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) 49 Nm (4.9 m kg, 35 ft lb) 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb) 72 Nm (7.2 m kg, 52 ft lb)
J K
H H G I H
59
E B F
0 D
H 3
M A New L New J 3 New K
4 2
Order D E F G H I J K L
Job name/Part name Connecting arm Collar Front suspension bracket Front shock absorber Bushing Collar Suspension wheel Circlip Spring end guide
Qty 1 1 1 1 4 2 2 2 2
Remarks
NOTE:
Spring end guide bracket
4-57

:
9 Nm (0.9 m kg, 6.5 ft lb)
POWR TR
: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) : 49 Nm (4.9 m kg, 35 ft lb) : 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb) : 72 Nm (7.2 m kg, 52 ft lb) a O P O P R Q S P U V T Y U S X W O N R N P O ^ c b New ] i
d l l e f
l l
New h g jk k i j
[ Z
Order N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \
Job name/Part name Pull rod Collar Bushing Rear shock absorber Collar Collar Shaft Bushing Rear suspension bracket Collar Guide wheel Torsion spring Suspension wheel Wheel bracket Rear pivot arm
Qty 2 4 4 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1
Remarks
4-58

:
9 Nm (0.9 m kg, 6.5 ft lb)
POWR TR
: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) : 49 Nm (4.9 m kg, 35 ft lb) : 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb) : 72 Nm (7.2 m kg, 52 ft lb) a O P O P R Q S P U V T Y U S X W O N R N P O ^ c b New ] i
d l l e f
l l
New h g jk k i j
[ Z
Order ] _ a b c d e f g h i j k l
Job name/Part name Bushing Rear pivot arm protector Shaft Circlip Adjuster Collar Shaft Collar Control rod stopper Circlip Control rod Locknut Adjusting nut Bushing
Qty 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4
Remarks
4-59
POWR TR
: 75 Nm (7.5 m kg, 54 ft lb)
p s t o r
q t q p n
Order m n o p q r s t
Qty 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2
Remarks
4-60

HANDLING NOTES
POWR TR
WARNING
This shock absorber contains highly compressed nitrogen gas. Before handling the shock absorber read and make sure that you understand the following information. The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for property damage or personal injury that may result from improper handling. Do not tamper or attempt to open the gas chamber. Do not subject the shock absorber to flames or any other source of high heat. This may cause the unit to explode due to excessive gas pressure. Do not deform or damage the gas chamber in any way. Gas chamber damage will result in poor damping performance.
REMOVAL
1. Unhook the torsion spring 1
NOTE:
Rotate the spring end guide 2 in the direction of the arrow shown to unhook the end of the torsion spring.
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Suspension wheel Guide wheel Cracks/damage Replace. Wheel bearing Wheel turns roughly Replace. 2. Inspect: Stopper band Frayed/damage Replace. Pull rod Bends/damage Replace. Shock absorber Oil (gas) leaks/damage Replace. Bushings Wear/cracks/damage Replace. Front pivot arm Rear pivot arm Rear pivot arm bracket (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA)
4-61

POWR TR
Suspension wheel bracket Front suspension bracket Rear suspension bracket Connecting arm Sliding frame Cracks/damage Replace. Slide runner Wear/damage Replace.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install: tension adjusters 1
NOTE:
Install the tension adjusters so that they are angled outward as shown in the illustration.
1
2. Apply: ESSO beacon 325 grease or Aeroshell grease #7A (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
NOTE:
Apply grease to the bushings 1 and the shaft 2 in the area a shown in the illustration.
2 a
1
b 5 ~ 15 mm (0.20 ~ 0.59 in)
3. Install: Control rods 1 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
NOTE:
Install the control rods with the water drain holes a facing downward.
a
4. Install: Collars 1 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA)
b a
NOTE:
Fit the projection a on each collar into the hole b in its respective sliding frame.
4-62

2 1 3 2 1
POWR TR
5. Install: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA Pull rods 1 Collars 2 Washers 3
NOTE:
Be sure not to pinch the washers when installing the pull rods. After installing the pull rods, make sure that the washers rotate. 6. Install: Rear shock absorber 1 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA)
1 a
NOTE:
Install the rear shock absorber with its gas cylinder a facing downward.
1 a
c b 2
3 4
7. Install: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA Front suspension bracket 1 Gas cylinder bracket 2 (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) Shaft 3 Washers 4
NOTE:
Install the shaft into the sliding frames with its flat portions a facing upward. Install each washer with its chamfered edge b facing inward and its flat edge c facing upward.
4-63
POWR TR
8. Install: Front shock absorber 1 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA)
1 a
NOTE:
For FX10: Install the front shock absorber with the charging valve a facing downward. For FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA: Install the gas cylinder with the adjuster b facing upward. Install the front shock absorber with the valve c facing upward. Make sure that the gas cylinder contacts the projection d on the gas cylinder bracket. Be sure to install the screw clamps 2 used to secure the gas cylinder so that the fastener of each clamp is on top of the cylinder and the screw is horizontal.
c b
3 1
9. Install: FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA Suspension wheel brackets Bracket 1 Holder 2 Circlips Suspension wheels
NOTE:
Install the bracket 1 with the mark a on the inner side of the bracket facing forward. Fasten the hose (front shock absorber to gas cylinder) with the holder 2, making sure to position the hose protector 3 toward the shock absorber. Do not install the holder on the hose protector.
4-64

10. Install: Stopper band 1
POWR TR
NOTE:
Install the stopper band with a toward the front pivot arm and b toward the shaft. Install the stopper band with c toward the rear pivot arm and d toward the rear pivot arm bracket.
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA (front side) FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA (rear side) FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA
Stopper band nut: 4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb)
T.
R.
4-65

INSTALLATION
POWR TR
1. Adjust: Track tension Refer to TRACK TENSION ADJUSTMENT in CHAPTER 2.
Control rod part numbers (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
a b c
Control rod 1 FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA Control rod 1 part number 8HA-4745A-00 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA)
Length a mm (in) 238.3 (9.38)
Length b mm (in) 199.7 (7.86)
Length c mm (in) 2.5P 2 = 5 (0.098P 2 = 0.197)
Control rod stopper part number
Washer part numbers Washer thickness mm (in) Upper 90202-25001 2.0 (0.079) 90201-24015 2.0 (0.079) Qty 1 1 Lower 90202-25001 2.0 (0.079) Qty
8ES-4745D-00
Standard position Metal washer(s) Plastic washer(s)
4-66
FRONT AXLE AND TRACK FRONT AXLE AND TRACK

1 2 5 3
LT
POWR TR
4 FX10MT/ FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 6
LT
New 10 11 New 7 9 New 12 (3) 8
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Job name/Part name Front axle and track removal Drive chain Slide rail suspension Secondary sheave Speed sensor Bearing housing Gear unit Set bolt Bearing Bearing housing Bearing housing Circlip Bearing Front axle assembly Spacer Track
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to DRIVE CHAIN. Refer to SLIDE RAIL SUSPENSION. Refer to SECONDARY SHEAVE.
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-67
FRONT AXLE AND TRACK

INSPECTION
POWR TR
1. Inspect: Track 1 Slide metal 2 Wear/cracks/damage Replace.
2. Inspect: Sprocket wheels 1 Wear/break/damage Replace. Front axle 2 Bends/scratches (excessive)/damage Replace.
3. Inspect: Bearing Pitting/damage Replace.
INSTALLATION
1. Install: Oil seal 1
NOTE:
Press the oil seal onto the bearing housing as shown.
2.5 ~ 3.5 mm (0.10 ~ 0.14 in)
4-68
FRONT AXLE AND TRACK
53.8 mm (2.12 in) 102 mm (4.02 in) 123 mm (4.84 in) 102 mm (4.02 in)
POWR TR
2. Install: Sprocket wheels Guide wheels
39 mm (1.54 in)
27 mm (1.06 in)
39 mm (1.54 in)
NOTE:
When pressing the sprocket wheels onto the front axle, align the lugs on each sprocket wheel. Position each sprocket wheel on the axle as shown in the illustration.
60 mm (2.36 in) 143.3 mm (5.64 in) 174.8 mm (6.88 in)
109.9 mm (4.33 in) 199.4 mm (7.85 in)
27 mm (1.06 in)
101 mm (3.98 in) 29.6 mm (1.17 in) 166.1 mm (6.54 in)
105.5 mm (4.15 in) 29.6 mm (1.17 in)
157.1 mm (6.19 in)
222.2 mm (8.75 in)
3. Place the track in the chassis.
NOTE:
For track with a direction of rotation mark a: Install the track with the mark pointing in the direction of track rotation.
4-69
SEAT AND FUEL TANK
ENG
ENGINE
SEAT AND FUEL TANK
: : : : :
4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb) 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) 8 Nm (0.8 m kg, 5.8 ft lb) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
(3) (3) 4 5 8 7 12 11 9 13 (4) 10 4
(6) New 6 1
3
Order Job name/Part name Seat and fuel tank removal Side cover Rear side cover (left and right) Seat Rear upper cover Fuel tank cover (left and right) Fuel tank upper cover Fuel pump coupler Fuel hose connector holder Fuel hose Fuel sender coupler Fuel tank breather hose Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect.
5-1
SEAT AND FUEL TANK

: : : : :
4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb) 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) 8 Nm (0.8 m kg, 5.8 ft lb) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
ENG
(3)
(3) 4 5 8 7 12 11 9 13 (4) 10 4
(6) New 6 1
3
Order 11 12 13 Job name/Part name Fuel tank assembly Fuel pump Fuel sender Qty 1 1 1 Remarks
5-2
SEAT AND FUEL TANK

REMOVAL
ENG
1. Extract the fuel in the fuel tank through the fuel tank cap with a pump. 2. Remove: Fuel hose connector holder Fuel hose
CAUTION:
Be sure to disconnect the fuel hose by hand. Do not forcefully disconnect the hose with tools. Although the fuel has been removed from the fuel tank be careful when removing the fuel hose, since there may be fuel remaining in it.
NOTE:
When removing the fuel hose from the fuel pump, remove the fuel hose connector holder first, and next, insert a slotted head screwdriver etc. in the slot part a of the fuel hose connector cover 1, then slide the screwdriver in the direction of the arrow, and remove the fuel hose. Before removing the hose, place a few rags in the area under where it will be removed. 3. Remove: Fuel pump bracket Fuel pump Fuel pump gasket Fuel sender
CAUTION:
Do not drop the fuel pump or give it a strong shock. Do not touch the base section of the fuel sender.
5-3
SEAT AND FUEL TANK

INSTALLATION
1. Install: Fuel pump gasket New Fuel pump Fuel pump bracket
ENG
Fuel pump nut: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
NOTE:
Do not damage the installation surface of the fuel tank when installing the fuel pump. Always use a new fuel pump gasket. Install the fuel pump in the direction shown in the illustration. Install the fuel pump bracket by aligning the projection a on the fuel pump with the projection b on the fuel tank. Tighten the bolts in stages and in a crisscross pattern.
2. Install: Fuel hose
CAUTION:
When installing the fuel hose, make sure that it is securely connected, and that the fuel hose connector cover on the fuel hose is in the correct position, otherwise the fuel hose will not be properly installed.
NOTE:
Install the fuel hose connector cover 1 securely onto the fuel pump until a distinct click is heard. 3. Install: Fuel hose connector holder 1
CAUTION:
When installing the fuel hose, make sure that it is securely connected, and that the fuel hose connector holder is in the correct position, otherwise the fuel hose will not be properly installed.
NOTE:
Install the fuel hose connector holder 1 securely onto the fuel tank until a distinct click is heard, and then make sure that it does not come loose.
T.
R.
5-4
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

: : : : : : :
6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) 9 Nm (0.9 m kg, 6.5 ft lb) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb) 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb)
ENG
6 11
(8) (4) 5
12 15 New (6) 14 13 (3)
7 3 16 (3) 8
LT
4 2
9 New 10
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Job name/Part name Exhaust pipe and muffler removal Fuel tank Tail/brake light coupler Tail/brake light cover Muffler end cover Tail/brake light assembly Exhaust pipe joint cover Muffler band bolt Muffler Muffler band Muffler gasket Muffler stay
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to SEAT AND FUEL TANK. Disconnect. FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA Disconnect. FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA Loosen.
5-5
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

: : : : : : :
6 Nm (0.6 m kg, 4.3 ft lb) 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) 9 Nm (0.9 m kg, 6.5 ft lb) 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb) 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb)
ENG
(4) 5
6 11
(8)
12 15 New (6) 14 13 (3)
7 3 16 (3) 8
LT
4 2
9 New 10
Order 11 12 13 14 15 16
Job name/Part name Muffler cover Exhaust pipe bolt Exhaust pipe band Exhaust pipe joint Exhaust pipe joint gasket Exhaust pipe
Qty 1 2 3 3 1 1
Remarks Loosen.
5-6

INSTALLATION
ENG
1. Install: Exhaust pipe 1 (temporarily)
NOTE:
Install the exhaust pipe to the brackets on the frame, making sure to position it as far rearward as possible, and then temporarily tighten the exhaust pipe bolts.
1
2. Install: Exhaust pipe joint gasket New Exhaust pipe joint Exhaust pipe band
NOTE:
After installing the exhaust pipe joints, fit the exhaust pipe into them. Temporarily tighten the exhaust pipe band bolts; do not torque them at this point.
3. Install: Muffler band 1 Muffler
NOTE:
Align the projection a on the muffler band with the slot b on the muffler. Temporarily tighten the muffler band bolt and muffler bolts; do not torque them at this point. 4. Tighten: Exhaust pipe band bolts Exhaust pipe band bolt: 9 Nm (0.9 m kg, 6.5 ft lb)
a b 1
5. Tighten: Muffler bolts Muffler bolt: 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
NOTE:
First tighten the bolts on the rear side of the muffler, and then tighten the bolts on the front side.
T.
R.
T.
R.
5-7

6. Tighten: Muffler band bolt
ENG
Muffler band bolt: 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb)
7. Tighten: Exhaust pipe bolts Exhaust pipe bolt: 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
5-8
OIL TANK OIL TANK

: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 16 Nm (1.6 m kg, 11 ft lb) 1 5
ENG
2
LS
New
Order
Job name/Part name Oil tank removal Lower side cover (left and right) Engine oil
Qty
1 2 3 4 5 6
Oil level switch coupler Oil tank breather hose Oil tank inlet hose Oil tank Oil level gauge Oil tank outlet hose
1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to COVERS in CHAPTER 3. Drain. Refer to ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT in CHAPTER 2. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect.
Disconnect. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-9
ENGINE ASSEMBLY ENGINE ASSEMBLY

HOSES AND LEADS
ENG
: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) 11 6 11 14

LS
12 11
1 11
10
13 New
11
8 5 2 3
4 9
Order
Job name/Part name Hoses and leads removal Coolant Engine oil/Oil filter cartridge
Qty
Handlebar/Steering column Air filter case Throttle body Primary sheave Secondary sheave Secondary shaft Radiator/Radiator bracket Thermostat Oil tank
5-10
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Drain. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM in CHAPTER 2. Drain. Refer to ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT in CHAPTER 2. Refer to STEERING in CHAPTER 3. Refer to AIR FILTER CASE in CHAPTER 7. Refer to THROTTLE BODY in CHAPTER 7. Refer to PRIMARY SHEAVE AND DRIVE VBELT in CHAPTER 4. Refer to SECONDARY SHAFT in CHAPTER 4. Refer to SECONDARY SHAFT in CHAPTER 4. Refer to RADIATOR in CHAPTER 6. Refer to THERMOSTAT in CHAPTER 6. Refer to OIL TANK.
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) 11 6 11 14
LS
ENG
12 11
1 11
10
13 New
11
8 5 2 3
4 9
Order
Job name/Part name Fuel tank Exhaust pipe/Muffler Ignition coil coupler Oil pressure switch coupler Crankshaft position sensor coupler Stator coil coupler Frame ground lead Starter motor lead Oil tank inlet hose Oil tank inlet pipe Water pump inlet hose Speed sensor coupler Plastic band Fuel tank breather hose Main fuse Starter relay
Qty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1
Remarks Refer to SEAT AND FUEL TANK. Refer to EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect.
Disconnect. Disconnect.
5-11
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
ENG
: 9 Nm (0.9 m kg, 6.5 ft lb) : 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb) : 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) : 65 Nm (6.5 m kg, 47 ft lb) (4) 3 (4) 1
(3)
5 3 4 (3) 13 (3)
10
12 11 9 7
8 4 3
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Job name/Part name Engine assembly removal Rear frame cross member Front frame assembly Engine mounting nut Washer Washer Left front engine mounting bolt/washer Right front engine mounting bolt Engine mounting bracket Left front engine mounting bolt spacer Rear engine mounting bolt Engine assembly Right front engine mounting bolt spacer Rear engine mounting bolt spacer Qty 1 1 3 2 1 1/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure. Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below.
5-12
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL
ENG
1. Remove: Rear engine mounting nut Front engine mounting nuts Washers
NOTE:
Do not remove the engine mounting bolts.
2. Remove: Engine assembly Removal steps: Screw in the engine mounting bolt spacers (front and rear) using the engine mount spacer wrench 1 so that there is a gap between each engine mounting bolt spacer 2 and engine damper 3.
1
Engine mount spacer wrench: 90890-01516, YS-01516 Remove the engine mounting bolts, and then remove the engine assembly.
INSTALLATION NOTE:
After installing all parts, refer to CABLE ROUTING in CHAPTER 9, to check the cable, lead and hose routing. 1. Install: Engine assembly
NOTE:
Use the engine mount spacer wrench to tighten the engine mounting bolt spacers.
5-13
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
ENG
Installation steps: Install the engine mounting bolt spacers (right front and rear). Install the engine assembly and then, install the rear engine mounting bolt, right front engine mounting bolt and washers. Install the left front engine mounting bolt spacer to engine mounting bracket and then install the engine mounting bracket, left front engine mounting bolt and washer. Engine mounting bracket nut: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb)
Tighten the rear engine mounting bolt spacer to specification with an engine mount spacer wrench 1. Rear engine mounting bolt spacer: 9 Nm (0.9 m kg, 6.5 ft lb) Engine mount spacer wrench: 90890-01516, YS-01516 Tighten the rear engine mounting nut. Rear engine mounting nut: 65 Nm (6.5 m kg, 47 ft lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
Tighten the front engine mounting bolt spacers 2 (right and left) until they come to contact with the engine damper 3.
NOTE:
Do not apply torque to the front engine mounting bolt spacers. Install the washers and nuts and then, tighten the front engine mounting nuts (right and left). Front engine mounting nut: 65 Nm (6.5 m kg, 47 ft lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
5-14
CAMSHAFTS CAMSHAFTS
CYLINDER HEAD COVER
ENG
: 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb) : 13 Nm (1.3 m kg, 9.4 ft lb) 2

LS
New (6)
1 4
5 New
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6
Job name/Part name Cylinder head cover removal Fuel tank Cylinder head breather hose Ignition coil Spark plug Cylinder head cover Cylinder head cover gasket Timing chain guide (top side)
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to SEAT AND FUEL TANK.
1 3 3 1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-15
CAMSHAFTS
CAMSHAFTS
ENG
6 5 6 10
E
: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb) :

24 Nm (2.4 m kg, 17 ft lb)
8 5
M
11 7 New
M
LS
New
9 3 4 New
LS
New 2
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Job name/Part name Camshafts removal Engine Timing accessing screw Crankshaft end cover Timing chain tensioner Timing chain tensioner gasket Exhaust camshaft cap Intake camshaft cap Dowel pin Exhaust camshaft Exhaust camshaft sprocket Intake camshaft Intake camshaft sprocket
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to ENGINE ASSEMBLY.
1 1 1 1 3 3 12 1 1 1 1
NOTE:
During removal, the dowel pins may still be connected to the camshaft caps.
5-16
CAMSHAFTS
REMOVAL
ENG
b a
1. Remove: Timing accessing screw Crankshaft end cover 2. Align: I mark a on the AC magneto rotor (with the stationary pointer b on the AC magneto cover)
NOTE:
Turn the crankshaft clockwise. When piston #3 is at TDC on the compression stroke, align the I mark a on the AC magneto rotor with the stationary pointer b on the AC magneto cover. TDC on the compression stroke can be found when the camshaft lobes for cylinder #3 are turned away from each other.
EX
IN
3. Remove: Timing chain tensioner 1 Gasket
1
4. Remove: Camshaft caps Dowel pins
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the cylinder head, camshafts or camshaft caps, loosen the camshaft cap bolts in stages and in a crisscross pattern, working from the outside in.
5. Remove: Exhaust camshaft 1 (with camshaft sprocket) Intake camshaft 2 (with camshaft sprocket)
NOTE:
To prevent the timing chain from falling into the crankcase, fasten it with a wire 3.
1
5-17
CAMSHAFTS
ENG
6. Remove: Exhaust camshaft sprocket 1 Intake camshaft sprocket 2 (Use the special tool 3) Rotor holding tool: 90890-01235 Universal magneto & rotor holder: YU-01235
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Camshaft lobes Blue discoloration/pitting/scratches Replace the camshaft.
2. Measure: Camshaft lobe dimensions a and b Out of specification Replace the camshaft. Camshaft dimensions: Intake: <Limit>: a 34.250 mm (1.3484 in) b 24.850 mm (0.9783 in) Exhaust: <Limit>: a 33.850 mm (1.3327 in) b 24.850 mm (0.9783 in)
5-18
CAMSHAFTS
ENG
3. Measure: Camshaft runout Out of specification Replace. Camshaft runout: 0.030 mm (0.0012 in)
4. Measure: Camshaft-journal-to-camshaft-cap clearance Out of specification Measure the camshaft journal diameter. Camshaft-journal-to-camshaft-cap clearance: 0.028 ~ 0.062 mm (0.0011 ~ 0.0024 in) Measurement steps: Install the camshaft into the cylinder head (without the dowel pins and camshaft caps). Position a strip of Plastigauge 1 onto the camshaft journal as shown. Install the dowel pins and camshaft caps.
NOTE:
Tighten the camshaft cap bolts in stages and in a crisscross pattern, working from the inner caps out. Do not turn the camshaft when measuring the camshaft journal-to-camshaft cap clearance with the Plastigauge. Camshaft cap bolt: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
Remove the camshaft caps and then measure the width of the Plastigauge 1.
5. Measure: Camshaft journal diameter a Out of specification Replace the camshaft. Within specification Replace the cylinder head and the camshaft caps as a set. Camshaft journal diameter: 24.459 ~ 24.472 mm (0.9630 ~ 0.9635 in)
T.
R.
5-19
CAMSHAFTS
ENG
6. Inspect: Camshaft sprocket More than 1/4 tooth a wear Replace the camshaft sprockets, timing chain, and crankshaft as a set.
a b 1 2 1/4 tooth Correct Timing chain roller Camshaft sprocket
7. Inspect: Timing chain guide (top side) Damage/wear Replace
4 1 2 3
8. Remove: Timing chain tensioner rod 1 Timing chain tensioner spring 2 Timing chain tensioner housing 4
NOTE:
Squeeze the timing chain tensioner clip 3, and then remove the timing chain tensioner rod and timing chain tensioner spring. 9. Inspect: Timing chain tensioner housing Timing chain tensioner rod Timing chain tensioner spring Damage/wear Replace the as a set. 10. Assemble: Timing chain tensioner spring Timing chain tensioner rod
NOTE:
Prior to installing the timing chain tensioner rod, drain the engine oil from the timing chain tensioner housing.
5-20
CAMSHAFTS
1
ENG
Assembly steps: Install the timing chain tensioner spring and timing chain tensioner rod 1. Squeeze the timing chain tensioner clip 2, and then push the timing chain tensioner rod 3 into the timing chain tensioner housing.
NOTE:
Do not release the timing chain tensioner clip while pushing the rod into the housing, otherwise the rod may be ejected. Hook the clip 4 to the timing chain tensioner rod 3.
NOTE:
Hook the timing chain tensioner rod pin 5 to the center of the clip 4. After the installation, check that the clip 4 can come off by its own weight by pushing the timing chain tensioner rod 3 at the position of installation.
5 4
11. Inspect: All parts Damage/wear Replace the defective part(-s).
5-21
CAMSHAFTS
INSTALLATION
ENG
1. Install: Intake camshaft sprocket 1 Exhaust camshaft sprocket 2 (with the special tool 3) Rotor holding tool: 90890-01235 Universal magneto & rotor holder: YU-01235 Camshaft sprocket bolts
2 b
EX
IN
1
T.
Camshaft sprocket bolt: 24 Nm (2.4 m kg, 17 ft lb)
R.
NOTE:
Make sure that the holes a in the cylinder #3 cam and marks b on the camshaft sprockets are in the position shown in the illustration. c: Cylinder #3 - cam
b a
2. Install: Intake camshaft 1 (with the camshaft sprocket) Exhaust camshaft 2 (with the camshaft sprocket) Installation steps: Turn the crankshaft clockwise. When piston #3 is at TDC on the compression stroke, align the I mark a on the AC magneto rotor with the stationary pointer b on the AC magneto cover. Install the timing chain onto both camshaft sprockets, and then install the camshafts.
NOTE:
Install the camshafts with the hole c in the cylinder #3 - cam facing up. When installing the timing chain, start with the intake camshaft and be sure to keep the timing chain as tight as possible on the intake side. Make sure the marks d on the timing chain sprockets are parallel with the edge of the cylinder head. e: Cylinder #3 - cam
EX
IN
d
5-22
CAMSHAFTS
b a
3. Install: Dowel pins Intake camshaft caps Exhaust camshaft caps
ENG
NOTE:
The I mark refers to the intake camshaft caps and the E mark refers to the exhaust camshaft caps. Install the camshaft caps with the arrow mark a pointing towards the right side of the engine. Make sure the holes b in the camshaft are aligned with the arrow mark a on the camshaft caps. 4. Install: Camshaft cap bolts Camshaft cap bolt: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
b a
NOTE:
Tighten the camshaft cap bolts in stages and in a crisscross pattern, working from the inner caps out.
CAUTION:
Lubricate the camshaft cap bolts with the engine oil. The camshaft cap bolts must be tightened evenly or damage to the cylinder head, camshaft caps, and camshafts will result. Do not turn the crankshaft when installing the camshaft to avoid damage or improper valve timing.
T.
R.
5-23
CAMSHAFTS
ENG
b a
5. Install: Timing chain tensioner gasket 1 New Timing chain tensioner 2 Timing chain tensioner bolt: 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb)
L
1
NOTE:
Be sure to install the timing chain tensioner gasket so that its section with the L mark a is protruding from the lower left side of the timing chain tensioner. The arrow mark b on the timing chain tensioner should face up.
b a
c d
6. Turn: Crankshaft (several turns clockwise) 7. Inspect: I mark Make sure the I mark a on the AC magneto rotor is aligned with the stationary pointer b on the AC magneto cover. Camshaft holes Make sure the holes c in the cylinder #3 cam are aligned with the arrow marks d on the camshaft caps. Out of alignment Adjust. Refer to the installation steps above.
T.
R.
c d
8. Measure: Valve clearance Out of specification Adjust. Refer to VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT in CHAPTER 2.
5-24
CAMSHAFTS
1
ENG
9. Install: Cylinder head cover gasket New Cylinder head cover Cylinder head cover bolt: 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb)
NOTE:
Apply bond TB1541 1 onto the mating surfaces of the cylinder head cover and cylinder head cover gasket. Apply Yamaha bond No. 1215 2 onto the mating surfaces of the cylinder head cover gasket. Tighten the cylinder head cover bolts stages and in a crisscross pattern. Yamaha bond No. 1215: 90890-85505 (Three Bond No.1215)
T.
R.
5-25
CYLINDER HEAD CYLINDER HEAD

(8)
ENG
New
E
3 New 4

25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) : 1st 2nd 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) Final Specified angle 175 ~ 185
Order
1 2 3 4
Job name/Part name Cylinder head removal Engine assembly Camshafts Oil delivery hose Cylinder head Cylinder head gasket Dowel pin
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to ENGINE ASSEMBLY. Refer to CAMSHAFTS.
1 1 1 2 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-26
CYLINDER HEAD
REMOVAL
1. Remove: Cylinder head bolts
ENG
NOTE:
Loosen the bolts in the proper sequence as shown. Loosen each bolt 1/2 of a turn at a time. After all of the bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
2 4 8 10 6
INSPECTION
1. Eliminate: Combustion chamber carbon deposits (with a rounded scraper)
NOTE:
Do not use a sharp instrument to avoid damaging or scratching: Spark plug bore threads Valve seats 2. Check: Cylinder head Damage/scratches Replace. Cylinder head water jacket Mineral deposits/rust Eliminate. 3. Measure: Cylinder head warpage Out of specification Resurface the cylinder head. Maximum cylinder head warpage: 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) Measurement steps: Place a straightedge 1 and a thickness gauge 2 across the cylinder head. Measure the warpage. If the limit is exceeded, resurface the cylinder head as follows. Place a 400 ~ 600 grit wet sandpaper on the surface plate and resurface the cylinder head using a figure-eight sanding pattern.
NOTE:
To ensure an even surface, rotate the cylinder head several times.
5-27
CYLINDER HEAD
INSTALLATION
1. Install: Cylinder head
ENG
NOTE:
Pass the timing chain through the timing chain cavity.
2. Tighten: Cylinder head bolts (M10)
NOTE:
The tightening procedure of the cylinder head bolts is angle controlled, therefore tighten the bolts using the following procedure.
Tightening steps: Lubricate the cylinder head bolts and washers with engine oil. Install the washers and cylinder head bolts. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in the proper tightening sequence as shown. Cylinder head bolt (M10): 1st: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb)
Loosen and retighten the cylinder head bolts in the proper tightening sequence as shown. Cylinder head bolt (M10): 2nd: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
5-28
CYLINDER HEAD
ENG
Tighten the cylinder head bolts further to reach the specified angle 175 ~ 185 in the proper tightening sequence as shown. Cylinder head bolt (M10): Final: Specified angle 175 ~ 185
WARNING
When the bolts are tightened more than the specified angle, do not loosen the bolt and then retighten it. Replace the bolt with a new one and perform the procedure again.
CAUTION:
Do not use a torque wrench to tighten the bolt to the specified angle. Tighten the bolt until it is at the specified angle.
NOTE:
When using a hexagonal bolt, note that the angle from one corner to another is 60.
3. Tighten: Cylinder head bolts (M6) 1 Cylinder head bolt: 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb)
T.
R.
T.
R.
5-29
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

1 2 3 4 5 New 8 1 3
M
ENG
9
M
2 3 4 5 8
M
New
9 10 10 7
M
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Job name/Part name Valves and valve springs removal Cylinder head Valve lifter Valve pad Valve cotter Upper spring seat Valve spring Intake valve Exhaust valve Valve stem seal Lower spring seat Valve guide
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to CYLINDER HEAD.
5-30
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

REMOVAL
ENG
The following procedure applies to all of the valves and related components.
NOTE:
Before removing the internal parts of the cylinder head (e.g., valves, valve springs, valve seats), make sure the valves properly seal.
1. Remove: Valve lifter 1 Valve pad 2
NOTE:
Make a note of the position of each valve lifter and valve pad so that they can be reinstalled in their original place.
2. Inspect: Valve (for leakage) Leakage at the valve seat Check the valve face, valve seat, and valve seat width. Inspection steps: Pour a clean solvent a into the intake and exhaust ports. Check that the valves properly seal.
NOTE:
There should be no leakage at the valve seat 1.
3. Remove: Valve cotters
NOTE:
Remove the valve cotters by compressing the valve spring with the valve spring compressor 1 and valve spring compressor attachment 2. Valve spring compressor: 90890-04019, YM-04019 Valve spring compressor attachment: 90890-04114 Valve spring compressor adapter 19.5 mm: YM-04114
5-31

4. Remove: Upper spring seat 1 Valve spring 2 Valve 3 Valve stem seal 4 Lower spring seat 5
ENG
NOTE:
Identify the position of each part very carefully so that it can be reinstalled in its original place.
INSPECTION
1. Measure: Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance = Valve guide inside diameter a Valve stem diameter b Out of specification Replace the valve guide. Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance: Intake: 0.010 ~ 0.037 mm (0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in) <Limit>: 0.080 mm (0.0031 in) Exhaust: 0.025 ~ 0.052 mm (0.0010 ~ 0.0020 in) <Limit>: 0.100 mm (0.0039 in)
2. Replace: Valve guide
NOTE:
To ease valve guide removal and installation, and to maintain the correct fit, heat the cylinder head to 100 C (212 F) in an oven. Replacement steps: Remove the valve guide with the valve guide remover 1. Install the new valve guide with the valve guide installer 2 and valve guide remover 1. Valve guide position a: 14.8 ~ 15.2 mm (0.583 ~ 0.598 in)
5-32
ENG
After installing the valve guide, bore the valve guide with the valve guide reamer 3 to obtain the proper valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance.
NOTE:
After replacing the valve guide, reface the valve seat. Valve guide remover (4.5): 90890-04116 Valve guide remover (4.5 mm): YM-04116 Valve guide installer (4.5): 90890-04117 Valve guide installer (4.5 mm): YM-04117 Valve guide reamer (4.5): 90890-04118 Valve guide reamer (4.5 mm): YM-04118 3. Eliminate: Carbon deposits (from the valve face and valve seat) 4. Inspect: Valve face Pitting/wear Grind the valve face. Valve stem end Mushroom shape or diameter larger than the body of the valve stem Replace the valve.
5. Measure: Valve margin thickness a Out of specification Replace the valve. Valve margin thickness: Intake: 0.80 ~ 1.20 mm (0.0315 ~ 0.0472 in) Exhaust: 0.50 ~ 0.90 mm (0.0197 ~ 0.0354 in)
5-33
ENG
6. Measure: Valve stem runout Out of specification Replace the valve.
NOTE:
When installing a new valve, always replace the valve guide. If the valve is removed or replaced, always replace the valve stem seal. Valve stem runout: 0.010 mm (0.0004 in) 7. Eliminate: Carbon deposits (from the valve face and valve seat) 8. Inspect: Valve seat Pitting/wear Replace the cylinder head.
9. Measure: Valve seat width a Out of specification Replace the cylinder head. Valve seat width: Intake: 0.90 ~ 1.10 mm (0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) <Limit>: 1.6 mm (0.0630 in) Exhaust: 0.90 ~ 1.10 mm (0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) <Limit>: 1.6 mm (0.0630 in) Measurement steps: Apply Mechanics blueing dye (Dykem) 1 onto the valve face. Install the valve into the cylinder head. Press the valve through the valve guide and onto the valve seat to make a clear impression. Measure the valve seat width.
NOTE:
Where the valve seat and valve face contacted one another, the blueing will have been removed.
5-34

10. Lap: Valve face Valve seat
ENG
NOTE:
After replacing the cylinder head or replacing the valve and valve guide, the valve seat and valve face should be lapped. Lapping steps: Apply a coarse lapping compound a to the valve face.
CAUTION:
Do not let the lapping compound enter the gap between the valve stem and the valve guide. Apply molybdenum disulfide oil onto the valve stem. Install the valve into the cylinder head. Turn the valve until the valve face and valve seat are evenly polished, then clean off all of the lapping compound.
NOTE:
For the best lapping results, lightly tap the valve seat while rotating the valve back and forth between your hands. Apply a fine lapping compound to the valve face and repeat the above steps. After every lapping procedure, be sure to clean off all of the lapping compound from the valve face and valve seat. Apply Mechanics blueing dye (Dykem) b onto the valve face. Install the valve into the cylinder head. Press the valve through the valve guide and onto the valve seat to make a clear impression. Measure the valve seat width c again. If the valve seat width is out of specification, reface and lap the valve seat.
5-35
ENG
11. Measure: Valve spring free length a Out of specification Replace the valve spring. Valve spring free length (intake and exhaust): 39.57 mm (1.56 in) <Limit>: 37.59 mm (1.48 in)
12. Measure: Compressed valve spring force a Out of specification Replace the valve spring.
b Installed length
Compressed valve spring force (installed): 112.30 ~ 129.30 N at 34.60 mm (11.45 ~ 13.18 kg at 34.60 mm, 25.24 ~ 29.07 lb at 1.36 in) 13. Measure: Valve spring tilt a Out of specification Replace the valve spring. Maximum valve spring tilt: 2.5/1.7 mm (2.5/0.07 in)
14. Inspect: Valve lifter Damage/scratches Replace the valve lifters and cylinder head.
INSTALLATION
1. Deburr: Valve stem end (with an oil stone)
5-36
ENG
2. Lubricate: Valve stem 1 Valve stem seal 2 (with the recommended lubricant) Recommended lubricant: Molybdenum disulfide oil
3. Install: Lower spring seat 1 Valve stem seal 2 New Valve 3 Valve spring 4 Upper spring seat 5 (into the cylinder head)
NOTE:
Make sure each valve is installed in its original place. Install the valve spring with the larger pitch a facing up.
b Smaller pitch
4. Install: Valve cotters
NOTE:
Install the valve cotters by compressing the valve spring with the valve spring compressor 1 and valve spring compressor attachment 2. Valve spring compressor: 90890-04019, YM-04019 Valve spring compressor attachment: 90890-04114 Valve spring compressor adapter 19.5 mm: YM-04114
5-37
ENG
5. To secure the valve cotters onto the valve stem, lightly tap the valve tip with a soft-face hammer.
CAUTION:
Hitting the valve tip with excessive force could damage the valve.
6. Lubricate: Valve pad Valve lifter (with the recommended lubricant) Recommended lubricant: Molybdenum disulfide oil 7. Install: Valve pad Valve lifter
NOTE:
The valve lifter must move smoothly when rotated with a finger. Each valve lifter and valve pad must be reinstalled in its original position.
5-38
AC MAGNETO ROTOR AND STARTER CLUTCH AC MAGNETO ROTOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
ENG
i
: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb) : 130 Nm (13.0 m kg, 94 ft lb) 7 3 (11)
LT
(3) 4
LT
LT
LS
2 New 1 (3) 6
E LT E
9 8
11 10
5
E
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Job name/Part name AC magneto rotor and starter clutch removal Engine assembly AC magneto rotor cover AC magneto rotor cover gasket Dowel pin Stator coil AC magneto rotor Starter clutch Woodruff key Starter clutch gear Washer Idle gear shaft Starter clutch idle gear
Qty
1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-39
AC MAGNETO ROTOR AND STARTER CLUTCH

REMOVAL
ENG
1. Remove: AC magneto rotor bolt 1 Washer
NOTE:
3 2 1
While holding the AC magneto rotor 2 with the sheave holder 3, loosen the AC magneto rotor bolt. Sheave holder: 90890-01701 Primary clutch holder: YS-01880-A
2. Remove: AC magneto rotor 1 (with the flywheel puller 2 and flywheel puller attachment) Woodruff key
CAUTION:
2 1
To protect the end of the crankshaft, place a flywheel puller attachment between the flywheel puller sets center bolt and the crankshaft.
NOTE:
Make sure the flywheel puller is centered over the AC magneto rotor. Flywheel puller: 90890-01362 Heavy duty puller: YU-33270-B Flywheel puller attachment: 90890-04089 Crankshaft protector: YM-33282
5-40

1
3. Remove: Starter clutch
ENG
NOTE:
While holding the AC magneto rotor with the sheave holder, remove the starter clutch bolts 1. Sheave holder: 90890-01701 Primary clutch holder: YS-01880-A
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Stator coil Damage Replace the stator coil.
2. Inspect: Starter clutch rollers 1 Damage/wear Replace.
2 1 a
3. Inspect: Starter clutch idle gear 1 Starter clutch gear 2 Burrs/chips/roughness/wear Replace the defective part(s). Starter clutch gear contacting surfaces a Damage/pitting/wear Replace the starter clutch gear.
5-41
4. Inspect: Starter clutch operation
ENG
Installation steps: Install the starter clutch gear onto the starter clutch and hold the AC magneto rotor. When turning the starter clutch gear clockwise , it should turn freely, otherwise the starter clutch is faulty and must be replaced. When turning the starter clutch gear counterclockwise , the starter clutch and the starter clutch gear should engage, otherwise the starter clutch is faulty and must be replaced.
INSTALLATION
1. Install: Starter clutch
NOTE:
While holding the AC magneto rotor with the sheave holder, tighten the starter clutch bolts. Sheave holder: 90890-01701 Primary clutch holder: YS-01880-A
2. Tighten: Starter clutch bolts 1 Starter clutch bolt: 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb) LOCTITE
3. Install: Woodruff key AC magneto rotor Washer AC magneto rotor bolt
NOTE:
Clean the tapered portion of the crankshaft and the AC magneto rotor hub. When installing the AC magneto rotor, make sure the woodruff key is properly seated in the keyway of the crankshaft.
T.
R.
5-42
ENG
4. Tighten: AC magneto rotor bolt 1 AC magneto rotor bolt: 130 Nm (13.0 m kg, 94 ft lb)
T.
R.
3 2 1
NOTE:
Lubricate the AC magneto rotor bolt and washer with engine oil. While holding the AC magneto rotor 2 with the sheave holder 3, tighten the AC magneto rotor bolt. Sheave holder: 90890-01701 Primary clutch holder: YS-01880-A
5. Apply: Sealant (onto the AC magneto lead grommet) Yamaha bond No. 1215: 90890-85505 (Three Bond No.1215)
a 1
6. Install: AC magneto rotor cover AC magneto rotor cover bolt: 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb) LOCTITE
NOTE:
Apply locking agent (LOCTITE) to the threads of the bolt 1, which is indicated by the mark a on the AC magneto rotor cover.
T.
R.
5-43
OIL PAN AND OIL PUMP OIL PAN AND OIL PUMP
3 New 4 (5) New (15)
ENG
2
LT
8 8
5 5
New 6
: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb) : 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb) : 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb)
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Job name/Part name Oil pan and oil pump removal Engine Oil pressure switch sub-lead Oil pressure switch Oil pan Oil pan gasket Dowel pin Oil pump driven gear Oil pump assembly Dowel pin
Qty
1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-44
OIL PAN AND OIL PUMP

: 4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb) I J 8 K D
E
ENG
9 L
C 4
E
H D 7 F 4 3
E
G 4 5 1
New E
A 0 B
E
A 0
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B
Job name/Part name Oil pump disassembly Oil pan divider Oil pump housing cover 1 Oil pump housing cover 2 Pin Oil strainer Washer Pin Oil pump inner rotor 1 Oil pump outer rotor 1 Oil pump inner rotor 2 Oil pump outer rotor 2 Spacer
Qty 1 1 1 4 2 1 3 1 1 2 2 1
5-45

: 4 Nm (0.4 m kg, 2.9 ft lb) I J 8 K D
E
ENG
9 L
C 4
E
H D 7 F 4 3
E
G 4 5 1
New E
A 0 B
E
A 0
Order C D E F G H I J K L
Job name/Part name Oil pump shaft Oil seal Check ball seat Check ball Spring Spacer Relief valve cover Spring Relief valve Oil pump housing
Qty 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
5-46

REMOVAL
ENG
1. Remove: Oil pan 1
NOTE:
Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of the bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
2. Remove: Oil pump driven gear 1
NOTE:
While holding the oil pump driven gear with the rotor holding tool 2, loosen the oil pump driven gear bolt. To prevent the oil pump chain falling into the crankcase, fasten it with a wire.
2 1
Rotor holding tool: 90890-01235 Universal magneto & rotor holder: YU-01235
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Oil pump housing Oil pump covers Cracks/damage/wear Replace the defective part(-s).
5-47
ENG
2. Measure: Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance a (between inner rotor 1 and outer rotor 2) Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clearance b (between outer rotor 2 and pump housing 3) Out of specifications Replace oil pump assembly. Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance: 0.090 ~ 0.150 mm (0.0035 ~ 0.0059 in) Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clearance: 0.030 ~ 0.080 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0032 in)
3. Inspect: Oil pump operation Rough movement Repeat steps (1) and (2) or replace the defective part(s).
NOTE:
Install the oil pump gear to check the oil pump operation.
1 2 3
4. Inspect: Relief valve body 1 Relief valve 2 Spring 3 Damage/wear Replace the defective part(s).
5. Inspect: Oil pump driven gear Cracks/damage/wear Replace.
5-48
ENG
4 3 1 2
6. Inspect: Check ball seat 1 Check ball 2 Spring 3 Spacer 4 Damage/wear Replace the defective part(-s).
7. Inspect: Oil strainer Damage Replace. Obstruction Wash and blow out with compressed air. Contaminants Clean with engine oil.
INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate: Inner rotor Outer rotor Oil pump shaft (with the recommended lubricant) Recommended lubricant: Engine oil
a a
2. Install: Pin Inner rotor Outer rotor
NOTE:
Each set of inner and outer rotors should be installed with both punch marks a facing in the same direction, either away from or towards the oil pump assembly. When installing the inner rotor, align the pin in the oil pump shaft with the groove b on the inner rotor. 3. Inspect: Oil pump operation Unsmooth operation Replace.
5-49

4. Install: Oil pump driven gear 1
ENG
Oil pump driven gear bolt: 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb)
2 1
NOTE:
Install the oil pump driven gear with the stamped mark 4XV facing towards the oil pump assembly. While holding the oil pump driven gear with the rotor holding tool 2, tighten the oil pump driven gear bolt. Rotor holding tool: 90890-01235 Universal magneto & rotor holder: YU-01235 5. Install: Dowel pin Oil pan gasket New Oil pan Gasket New Oil pan bolts Oil pan bolt: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
T.
R.
NOTE:
Tighten the oil pan bolts in stages and in a crisscross pattern. M6 35 mm bolts: 1 M6 30 mm bolt: 2 M6 25 mm bolts: 3
T.
R.
5-50
CRANKCASE CRANKCASE
ENG

24 Nm (2.4 m kg, 17 ft lb)
: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb)

E

LS E
2 9 7
LT
(4)
6 10
3
LT
1 4 1
LT
5
: Yamaha bond No.1215 (Three Bond No.1215)
Order
Job name/Part name Crankcase separate Engine assembly Cylinder head AC magneto rotor/Starter clutch gear Oil pump Water pump Starter motor
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to ENGINE ASSEMBLY. Refer to CYLINDER HEAD. Refer to AC MAGNETO ROTOR AND STARTER CLUTCH. Refer to OIL PAN AND OIL PUMP. Refer to WATER PUMP in CHAPTER 6. Refer to STARTER MOTOR in CHAPTER 8.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Engine mounting bracket Oil pump drive chain guide Timing chain guide (exhaust side) Timing chain guide (intake side) Oil pump drive chain Timing chain Crankshaft position sensor
2 1 1 1 1 1 1
5-51
CRANKCASE
ENG

24 Nm (2.4 m kg, 17 ft lb)
: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb)

E

LS E
2 9 7
LT
(4)
6 10
3
LT
1 4 1
LT
5
: Yamaha bond No.1215 (Three Bond No.1215)
Order 8 9 10
Job name/Part name Primary sheave drive shaft assembly bolt Lower crankcase Dowel pin
Qty 4 1 1
Remarks
5-52
CRANKCASE
N A 9 5 B 0 6 D 1 2 C 3 4 E 7 8 G L J I K M
REMOVAL
1. Remove: Crankcase bolts
ENG
NOTE:
Place the engine upside down. Loosen the bolts in decreasing numerical order of the embossed numbers on the crankcase. Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time. After all of the bolts are fully loosened, remove them. 2. Remove: Lower crankcase
HF
CAUTION:
Tap on one side of the crankcase with a softface hammer. Tap only on reinforced portions of the crankcase, not on the crankcase mating surfaces. Work slowly and carefully and make sure that the crankcase halves separate evenly.
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Crankcase: Cracks/damage Replace.
NOTE:
Thoroughly wash the crankcase halves in a mild solvent. Thoroughly clean all the gasket surfaces and crankcase mating surfaces. Oil delivery passages Obstruction Blow out with compressed air. 2. Inspect: Timing chain Oil pump drive chain Damage/stiffness Replace the chain and sprocket as a set. 3. Inspect: Timing chain guide (intake side) Timing chain guide (exhaust side) Damage/wear Replace the timing chain guide(-s).
5-53
CRANKCASE
INSTALLATION
ENG
1. Lubricate: Crankshaft journal bearings (with the recommended lubricant) Recommended lubricant: Engine oil
2. Apply: Sealant (onto the crankcase mating surfaces) Yamaha bond No. 1215: 90890-85505 (Three Bond No.1215)
NOTE:
Do not allow any sealant to come into contact with the oil gallery or crankshaft journal bearings. Do not apply sealant to within 2 ~ 3 mm (0.08 ~ 0.12 in) of the crankshaft journal bearings. 3. Install: Lower crankcase (onto the upper crankcase)
N A 9
L 5 6
J 1 2 D
I 3 4 C
K 7 8 E
4. Install: Crankcase bolts
NOTE:
Lubricate the bolts 1 ~ 8 thread and washers with engine oil. Lubricate the bolts 9 ~ E, I ~ N thread part and mating surface with engine oil. Apply Yamaha bond No. 1215 to the threads of the bolts F ~ H. Finger tighten the crankcase bolts. M9 105 mm bolts: 1 ~ 8 M8 70 mm bolts: 9, 0, B M8 55 mm bolt: A M6 80 mm bolts: E, I, J M6 80 mm bolts (black): F ~ H M6 55 mm bolts: C, D, K, L, N M6 52 mm bolt: M
HF
5-54
CRANKCASE
ENG
5. Tighten: Crankcase bolts (M9 105 mm) 1 ~ 8
NOTE:
5 6
1 2
3 4
7 8
Tighten the bolts in the order of the embossed numbers on the crankcase. Tighten the crankcase bolts. Crankcase bolt 1 ~ 8: 1st: 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb)
Loosen and retighten the crankcase bolts. Crankcase bolt 1 ~ 8: 2nd: 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb)
Tighten the crankcase bolts further to reach the specified angle 65 ~ 70. Crankcase bolt 1 ~ 8: Final: Specified angle 65 ~ 70
WARNING
If the bolt is tightened more than the specified angle, do not loosen the bolt and then retighten it. Instead, replace the bolt with a new one and perform the procedure again.
CAUTION:
Do not use a torque wrench to tighten the bolt to the specified angle. Tighten the bolt until it is at the specified angle.
NOTE:
On a hexagonal bolt, note that the angle from one corner to another is 60.
T.
R.
T.
R.
T.
R.
5-55
CRANKCASE
N A 9 L J I K M
6. Tighten: Crankcase bolts 9 ~ N
ENG
NOTE:
Tighten the bolts in the order of the embossed numbers on the crankcase. Crankcase bolt 9 ~ B: 24 Nm (2.4 m kg, 17 ft lb) Crankcase bolt C ~ N: 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb)
0 HF D C E G
T.
7. Install: Primary sheave drive shaft assembly bolts Primary sheave drive shaft assembly bolt: 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb)
8. Install: Engine mounting brackets 1 Engine mounting bracket bolts
NOTE:
When installing the engine mounting brackets, make sure that the number on each side of the upper crankcase is aligned with the identical number on the brackets. Engine mounting bracket bolts: 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb)
R.
T.
R.
T.
R.
5-56
CONNECTING RODS AND PISTONS CONNECTING RODS AND PISTONS
ENG
New
New 1 2
M
7
E
M M
New 5
E
New
New 3
New 3
10
E
9 8
E
20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb) : 1st Final Specified angle 115 ~ 125
Order
Job name/Part name Connecting rods and pistons removal Crankcase Connecting rod cap Big end lower bearing Piston pin clip Piston pin Piston Connecting rod Big end upper bearing Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Separate. Refer to CRANKCASE.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
5-57
CONNECTING RODS AND PISTONS

REMOVAL
1. Remove: Connecting rod cap 1 Big end bearings
ENG
NOTE:
Identify the position of each big end bearing so that it can be reinstalled in its original place.
4 3 2 1
2. Remove: Piston pin clips 1 Piston pin 2 Piston 3 Connecting rod 4
CAUTION:
Do not use a hammer to drive the piston pin out.
NOTE:
For reference during installation, put identification mark on each piston crown. Before removing the piston pin, deburr the piston pin clip groove and the piston pin bore area. If both areas are deburred and the piston pin is still difficult to remove, remove it with the piston pin puller set 5. Piston pin puller set: 90890-01304 Piston pin puller: YU-01304
3. Remove: Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring
NOTE:
When removing a piston ring, open the end gap with your fingers and lift the other side of the ring over the piston crown.
5-58

INSPECTION
ENG
1. Inspect: Piston wall Cylinder wall Vertical scratches Replace the crankcase, and replace the piston and piston rings as a set.
2. Measure: Piston-to-cylinder clearance Measurement steps: 1st step: Measure cylinder bore C with the cylinder bore gauge 1.
NOTE:
Measure cylinder bore C by taking side-to-side and front-to-back measurements of the cylinder. Then, find the average of the measurements. 82.000 ~ 82.010 mm (3.2283 ~ 3.2287 in) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in)
Cylinder bore C Taper limit T Out of round R
C = maximum of D1 ~ D6 T = maximum of D1 or D2 maximum of D5 or D6 R = maximum of D1 D3 or D5 maximum of D2 D4 or D6 If out of specification, replace the crankcase, and the piston and piston rings as a set.
5-59
ENG
2nd step: Measure piston skirt diameter P with the micrometer.

a 11.0 mm (0.43 in) from the bottom edge of the piston.
Piston size (standard) (P): 81.950 ~ 81.965 mm (3.2264 ~ 3.2270 in) If out of specification, replace the piston and piston rings as a set. 3rd step: Calculate the piston-to-cylinder clearance with the following formula. Piston-to-cylinder clearance = Cylinder bore C Piston skirt diameter P Piston-to-cylinder clearance: 0.035 ~ 0.060 mm (0.0014 ~ 0.0024 in) <Limit>: 0.120 mm (0.0047 in) If out of specification, replace the crankcase, and the piston and piston rings as a set.
3. Measure: Piston ring side clearance Use the thickness gauge 1. Out of specification Replace the piston and piston rings as a set.
NOTE:
Eliminate the carbon deposits from the piston ring grooves and rings before measuring the side clearance. Piston rings side clearance: Top ring: 0.030 ~ 0.070 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in) 2nd ring: 0.020 ~ 0.060 mm (0.0008 ~ 0.0024 in)
5-60

4. Install: Piston ring (into the cylinder)
ENG
NOTE:
Level the piston ring in the cylinder with the piston crown.
a 5.0 mm (0.20 in)
5. Measure: Piston ring end gap Out of specification Replace the piston rings as a set.
NOTE:
The oil ring expander spacer end gap cannot be measured. If the oil ring rail gap is excessive, replace all three piston rings. Piston ring end gap: Top ring: 0.33 ~ 0.45 mm (0.013 ~ 0.018 in) 2nd ring: 0.70 ~ 0.85 mm (0.028 ~ 0.033 in) Oil ring: 0.20 ~ 0.60 mm (0.008 ~ 0.024 in) 6. Inspect: Piston pin Blue discoloration/grooves Replace the piston pin and then check the lubrication system.
7. Measure: Piston pin outside diameter Out of specification Replace the piston pin. Piston pin outside diameter: 18.991 ~ 19.000 mm (0.7477 ~ 0.7480 in)
5-61
ENG
8. Measure: Piston pin bore inside diameter Out of specification Replace the piston. Piston pin bore inside diameter: 19.004 ~ 19.015 mm (0.7482 ~ 0.7486 in)
9. Calculate: Piston pin to piston pin bore clearance Out of specification Replace the piston pin and piston as a set. Piston pin to piston pin bore clearance = Piston pin bore size Piston pin outside diameter Piston pin to piston pin bore clearance: 0.004 ~ 0.024 mm (0.0002 ~ 0.0009 in) <Limit>: 0.074 mm (0.0029 in)
10. Measure: Crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing clearance Out of specification Replace the big end bearings. Crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing clearance: 0.033 ~ 0.050 mm (0.0013 ~ 0.0020 in)
5-62

Measurement steps:
ENG
CAUTION:
Do not interchange the big end bearings and connecting rods. To obtain the correct crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing clearance and prevent engine damage, the big end bearings must be installed in their original positions. Clean the big end bearings, crankshaft pins, and bearing portions of the connecting rods. Install the big end upper bearing into the connecting rod and the big end lower bearing into the connecting rod cap.
NOTE:
Align the projections a on the big end bearings with the notches b in the connecting rod and connecting rod cap. Put a piece of Plastigauge 1 on the crankshaft pin. Assemble the connecting rod halves.
NOTE:
Do not move the connecting rod or crankshaft until the clearance measurement has been completed. Apply molybdenum disulfide grease onto the bolts, threads, and nut seats. Make sure that the Y mark c on the connecting rod faces towards the right side (AC magneto rotor side) of the crankshaft. Make sure that the characters d on both the connecting rod and connecting rod cap are aligned.
d
6E
5-63
ENG
Tighten the connecting rod nuts. Refer to INSTALLATION in CONNECTING RODS AND PISTONS on page 5-65. Remove the connecting rod and big end bearings. Measure the compressed Plastigauge width e on the crankshaft pin. If the clearance is out of specification, select replacement big end bearings.
11. Select: Big end bearings (P1 ~ P3)
NOTE:
The numbers stamped into the crankshaft web and the numbers 1 on the connecting rods are used to determine the replacement big end bearing sizes. P1 ~ P3 refer to the bearings shown in the crankshaft illustration. Selection of bearings: For example, if the connecting rod P1 and the crankshaft web P1 numbers are 6 and 2 respectively, then the bearing size for P1 is: Bearing size for P1: P1 (connecting rod) P1 (crankshaft web) 1 = 6 2 1 = 3 (brown) BIG END BEARING COLOR CODE 0 1 2 3 4 5 white blue black brown green yellow
P2 P3 P1
P1 P2 P3
22
21
32
5-64

INSTALLATION
1. Install: Top ring 1 2nd ring 2 Upper oil ring rail 3 Oil ring expander 4 Lower oil ring rail 5
ENG
NOTE:
Be sure to install the piston rings so that the manufacturer marks a face up. 2. Install: Piston 1 (onto the respective connecting rod 2) Piston pin 3 Piston pin clips 4 New
a 2 3 4 b 1
NOTE:
Apply engine oil onto the piston pin. Make sure that the Y mark a on the connecting rod faces left when the punch mark b on the piston is pointing up. Refer to the illustration. Install the piston pin clips, so that the clip ends are 3 mm (0.12 in) c or more from the cutout in the piston. Reinstall each piston into its original cylinder (numbering order starting from the left: #1 to #3).
be
90
3. Offset: Piston ring end gaps

a b c d e Top ring 2nd ring Upper oil ring rail Oil ring expander Lower oil ring rail Exhaust side
90
45
ad
5-65
ENG
4. Lubricate: Piston Piston rings Cylinder (with the recommended lubricant) Recommended lubricant: Engine oil 5. Lubricate: Bolt threads Nut seats (with the recommended lubricant) Recommended lubricant: Molybdenum disulfide grease 6. Lubricate: Crankshaft pins Big end bearings Connecting rod inner surface (with the recommended lubricant) Recommended lubricant: Engine oil
7. Install: Big end bearings Connecting rod assembly 1 (into the cylinder and onto the crankshaft pin). Connecting rod cap (onto the connecting rod)
NOTE:
Align the projections on the big end bearings with the notches in the connecting rods and connecting rod caps. Be sure to reinstall each big end bearing in its original place. While compressing the piston rings with piston ring compressor 2, install the connecting rod assembly into the cylinder with the other hand. Make sure that the Y marks a on the connecting rods face towards the right side (AC magneto rotor side) of the crankshaft. Make sure that the characters b on both the connecting rod and connecting rod cap are aligned. Piston ring compressor: 90890-05158, YM-08037
5-66
ENG
8. Align: Bolt heads (with the connecting rod caps) 9. Tighten: Connecting rod nuts
WARNING
Replace the connecting rod bolts and nuts with new ones.
CAUTION:
Tighten the connecting rod bolts using the plastic-region tightening angle method. Always install new bolts and nuts. Clean the connecting rod bolts and nuts. Tighten the connecting rod nuts. Connecting rod nut: 1st: 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb)
Put a mark a on the corner of the connecting rod nut 1 and the connecting rod 2. Tighten the connecting rod nut further to reach the specified angle (115 ~ 125). Connecting rod nut: Final: Specified angle 115 ~ 125
WARNING
When the nut is tightened more than the specified angle, do not loosen the nut and then retighten it. Replace the bolt and nut with a new one and perform the procedure again.
CAUTION:
Do not use a torque wrench to tighten the nut to the specified angle. Tighten the nut until it is at the specified angles.
NOTE:
When using a hexagonal nut, note that the angle from one corner to another is 60.
T.
R.
T.
R.
5-67
CRANKSHAFT AND BALANCER SHAFT CRANKSHAFT AND BALANCER SHAFT
ENG
2 2
E
3
LS E
2 13 2 2 2
E
16 New 17 15 10 11 6 8 5 New 9 14
E E
5 New
12
LT
Order
Job name/Part name Crankshaft and balancer shaft removal Crankcase Connecting rod caps
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Separate. Refer to CRANKCASE. Refer to CONNECTING RODS AND PISTONS.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Crankshaft Crankshaft journal bearing Primary sheave drive shaft assembly Bearing Lock washer Washer Right balancer weight Left balancer weight Water pump drive gear Spacer Bearing
1 8 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
5-68
CRANKSHAFT AND BALANCER SHAFT
ENG
2 2
E
3
LS E
2 13 2 2 2
E
16 New 17 15 10 11 6 8 5 New 9 14
E E
5 New
12
LT
Order 12 13 14 15 16 17
Job name/Part name Balancer shaft Balancer driven gear Bearing retainer Bearing Circlip Bearing
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks
5-69

REMOVE
ENG
1. Remove: Crankshaft journal lower bearings (from the lower crankcase) Crankshaft journal upper bearings (from the upper crankcase)
NOTE:
Identify the position of each crankshaft journal upper bearing so that it can be reinstalled in its original place.
2. Straighten the lock washer tab. 3. Loosen: Balance weight bolts 1
NOTE:
1 2
Place a piece of wood a between the balancer weight 2 and crankcase. 4. Remove: Right balancer weight Left balancer weight
1 2 a
5-70

INSPECTION
ENG
1. Measure: Crankshaft runout Use the V-blocks and a dial gauge. Out of specification Replace the crankshaft. Dial gauge: 90890-03097 Dial indicator gauge: YU-A8428 Crankshaft runout: 0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
2. Inspect: Crankshaft journal surfaces Crankshaft pin surfaces Bearing surfaces Scratches/wear Replace the crankshaft. 3. Inspect: Bearings Clean and lubricate the bearings, then rotate the inner race with your finger. Rough movement Replace. 4. Inspect: Balancer drive gear Balancer driven gear Damage/wear Replace the crankshaft assembly and balancer driven gear as a set. Excessive noise during operation Replace the crankshaft assembly and balancer driven gear as a set. 5. Inspect: Primary sheave drive shaft assembly Damage Replace. 6. Measure: Crankshaft-journal-to-crankshaft-journalbearing clearance Out of specification Replace the crankshaft journal bearings. Crankshaft-journal-to-crankshaftjournal-bearing clearance: 0.027 ~ 0.045 mm (0.0011 ~ 0.0018 in)
5-71

Measurement steps:
ENG
CAUTION:
Do not interchange the crankshaft journal bearings. To obtain the correct crankshaft-journalto-crankshaft-journal-bearing clearance and prevent engine damage, the crankshaft journal bearings must be installed in their original positions. Clean the crankshaft journal bearings, crankshaft journals, and bearing portions of the crankcase. Place the upper crankcase upside down on a bench.
Install the crankshaft journal upper bearings 1 and the crankshaft into the upper crankcase.
NOTE:
Align the projections a of the crankshaft journal upper bearings with the notches b in the crankcase.
Put a piece of Plastigauge b on each crankshaft journal.
NOTE:
Do not put the Plastigauge over the oil hole in the crankshaft journal.
Install the crankshaft journal lower bearings 2 into the lower crankcase and assemble the crankcase halves.
NOTE:
Align the projections c of the crankshaft journal lower bearings with the notches d in the crankcase. Do not move the crankshaft until the clearance measurement has been completed.
5-72

e
ENG
Tighten the bolts in the order of the embossed numbers on the crankcase. Refer to INSTALLATION in CRANKCASE on page 5-54. Remove the lower crankcase and the crankshaft journal lower bearings. Measure the compressed Plastigauge width e on each crankshaft journal. If the clearance is out of specification, select replacement crankshaft journal bearings. 7. Select: Crankshaft journal bearings (J1 ~ J4)
NOTE:
The numbers stamped into the crankshaft web and the numbers stamped into the lower crankcase are used to determine the replacement crankshaft journal bearing sizes. J1 ~ J4 refer to the bearings shown in the crankshaft web and lower crankcase illustration. If J1 ~ J4 are the same, use the same size for all of the bearings. Selection of bearings: For example, if the crankcase J1 and crankshaft web J1 numbers are 6 and 1 respectively, then the bearing size for J1 is: Bearing size for J1: J1 (crankcase) J1 (crankshaft web) + 2 =61+2=7 CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL BEARING COLOR CODE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 black brown green yellow pink red white
J1
J2
J3
J4
22
J1 J2 J3 J4
21
32
J4 J3 J2 J1
5-73

INSTALLATION
ENG
1 a c b 2
1. Install: Balancer driven gear 1 Balancer shaft 2
NOTE:
Face the punch mark a on the balancer driven gear inward. Align the projection b on the balancer shaft with the slot c in the balancer driven gear. 2. Install: Water pump drive gear 1
a 1
NOTE:
Align the punch mark a on the water pump gear with the shorter spline b on the balancer shaft end.
a b
3. Install: Right balancer weight 1 Left balancer weight 2 Washers Lock washers New Balancer weight bolts
NOTE:
Align the punch mark a on the balancer weight with the shorter spline b on the balancer shaft end.
a 2 b
5-74

2
4. Tighten: Balancer weight bolts 1
ENG
NOTE:
1 a
Place a wood a between the balancer weight 2 and crankcase. Balancer weight bolt: 35 Nm (3.5 m kg, 25 ft lb)
5. Bend the lock washer tab.
T.
R.
1 a 2
6. Install: Crankshaft journal upper bearings (into the upper crankcase) Crankshaft journal lower bearings (into the lower crankcase)
NOTE:
Align the projections a on the crankshaft journal bearings with the notches b in the crankcase. Be sure to install each crankshaft journal bearing in its original place.
7. Install: Bearing 1 (to the primary sheave drive shaft assembly 2)
NOTE:
2 1
5-75
Be sure to install the bearing so that its hole a is near the bearing edge that is facing away from the primary sheave drive shaft assembly.
ENG
8. Install: Primary sheave drive shaft assembly 1 (to the crankshaft 2)
NOTE:
Align the shallow groove a in the primary drive shaft assembly with the low spline b of the crankshaft.
b
9. Install: Crankshaft 1 (with primary sheave drive shaft assembly)
2 1 a b
NOTE:
Align the punch mark a of the balancer drive gear 2 on the crankshaft with the punch mark b of the balancer driven gear 3. Align the hole c in the bearing 4 with the projection d on the upper crankcase.
c d
5-76
RADIATOR
COOL
COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR
: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) (4) 2 14 1 12 10
6 (4) (4) (4) 11 4 3
15
13
(4)
7 5
15
Order
Job name/Part name Radiator removal Coolant
Qty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Steering column Radiator cap Coolant reservoir hose Coolant reservoir breather hose Coolant reservoir cap Coolant reservoir Radiator cover Plastic band Radiator inlet hose Radiator outlet hose Radiator fan motor coupler
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Drain. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM in CHAPTER 2. Refer to STEERING in CHAPTER 3.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Disconnect. Disconnect.
6-1
RADIATOR
: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb) (4) 2 14 1
COOL
12 10
6 (4) (4) (4) 11 4 3
15
13
(4)
7 5
15
Order 11 12 13 14 15
Job name/Part name Radiator Radiator fan motor DC back buzzer coupler DC back buzzer Radiator stay
Qty 1 1 1 1 2
Remarks
Disconnect. Reverse model only Reverse model only For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
6-2
RADIATOR
INSPECTION
COOL
1. Inspect: Radiator inlet hose Radiator outlet hose Coolant reservoir hose Cracks/damage Replace.
2. Check: Radiator fins Obstruction Clean. Apply compressed air to the rear of the radiator. Damage Repair or replace.
NOTE:
_
Straighten any flattened fins with a thin, flat-head screwdriver. 3. Measure: Radiator cap opening pressure Cap opens with a pressure below the specified pressure Replace. Radiator cap opening pressure: 107.9 ~ 137.3 kPa (1.08 ~ 1.37 kg/cm2, 15.3 ~ 19.5 psi) 4. Check: Radiator fan Damage Replace. Malfunction Check and repair. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM in CHAPTER 8. Measurement steps: Attach the radiator cap tester 1 and radiator cap tester adapter 2 to the radiator cap 3. Radiator cap tester: 90890-01325 Radiator pressure tester: YU-24460-01 Radiator cap tester adapter: 90890-01352 Radiator pressure tester adapter: YU-33984 Apply the specified pressure for 10 seconds and make sure there is no pressure drop.
6-3
RADIATOR
INSTALLATION
COOL
1. Install: Radiator stay 1 DC back buzzer 2 (For reverse model) Radiator stay bolt: 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
T.
R.
2 a
NOTE:
Hook the hooked portion a of the brake hose holder onto the radiator stay, and then fasten the holder with the bolt. Be sure to install the DC back buzzer so that a line drawn through the center of the buzzer is parallel to the rear frame cross member as shown in the illustration. (For reverse model)
6-4
THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT
COOL
7 8 5
1 2 3
9 New
Order
Job name/Part name Thermostat removal Coolant
Qty
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Air filter case Radiator inlet hose Throttle body heater inlet hose Thermostat inlet hose Thermostat outlet hose Coolant temperature sensor sub-lead Coolant temperature sensor Thermostat housing cover Thermostat Thermostat housing
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Drain. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM in CHAPTER 2. Refer to AIR FILTER CASE in CHAPTER 7. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect.
6-5
THERMOSTAT
INSPECTION
COOL
1. Inspect: Thermostat Does not open at 69.0 ~ 73.0 C (156.2 ~ 163.4 F) Replace. Inspection steps: Suspend the thermostat 1 in a container 2 filled with water. Slowly heat the water 3. Place a thermometer 4 in the water. While stirring the water, observe the thermostat and thermometers indicated temperature.
Fully closed Fully open More than 8 mm (0.31 in)
NOTE:
If the accuracy of the thermostat is in doubt, replace it. A faulty thermostat could cause serious overheating or overcooling. 2. Inspect: Thermostat housing cover Thermostat housing Thermostat inlet hose Thermostat outlet hose Throttle body heater inlet hose Cracks/damage Replace.
INSTALLATION
1. Install: Thermostat (into the thermostat housing)
NOTE:
Install the thermostat with its breather hole a as shown in the illustration. 2. Install: Coolant temperature sensor (to the thermostat housing) Coolant temperature sensor: 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
CAUTION:
Use extreme care when handling the coolant temperature sensor. Replace any part that was dropped or subjected to a strong impact.
T.
R.
6-6
WATER PUMP WATER PUMP

: 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb)
COOL
New
LS
8 5 New 7 3 (3) 4 New

LS
E
2 New
(4) 6
New
Order
Job name/Part name Water pump removal Engine assembly Timing mark accessing screw Crankshaft end cover Water pump assembly Gasket Dowel pin Plug/O-ring Circlip Bearing
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to ENGINE ASSEMBLY in CHAPTER 5.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 1 2 2 1/1 1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
6-7
WATER PUMP
COOL
New 3
9 New 7 New 5 6 2 New
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Job name/Part name Water pump disassembly Water pump housing cover Gasket Circlip Impeller shaft gear Pin Impeller shaft assembly Water pump seal Bearing Oil seal Water pump housing
Qty 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
6-8
WATER PUMP
REMOVAL
COOL
1. Remove: Timing mark accessing screw Crankshaft end cover 2. Align: I mark a on the AC magneto rotor (with the stationary pointer b on the AC magneto cover)
NOTE:
Turn the crankshaft clockwise. 3. Remove: Water pump assembly
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove: Impeller Water pump seal 1
NOTE:
Remove the water pump seal from the inside of the water pump housing 2.
2. Remove: Bearing 1 Oil seal 2
NOTE:
Remove the bearing and oil seal from the inside of the water pump housing 3.
1 2
3. Remove: Rubber damper holder 1 Rubber damper 2 (from the impeller with a thin flat-head screwdriver)
NOTE:
Do not scratch the impeller shaft.
6-9
WATER PUMP
INSPECTION
COOL
1. Inspect: Water pump housing cover Water pump housing Impeller shaft Cracks/damage/wear Replace. 2. Inspect: Bearing Rough movement Replace.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install: Oil seal 1 New (to the water pump housing)
NOTE:
Before installing the oil seal, apply tap water or coolant onto its outer surface. Install the oil seal with a socket that matches its outside diameter. 2. Install: Bearing
NOTE:
Install the bearing with a socket that matches its outside diameter. 3. Install: Water pump seal 1 New
CAUTION:
Never apply oil or grease onto the water pump seal surface.
NOTE:
Install the water pump seal 1 with the mechanical seal installer 4 and middle driven shaft bearing driver 5. Before installing the water pump seal, apply Yamaha bond No.1215 (Three Bond No.1215) 2 to the water pump housing 3. Mechanical seal installer: 90890-04145 Middle driven shaft bearing driver: 90890-04058 Bearing driver 40 mm: YM-04058 Yamaha bond No. 1215: 90890-85505 (Three Bond No.1215)
Push down
6-10
WATER PUMP
COOL
4. Install: Rubber damper holder 1 Rubber damper 2
NOTE:
1 2
Before installing the rubber damper, apply tap water or coolant onto its outer surface. 5. Measure: Impeller shaft tilt Out of specification Repeat steps (4) and (5).
CAUTION:
1
Make sure the rubber damper and rubber damper holder are flush with the impeller.
Max. impeller shaft tilt: 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)

1 Straightedge 2 Impeller
INSTALLATION
1. Align: I mark a on the AC magneto rotor (with the stationary pointer b on the AC magneto cover)
NOTE:
Turn the crankshaft clockwise. 2. Install: Water pump assembly Water pump assembly bolt: 12 Nm (1.2 m kg, 8.7 ft lb)
T.
R.
6-11
OIL COOLER AND HEAT EXCHANGER OIL COOLER AND HEAT EXCHANGER
: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
COOL
New 8 7 2 1 3 (4)
LT
11 12
13
New
New 5 6 4 9 10
LS
14
Order
Job name/Part name Oil cooler and heat exchanger removal Coolant
Qty
Engine assembly 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Water pump outlet hose Oil cooler outlet hose Oil cooler Water pump breather hose Thermostat inlet hose Cylinder head water jacket Thermostat outlet hose Radiator outlet hose Water pump inlet hose Heat exchanger 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Drain. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM in CHAPTER 2. Refer to ENGINE ASSEMBLY in CHAPTER 5.
6-12
OIL COOLER AND HEAT EXCHANGER

: 10 Nm (1.0 m kg, 7.2 ft lb)
COOL
New 8 7 2 1 3 (4)
LT
11 12
13
New
New 5 6 4 9 10
LS
14
Order 11 12 13 14
Job name/Part name Heat exchanger hose 1 Heat exchanger pipe Heat exchanger hose 2 Heat exchanger
Qty 1 1 1 1
Remarks
6-13
OIL COOLER AND HEAT EXCHANGER

INSPECTION
COOL
1. Inspect: Heat exchanger(s) Oil cooler Cylinder head water jacket Oil cooler hose Water pump hoses Heat exchanger hoses Heat exchanger pipe Cracks/damage Replace.
6-14
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
FI

1 2 3 4 5 Battery Injector #3 Cylinder-#3 ignition coil Spark plug ISC (idle speed control) unit 6 Cylinder-#2 ignition coil 7 Fuel pump 8 Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) 9 Cylinder-#1 ignition coil 0 Speed sensor A Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) B Throttle position sensor C Injector #1 D Crankshaft position sensor E Oil pressure switch F Intake air temperature sensor G ECU (engine control unit) H Fuel injection system relay I Injector #2 J Coolant temperature sensor K Warning light L Grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch
34 2
5 64
8 94
1 A
B C D E J F
H L K
7-1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
A B C R/L R/B G/B L/B L B/L Y P/W G L/R Y/G Y/G B (BLACK) R/W WIRE HARNESS O O (BLACK) R/W OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SUB-LEAD WIRE HARNESS TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT SUB-LEAD WIRE HARNESS SPEEDOMETER UNIT SUB-LEAD WIRE HARNESS REVERSE SWITCH SUB-WIRE HARNESS WIRE HARNESS COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SUB-LEAD (BLACK) G/W B/L B/L G/W G/B R/B Ch Ch R/B G/B L/R B B L/R P/B W/G R/Y R/G Br/L P/L (GRAY) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM SUB-WIRE HARNESS L/R G B R/W Y L/Y L/Y Y R/W E F G
L/B G/B R/B R/L
P/W Y B/L L
R/G R/Y W/G P
P/L Br/L
(GRAY)
Gy
WIRE HARNESS
3
R/W Gy/R Gy/R R/W (BLACK)
I J K J L J
O/G R/W (BLACK)
R /W R /G
Gy B/L
B Gy
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
B/L
R/G
Y/R P/L W/G R/G Br/L R/W O/G Lg R/Y L/W

G/Y L/R
L/B O B B G/B
R/B Gy/R O/G
L Br/W P G/W Gy P/W Y/L W Y/W Y/G B/Y Y Lg L/Y B/L R/L Ch
L/W R/W
M
R/W R /L L/R
R/L L /R
W W W R/Y Br/L R L/W B Br R/Y Br Br/W R/W
(GRAY)
OFF ON START
1
Br L/W R/B A R/B G /B A G /B L/B A L/B B Gy R/Y R/W O Gy/R O/G R/B G/B L/B B B
W W W
R/L R/B
O
R/B R /L
(GRAY)
R /L A R /L
R/L
(BLACK)
R/L G/B
N
R /L B (GRAY) G/B R/L
B
R R
5
R/G R/W
R R
R/G L/W R/W
B/Y Br/L G/Y
P Q
L/B R /L
R Br
R
0 A
L/W (BLACK) L/W L/W
Y/G B Y/G Lg R/W Br B/Y B/Y Y/G B
R/W
R /L L /B (GRAY)
R/W
Y/R Lg L/Y Y/G
L/R R/L L Y W
R R
9 7 8
W B
Br
Br/L
W Br/L
R
L A L Y A Y B /L A B /L L Y B/L
B Lg
W
B/Y B B B/L Y/G
RUN STOP CLOSE OPEN
B F
Lg Br Br/W (BLACK)
Lg Ch Ch Y/R Y/R
C
(BLACK) Ch
P/W P G/W Br/W B/L R/G P/L W/G Br/L Y/W Y/L
Y B/L (BLACK)
L W B/L
Y/R
L/R G
Lg
Y Lg L/Y L/Y E G/B E G/B L/Y
G B
e f d
G/B R/B R/B R/B E R/B G/B
L/R P
7-2
B B R/W Br (BLACK)
B B
r q p o n G
Y/R B
S
P O /R B/W L W B /L
O/B
L/W
L/R
Br/B
R/Y
(BLACK)
Lg
O/B
R/W Br/B
m E
B B
l
B
Br/B
R/G A R/G P /L A P/L W /G A W /G Br/L A Br/L
R/G P/L W /G Br/L
T
R/Y R/Y
W/G R/Y R/G Br/L R/Y P/L (BLACK)
O/B B
G W/B
L G/Y
R/W
G/Y
E
R/Y A R/Y P/W A P/W
L P /W B/L L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
U
L/R F L/R P A P/B
P/W B/L L (BLACK)
L/R
R/W G/B L/Y R/B Ch (BLACK) R/W Y

L/R
P /B B/L L G/W G G/W
V
G/W
P/B B/L L (BLACK)
L/W
j c
G L/R
HI LO
L/W
]
OFF ON
L/W
R/W E R/W
[
P Br
Lg L/W
Lg G B
W
B/L
P L/R C L/R L/R G C G G
G/W B/L (DARK GREEN)

B /L G B /L
(BLACK)
Br/W
P
X
Br/W B/L
FI
_ a
G B
g
Y
L Y B
G L/R B
(BLACK)
\
B
B/L
Y E Y
b
Ch Ch E Ch
Y Ch R/B (GRAY)
Ch Ch
(GREEN)
B B
Z
Ch G/B (GREEN)
B C B B F B
Y/W Ch Y/L
Y/L Y/W
Ch
Y /W Y /L B/L

3 4 5 6 7 0 B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z _ d e h i k l n o p q Crankshaft position sensor Main switch Main fuse Load control relay Battery Fuel injection system fuse Engine stop switch Throttle switch Thumb warmer Grip warmer Oil pressure switch CO adjustment coupler ECU (engine control unit) Cylinder-#1 ignition coil Spark plug Cylinder-#2 ignition coil Cylinder-#3 ignition coil Fuel injection system relay Fuel pump Injector #1 Injector #2 Injector #3 Throttle position sensor Speed sensor ISC (idle speed control) unit Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) Coolant temperature sensor Intake air temperature sensor Grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch Frame ground Tail/brake light Multi-function meter Warning light Headlight Headlight relay Radiator fan motor Radiator fan motor relay Ignition fuse Radiator fan motor fuse Signal fuse Headlight fuse
FI
7-3

ECU SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
FI
The ECU is equipped with a self-diagnostic function in order to ensure that the fuel injection system is operating normally. If this function detects a malfunction in the system, it immediately operates the engine under substitute characteristics and the warning light and self-diagnostic warning indicator on the LCD flash to alert the rider that a malfunction has occurred in the system. Once a malfunction has been detected, a fault code is stored in the memory of the ECU. If a malfunction is detected in the system by the self-diagnostic function, the ECU provides an appropriate substitute characteristic operation, and the warning light and self-diagnostic warning indicator on the LCD flash to alert the rider of the detected malfunction. The lowest fault code number appears on the odometer/tripmeter/engine speed meter LCD. Once a fault code has been displayed, it remains stored in the memory of the ECU until it is deleted.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION TABLE

If the ECU detects an abnormal signal from a sensor while the snowmobile is being driven, the warning light and self-diagnostic warning indicator on the LCD flash to alert the rider that a malfunction has occurred and the ECU provides the engine with alternate operating instructions that are appropriate for the type of malfunction. When an abnormal signal is received from a sensor, the ECU processes the specified values that are programmed for each sensor in order to provide the engine with alternate operating instructions that enable the engine to continue to operate or stop operating, depending on the conditions. Self-Diagnostic-Function table
Fault code No. 12 13 14 15 16 21 22 25 26 30 Item Crankshaft position sensor Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) (open or short circuit) Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) (hose line) Throttle position sensor (open or short circuit) Throttle position sensor (stuck) Coolant temperature sensor Intake air temperature sensor Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) (open or short circuit) Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) (hose line) Oil pressure dropped Cylinder-#1 ignition coil (faulty ignition) 33 Symptom No normal signals are received from the crankshaft position sensor. Intake air pressure sensor: open or short circuit detected. Intake air pressure sensor: hose system malfunction (clogged or detached hose). Throttle position sensor: open or short circuit detected. Stuck throttle position sensor detected. Coolant temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected. Intake air temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected. Intake air pressure sensor: open or short circuit detected. Intake air pressure sensor: hose system malfunction (clogged or detached hose). Engine stops when an oil pressure drop is detected. Malfunction detected in the primary lead of the cylinder-#1 ignition coil. Able/unable to start Unable Able Able Able Able Able Able Able Able Unable Able (depending on the number of faulty cylinders) Able (depending on the number of faulty cylinders) Able (depending on the number of faulty cylinders) Able/unable to drive Unable Able Able Able Able Able Able Able Able Unable Able (depending on the number of faulty cylinders) Able (depending on the number of faulty cylinders) Able (depending on the number of faulty cylinders)
Cylinder-#2 ignition coil (faulty ignition) 34
Malfunction detected in the primary lead of the cylinder-#2 ignition coil.
Cylinder-#3 ignition coil (faulty ignition) 35
7-4

Fault code No. Item Symptom
FI
Able/unable to start Able (unable if valve stuck fully closed) Able Able or unable depending on the conditions Able Able Able/unable to drive
37
ISC (idle speed control) valve (stuck fully open) Speed sensor Fuel system voltage (monitor voltage)
Engine speed is high when the engine is idling. No normal signals are received from the speed sensor. Power supply to the fuel injectors and fuel pump is not normal.
Able
42
Able Able or unable depending on the conditions Able Able
43
44 46
Error in writing the amount of CO adjustment on EEPROM Snowmobile system power supply (monitor voltage) ECU internal malfunction (memory check error) Grip warmer Thumb warmer T.O.R.S. Oil pressure switch
Error is detected while reading or writing on EEPROM (CO adjustment value). Power supply to the ECU is not normal. Faulty ECU memory. (When this malfunction is detected in the ECU, the fault code number might not appear on the meter.) Grip warmer: open or short circuit detected. Thumb warmer: short circuit detected. Conditions requiring T.O.R.S. operation are detected. Oil pressure switch: open circuit detected.
50 81 83 84 85
Unable Able Able Able Able
Unable Able Able Unable Able
Communication error with the meter

Fault code No. Er-1 Er-2 Er-3 Er-4 Item ECU internal malfunction (output signal error) ECU internal malfunction (output signal error) ECU internal malfunction (output signal error) ECU internal malfunction (input signal error) Symptom No signals are received from the ECU. No signals are received from the ECU within the specified signal time. Data from the ECU cannot be received correctly. Non-registered data has been received from the meter. Able/unable to start Unable Unable Unable Unable Able/unable to drive Unable Unable Unable Unable
7-5

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
FI
Engine operation is not normal or the warning light and self-diagnostic warning indicator on the LCD flash. * The warning light and self-diagnostic warning indicator on the LCD may not flash even if the engine operation is not normal.
The warning light and self-diagnostic warning indicator on the LCD flash.
The warning light and self-diagnostic warning indicator on the LCD does not flash.
Check the fault code number displayed on the meter.
Identify the system with the malfunction. (Refer to Self-Diagnostic-Function table.)
Identify the probable cause of the malfunction. (Refer to Fault code table.)
Check the operation of the following sensors and actuators in the diagnostic mode. (Refer to Diagnostic mode table.) 01: Throttle position sen30: Cylinder-#1 ignition sor (throttle angle) coil 03, 04:Intake air pres31: Cylinder-#2 ignition sure coil 05: Intake air tempera32: Cylinder-#3 ignition ture coil 06: Coolant temperature 36: Injector #1 07: Snowmobile speed 37: Injector #2 pulse 38: Injector #3 09: Fuel system voltage (battery voltage) OK NG
Check and repair the probable cause of the malfunction. Fault code No. Check and repair. (Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS.) Monitor the operation of the sensors and actuators in the diagnostic mode. (Refer to Diagnostic mode table.) No fault code No. Check and repair. Engine malfunction Defective sensor or actuator
Check and repair the inner parts of the engine. (Refer to CHAPTER 5.) OK
Check and repair the corresponding sensor or actuator. NG OK
Perform the fuel injection system reinstatement action. (Refer to Reinstatement method in TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS.)
Check the engine condition.
Turn the main switch off, turn the main switch back on, and then check if the fault code number is still displayed.
Fault code number displayed
OK
Fault code number not displayed Repairs completed
Erasing the malfunction history:* The malfunction history is stored even if the main switch is turned off. The malfunction history must be erased in the diagnostic mode. (Refer to the Diagnostic mode table (Diagnostic code No. 62).) * Operated when the warning light and self-diagnosis warning indicator flash.
7-6

DIAGNOSTIC MODE
FI
It is possible to monitor the sensor output data or check the activation of actuators without connecting the measurement equipment by simply switching the meter indication from the normal mode to the diagnostic monitoring mode.
SELECT RESET
Setting the diagnostic mode 1. Turn the main switch off and set the engine stop switch to RUN. 2. Disconnect the wire harness coupler from the fuel pump. 3. Simultaneously press and hold the SELECT and RESET buttons, turn the main switch on, and continue to press the buttons for 8 seconds or more.
NOTE:
All displays on the meter disappear except the odometer/tripmeter/engine speed meter displays. dIAG appears on the odometer/tripmeter/engine speed meter LCD.
01 70
70 01
4. Check that dIAG appears, and then simultaneously press the SELECT and RESET buttons for 2 seconds or more to activate the diagnostic mode. The diagnostic code number 01 appears on the speedometer LCD. 5. Select the diagnostic code number corresponding to the fault code number by pressing the SELECT and RESET buttons.
NOTE:
To decrease the selected diagnostic code number, press the RESET button. Press the RESET button for 1 second or longer to automatically decrease the diagnostic code numbers. To increase the selected diagnostic code number, press the SELECT button. Press the SELECT button for 1 second or longer to automatically increase the diagnostic code numbers.
7-7
FI
6. Verify the operation of the sensor or actuator. Sensor operation The data representing the operating conditions of the sensor appears on the odometer/ tripmeter/engine speed meter LCD. Actuator operation Push the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch to operate the actuator. If the grip warmer side of the switch is pushed again while the actuator is operating, the actuator operation will stop and restart from the beginning. 7. Turn the main switch off to cancel the diagnostic mode.
NOTE:
To perform a reliable diagnosis, make sure to turn off the power supply before every check and then start right from the beginning.
7-8

Fault code table
Fault code No. Symptom No normal signals are received from the crankshaft position sensor. Probable cause of malfunction Open or short circuit in wire harness. Defective crankshaft position sensor. Malfunction in pickup rotor (primary sheave drive shaft assembly). Malfunction in ECU. Improperly installed crankshaft position sensor. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Open or short circuit in fuel injection system sub-wire harness. Defective intake air pressure sensor 1. Malfunction in ECU.
FI
Diagnostic code No.
12
13
Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3): open or short circuit detected. Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3): hose system malfunction (clogged or detached hose). Throttle position sensor: open or short circuit detected.
03
14
Intake air pressure sensor 1 hoses are detached, clogged, kinked, or pinched. Malfunction in ECU. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Open or short circuit in fuel injection system sub-wire harness. Defective throttle position sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Improperly installed throttle position sensor.
03
15
01
16
Stuck throttle position sensor detected. Coolant temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected.
Stuck throttle position sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Open or short circuit in coolant temperature sensor sub-lead. Defective coolant temperature sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Open or short circuit in fuel injection system sub-wire harness. Defective intake air temperature sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Open or short circuit in fuel injection system sub-wire harness. Defective intake air pressure sensor 2. Malfunction in ECU.
01
21
06
22
Intake air temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected. Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1): open or short circuit detected. Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1): hose system malfunction (clogged or detached hose). Engine stops when an oil pressure drop is detected. Malfunction detected in the primary lead of the cylinder#1 ignition coil. Malfunction detected in the primary lead of the cylinder#2 ignition coil. Malfunction detected in the primary lead of the cylinder#3 ignition coil.
05
25
04
26
Intake air pressure sensor 2 hose is detached, clogged, kinked, or pinched. Malfunction in ECU. Oil pressure dropped. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Malfunction in cylinder-#1 ignition coil. Malfunction in ECU. Malfunction in a component of ignition system. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Malfunction in cylinder-#2 ignition coil. Malfunction in ECU. Malfunction in a component of ignition system. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Malfunction in cylinder-#3 ignition coil. Malfunction in ECU. Malfunction in a component of ignition system.
04
30
33
30
34
31
35
32
7-9

Fault code No. Symptom Probable cause of malfunction Open or short circuit in wire harness. Open or short circuit in fuel injection system sub-wire harness. Malfunction in throttle body. Malfunction in throttle cable. ISC valve is stuck fully open due to disconnected ISC unit hose or coupler. (High engine idle speed is detected with the ISC valve stuck fully open even though signals for the valve to close are continuously being transmitted by the ECU.) Malfunction in ECU. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Defective speed sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Malfunction in ECU. Malfunction in ECU. (The CO adjustment value is not properly written on or read from the internal memory.) Malfunctioninthechargingsystem.(RefertoCHARGINGSYSTEMin CHAPTER 8.)
FI
Diagnostic code No.
37
Engine speed is high when the engine is idling.
54
42
No normal signals are received from the speed sensor. Power supply to the fuel injectors and fuel pump is not normal. Error is detected while reading or writing on EEPROM (CO adjustment value). Power supply to the fuel injection system is not normal. Faulty ECU memory. (When this malfunction is detected in the ECU, the fault code number might not appear on the meter.) Grip warmer: open or short circuit detected. Thumb warmer: short circuit detected. Conditions requiring T.O.R.S. operation are detected.
07
43
09
44
60
46
50
Malfunction in ECU. (The program and data are not properly written on or read from the internal memory.)
81
Open or short circuit in wire harness. Defective grip warmer. Malfunction in ECU. Short circuit in wire harness. Defective thumb warmer. Malfunction in ECU. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Open or short circuit in fuel injection system sub-wire harness. Defective throttle position sensor. Defective throttle switch. Defective speed sensor. Malfunction in ECU. Improperly installed throttle position sensor. Open circuit in wire harness. Open circuit in oil pressure switch sub-lead. Defective oil pressure switch. Malfunction in ECU. Open or short circuit in wire harness. Malfunction in speedometer unit. Malfunction in ECU. Defective wire connection of the ECU coupler.
26
83
27
84
01 07 24
85
Oil pressure switch: open circuit detected.
Er-1
No signals are received from the ECU.
Er-2
No signals are received from the ECU within the specified signal time. Data from the ECU cannot be received correctly. Non-registered data has been received from the meter.
Improper connection in wire harness. Malfunction in speedometer unit. Malfunction in ECU. Improper connection in wire harness. Malfunction in speedometer unit. Malfunction in ECU. Improper connection in wire harness. Malfunction in speedometer unit. Malfunction in ECU.
Er-3
Er-4
7-10
FI
Diagnostic mode table Switch the meter display from the regular mode to the diagnostic mode. To switch the display, refer to DIAGNOSTIC MODE.
NOTE:
Check the intake air temperature and coolant temperature as close as possible to the intake air temperature sensor and the coolant temperature sensor respectively. If it is not possible to check the intake air temperature, use the ambient temperature as reference.
Diagnostic code No. 01 Intake air pressure sensor 1 (atmospheric pressure and intake air pressure) Item Throttle angle Description of action Displays the throttle angle. Check with throttle fully closed. Check with throttle fully open. Displays the intake air pressure for cylinders #1, #2, and #3. Data displayed on meter (reference value) 0 ~ 125 degrees Fully closed position (15 ~ 18) Fully open position (94 ~ 100) Not cranking: atmospheric pressure Cranking: intake air pressure decreases to less than the atmospheric pressure. Not cranking: atmospheric pressure Cranking: intake air pressure decreases to less than the atmospheric pressure. Compare it to the value displayed on the meter. (Minimum displayed value: 30 [C]) Compare it to the value displayed on the meter. (Minimum displayed value: 30 [C]) (0 ~ 999; resets to 0 after 999) OK if the numbers appear on the meter. 0 ~ 18.7 V Normally, approximately 12.0 V Throttle open: on Throttle closed: off
03
04
Intake air pressure sensor 2 (atmospheric pressure and intake air pressure)
Displays the intake air pressure for cylinder #1.
Intake air temperature 05 Coolant temperature 06 Snowmobile speed pulse 07 Fuel system voltage (battery voltage) Throttle switch Grip warmer operation 26
Displays the intake air temperature. Check the temperature in the air filter case. Displays the coolant temperature. Check the temperature of the coolant. Displays the cumulative number of snowmobile pulses that are generated when the track is spun. Displays the fuel system voltage (battery voltage). Displays that the switch is on or off. If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates the grip warmer and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator for 120 seconds. If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates the thumb warmer and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator for 120 seconds. If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates the cylinder-#1 ignition coil and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator (five times at one-second intervals). If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates the cylinder-#2 ignition coil and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator (five times at one-second intervals). If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates the cylinder-#3 ignition coil and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator (five times at one-second intervals). If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates injector #1 and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator (five times at onesecond intervals).
09 24
Thumb warmer operation 27
Cylinder-#1 ignition coil 30
After pushing the switch, check that a spark is produced five times. After pushing the switch, check that a spark is produced five times. After pushing the switch, check that a spark is produced five times. After pushing the switch, check that the injector operates five times by listening to its operating sound.
Injector #1 36
7-11

Diagnostic code No. Injector #2 37 Item Description of action If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates injector #2 and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator (five times at onesecond intervals). If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates injector #3 and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator (five times at onesecond intervals). If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates the fuel injection system relay and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator (five times at one-second intervals). (The indicator is off when the relay is on and it is on when the relay is off.) If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates the radiator fan motor relay (on/off) and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator (for five cycles of five seconds each). (The relay and indicator are on for two seconds and off for three seconds.) If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates the headlight relay (on/ off) and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator (for five cycles of five seconds each). (The relay and indicator are on for two seconds and off for three seconds.) If the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed, actuates the ISC (idle speed control) valve (fully closes/opens) for three cycles of four seconds each and displays the self-diagnosis warning indicator. (The valve fully closes in two seconds and opens in two seconds.) Displays the cylinder number if an error is detected in the EEPROM CO adjustment value for the cylinder as fault code No. 44. If multiple cylinders are defective, the display alternates every 2 seconds. Displays the code numbers of past malfunctions (i.e., a code number of a malfunction that occurred once and which has been corrected). If more than one code number is detected, the display alternates every 2 seconds to show all the detected code numbers. When all code numbers are shown, the display repeats the same process. Displays the total number of codes that are being detected through self diagnosis and the fault codes in the past history. Erases only the history codes when the grip warmer side of the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch is pushed. Displays the program control number.
FI
Data displayed on meter (reference value)
After pushing the switch, check that the injector operates five times by listening to its operating sound. After pushing the switch, check that the injector operates five times by listening to its operating sound. After pushing the switch, check that the fuel injection system relay operates five times by listening to its operating sound.
Injector #3 38
Fuel injection system relay 50
Radiator fan motor relay 51
After pushing the switch, check that the radiator fan motor relay operates five times by listening to its operating sound. (At that time, the fan motor rotates.) After pushing the switch, check that the headlight relay operates five times by listening to its operating sound. (At that time, the headlight and taillight come on.) After pushing the switch, check that the ISC unit vibrates. The ISC vibrates when the ISC valve operates.
Headlight relay 52
54
ISC (idle speed control) unit
EEPROM fault code display 60
(01 ~ 03) Displays the cylinder number. (00) Displays when there is no malfunction. 12 ~ 85 (00) Displays when there is no malfunction.
Malfunction history code display 61
Malfunction history code erasure 62
00 ~ 23 (00) Displays when there is no malfunction.
70
Control number
00 ~ 255
7-12

TROUBLESHOOTING DETAILS
FI
This section describes the measures per fault code number displayed on the meter. Check and service the items or components that are the probable cause of the malfunction following the order given. After the check and service of the malfunctioning part have been completed, reset the meter display according to the reinstatement method. Fault code No.: Code number displayed on the meter when the engine failed to work normally. (Refer to Fault code table.) Diagnostic code No.: Code number to be used when the diagnostic mode is operated. (Refer to Diagnostic mode table.)
Fault code No. Diagnostic code No. Order 1 2 Item/components and probable cause Installed condition of crankshaft position sensor. Connections Crankshaft position sensor coupler Wire harness ECU coupler Check or maintenance job Check for looseness or pinching. Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the crankshaft position sensor coupler and ECU coupler. Gray Gray Black/Blue Black/Blue Replace if defective. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM in CHAPTER 8. Reinstatement method Cranking the engine. 12 Symptom No normal signals are received from the crankshaft position sensor.
Open or short circuit in wire harness.
Defective crankshaft position sensor.
7-13

Fault code No. 13 Symptom
FI
Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3): open or short circuit detected.
Diagnostic code No. 03 (intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3)) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Connections Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) coupler Wire harness ECU coupler Fuel injection system sub-wire harness coupler Open or short circuit in wire harness and/or fuel injection system sub-wire harness. Check or maintenance job Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) coupler and ECU coupler. Pink/White Pink/White Black/Blue Black/Blue Blue Blue Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 03). Replace if defective. 1. Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) coupler terminals as shown. Positive tester probe Pink/White 1 Negative tester probe Black/Blue 2 Reinstatement method Setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch on.
Defective intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3).
P/W B/L L
2. Turn the main switch on. 3. Measure the intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) output voltage. Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) output voltage: 3.75 ~ 4.25 V 4. Is the intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) OK?
7-14

FI
Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3): hose system malfunction (clogged or detached hose).
Diagnostic code No. 03 (intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3)) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) hoses are detached, clogged, kinked, or pinched. Check or maintenance job Repair or replace the intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) hoses. Reinstatement method Starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders Check and repair the connection. #1, #2, and #3) malfunction at intermedi- Replace it if there is a malfunction. ate electrical potential. Connections Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) coupler Wire harness ECU coupler Defective intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3). Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 03). Replace if defective. Refer to Fault code No. 13.
Fault code No.
15
Symptom
Throttle position sensor: open or short circuit detected.
Diagnostic code No. 01 (throttle position sensor) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Installed condition of throttle position sensor. Connections Throttle position sensor coupler Wire harness ECU coupler Fuel injection system sub-wire harness coupler Open or short circuit in wire harness and/or fuel injection system sub-wire harness. Check or maintenance job Check for looseness or pinching. Check that it is installed in the specified position. Refer to THROTTLE BODY. Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the throttle position sensor coupler and ECU coupler. Black/Blue Black/Blue Yellow Yellow Blue Blue Check for open circuit and replace the throttle position sensor. Black/Blue Yellow Open circuit item Ground wire open circuit Output wire open circuit Power supply wire open circuit 5 Defective throttle position sensor. 5V 0V 0V Output voltage Reinstatement method Setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch on.
Throttle position sensor lead open circuit output voltage check.
Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 01). Replace if defective. Refer to THROTTLE BODY.
7-15

Fault code No. 16 Symptom Stuck throttle position sensor detected.
FI
Diagnostic code No. 01 (throttle position sensor) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Installed condition of throttle position sensor. Defective throttle position sensor. Check or maintenance job Check for looseness or pinching. Check that it is installed in the specified position. Refer to THROTTLE BODY. Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 01). Replace if defective. Refer to THROTTLE BODY. Reinstatement method Starting the engine, operating it at idle, and then racing it.
Fault code No.
21
Symptom
Coolant temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected.
Diagnostic code No. 06 (coolant temperature sensor) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Connections Coolant temperature sensor coupler Wire harness ECU coupler Coolant temperature sensor sub-lead coupler Open or short circuit in wire harness and/or coolant temperature sensor sublead coupler. Check or maintenance job Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the coolant temperature sensor coupler and ECU coupler. Black/Blue Black/Blue Green/White Green/White Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 06). Replace if defective. Refer to SIGNAL SYSTEM in CHAPTER 8. Reinstatement method Setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch on.
Defective coolant temperature sensor.
Fault code No.
22
Symptom
Intake air temperature sensor: open or short circuit detected.
Diagnostic code No. 05 (intake air temperature sensor) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Connections Intake air temperature sensor coupler Wire harness ECU coupler Check or maintenance job Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the intake air temperature sensor coupler and ECU coupler. Black/Blue Black/Blue Brown/White Brown/White Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 05). Replace if defective. Refer to INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR. Reinstatement method Setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch on.
Defective intake air temperature sensor.
7-16

FI
Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1): open or short circuit detected.
Diagnostic code No. 04 (intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1)) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Connections Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) coupler Wire harness ECU coupler Fuel injection system sub-wire harness coupler Open or short circuit in wire harness and/or fuel injection system sub-wire harness. Check or maintenance job Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) coupler and ECU coupler. Pink/Black Pink/Black Black/Blue Black/Blue Blue Blue Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 04). Replace if defective. 1. Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) coupler terminals as shown. Positive tester probe Pink/Black 1 Negative tester probe Black/Blue 2 Reinstatement method Setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch on.
Defective intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1).
P/B B/L L
2. Turn the main switch on. 3. Measure the intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) output voltage. Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) output voltage: 3.75 ~ 4.25 V 4. Is the intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) OK?
7-17

FI
Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1): hose system malfunction (clogged or detached hose).
Diagnostic code No. 04 (intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1)) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) hose is detached, clogged, kinked, or pinched. Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) malfunction at intermediate electrical potential. Connections Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) coupler Wire harness ECU coupler Defective intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1). Check or maintenance job Repair or replace the intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) hose. Check and repair the connection. Replace it if there is a malfunction. Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 04). Replace if defective. Refer to Fault code No. 25. Reinstatement method Starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Fault code No. Diagnostic code No. Order 1
30
Symptom
Engine stops when an oil pressure drop is detected.
Item/components and probable cause Oil pressure dropped.
Check or maintenance job Place the snowmobile on a level surface, and then check the oil pressure after warming up the engine. Refer to ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT in CHAPTER 2. Disconnect the ECU coupler, and then use the circuit tester to check for continuity between the engine ground and the oil pressure switch coupler (yellow/green). Repair or replace if there is no continuity. Start the engine, warm it up for 1 minute, and then use the circuit tester to check for continuity between the oil pressure switch coupler (yellow/ green) and the switch body. Replace if there is continuity.
Reinstatement method Starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Short circuit in oil pressure switch lead. Short circuit in oil pressure switch sublead.
Defective oil pressure switch.
7-18

FI
Diagnostic code No. 30 (cylinder-#1 ignition coil) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Connections Cylinder-#1 ignition coil coupler Wire harness ECU couplers Check or maintenance job Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the cylinder-#1 ignition coil coupler and ECU couplers. Orange Orange Red/White Red/White Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 30). Test the primary and secondary coils for continuity. Replace if defective. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM in CHAPTER 8. Malfunction detected in the primary lead of the cylinder-#2 ignition coil. Reinstatement method Starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Detective cylinder-#1 ignition coil.
Fault code No.
34
Symptom
Diagnostic code No. 31 (cylinder-#2 ignition coil) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Connections Cylinder-#2 ignition coil coupler Wire harness ECU couplers Check or maintenance job Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the cylinder-#2 ignition coil coupler and ECU couplers. Gray/Red Gray/Red Red/White Red/White Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 31). Test the primary and secondary coils for continuity. Replace if defective. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM in CHAPTER 8. Reinstatement method Starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Defective cylinder-#2 ignition coil.
7-19

FI
Diagnostic code No. 32 (cylinder-#3 ignition coil) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Connections Cylinder-#3 ignition coil coupler Wire harness ECU couplers Check or maintenance job Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the cylinder-#3 ignition coil coupler and ECU couplers. Orange/Green Orange/Green Red/White Red/White Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 32). Test the primary and secondary coils for continuity. Replace if defective. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM in CHAPTER 8. Engine speed is high when the engine is idling. Reinstatement method Starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Detective cylinder-#3 ignition coil.
Fault code No.
37
Symptom
Diagnostic code No. 54 (ISC (idle speed control) unit) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Throttle valve does not fully close. Check or maintenance job Check the throttle body. Refer to THROTTLE BODY. Check the throttle cable. Refer to THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT in CHAPTER 2. Check that the ISC unit coupler is not disconnected. The ISC valve is stuck fully open if it does not operate when turning the main switch off. (Touch the ISC unit with your hand and check if it is vibrating to confirm if the ISC valve is operating.) Reinstatement method ISC valve returns to its original position by setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch on and off. Reinstated if the engine idle speed is within specification after starting the engine.
ISC valve is stuck fully open due to disconnected ISC unit coupler. (High engine idle speed is detected with the ISC valve stuck fully open even though signals for the valve to close are continuously being transmitted by the ECU.)
NOTE:
Do not remove the ISC unit. 3 ISC valve is not moving correctly. Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 54). After the ISC valve is fully closed, it opens to the standby opening position. This operation takes approximately 12 seconds. Start the engine. If the error recurs, replace the throttle body assembly.
7-20

Fault code No. 42 Symptom No normal signals are received from the speed sensor.
FI
Diagnostic code No. 07 (speed sensor) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Connections Speed sensor coupler Wire harness ECU coupler Check or maintenance job Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Reinstatement method
Starting the engine, and inputting the snowmobile speed signals by operating the Repair or replace if there is an open or short cirsnowmobile at a cuit. low speed of 20 Between the speed sensor coupler and ECU couto 30 km/h. pler. Blue Blue White White Black/Blue Black/Blue Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 07). Replace if defective. Refer to SIGNAL SYSTEM in CHAPTER 8. Replace if defective. Refer to FRONT AXLE AND TRACK in CHAPTER 4.
Defective speed sensor.
Gear for detecting snowmobile speed has broken.
7-21

FI
Power supply to the fuel injectors and fuel pump is not normal.
Diagnostic code No. 09 (fuel system voltage) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Connections Fuel injection system relay coupler Wire harness ECU coupler Check or maintenance job Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the fuel injection system relay coupler and ECU coupler. Blue/Red Blue/Red Between the fuel injection system relay coupler and engine stop switch coupler. Red/White Red/White Between the engine stop switch coupler and main switch coupler. Brown Brown Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 09). Replace if defective. Reinstatement method Starting the engine and operating it at idle.
Malfunction or open circuit in fuel injection system relay.
NOTE:
When the leads are disconnected, the voltage check by the code No. 09 is impossible. 1. Disconnect the fuel injection system relay from the wire harness and remove it. 2. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and battery (12 V) to the fuel injection system relay terminals as shown. Positive battery terminal Red/White 1 Negative battery terminal Blue/Red 2 Positive tester probe Red/Green 3 Negative tester probe Red/Blue 4
3. Does the fuel injection system relay have continuity between the red/green and red/blue terminals?
7-22

FI
Error is detected while reading or writing on EEPROM (CO adjustment value).
Diagnostic No. 60 (EEPROM improper cylinder indication) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Malfunction in ECU. Check or maintenance job Execute the diagnostic mode (code No. 60). 1. Check the faulty cylinder. (If multiple cylinders are defective, the display alternates every 2 seconds.) 2. Readjust the CO of the displayed cylinder. Replace ECU if defective. Symptom Power supply to the ECU is not normal. Reinstatement method Setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch on.
46
Item/components and probable cause Connections Wire harness ECU coupler
Check or maintenance job Check the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Replace or charge the battery. Refer to BATTERY INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. Replace if defective. Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM in CHAPTER 8. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the battery and main fuse. Red Red Between the main fuse and ignition fuse. Red Red Between the ignition fuse and main switch coupler. Red/Yellow Red/Yellow Between the main switch coupler and engine stop switch coupler. Brown Brown Between the engine stop switch coupler and ECU coupler. Red/White Red/White
Faulty battery.
3 4
Malfunction in rectifier/regulator. Open or short circuit in wire harness.
50
Symptom
Faulty ECU memory. (When this malfunction is detected in the ECU, the fault code number might not appear on the meter.)
Item/components and probable cause Malfunction in ECU.
Check or maintenance job Replace the ECU.
Reinstatement method Setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch on.
7-23

Fault code No. 81 Symptom Grip warmer: open or short circuit detected.
FI
Diagnostic code No. 26 (grip warmer operation) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Open or short circuit in wire harness. Check or maintenance job Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between the grip warmer coupler and ECU coupler. Yellow/Red-Yellow/Red Reinstatement method Setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch on.
Fault code No.
83
Symptom
Thumb warmer: short circuit detected.
Diagnostic code No. 27 (thumb warmer operation) Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Short circuit in wire harness. Check or maintenance job Repair or replace if there is a short circuit. Between the thumb warmer coupler and ECU coupler. Light green-Light green Reinstatement method Setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch on.
85
Symptom
Oil pressure switch: open circuit detected.
Item/components and probable cause Connections Oil pressure switch coupler Wire harness ECU coupler Oil pressure switch sub-lead coupler Open circuit in wire harness and/or oil pressure switch sub-lead.
Check or maintenance job Check the couplers for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the couplers. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open circuit. Between the oil pressure switch coupler and ECU coupler. Yellow/Green Yellow/Green With the engine stopped, check that there is continuity between the oil pressure switch terminals and oil pressure switch body metal components or engine ground. Replace if there is no continuity. Refer to OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.
Defective oil pressure switch.
7-24

Er-1 Er-2 Fault code No. Er-3 Er-4 Diagnostic code No. Order 1 Item/components and probable cause Connections Wire harness ECU coupler Speedometer unit sub-lead coupler Check or maintenance job Symptom Symptom Data from the ECU cannot be received correctly. Non-registered data has been received from the meter. Symptom Symptom No signals are received from the ECU.
FI
No signals are received from the ECU within the specified signal time.
Reinstatement method Setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch on.
Check the coupler for any pins that may have pulled out. Check the locking condition of the coupler. If there is a malfunction, repair it and connect the coupler securely. Repair or replace if there is an open or short circuit. Between speedometer unit coupler and ECU coupler. Blue/Yellow Blue/Yellow Replace the speedometer unit. Replace the ECU.
Open or short circuit in wire harness and/or speedometer unit sub-lead.
3 4
Malfunction in speedometer unit. Malfunction in ECU.
7-25

OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
FI
1. Disconnect: Oil pressure switch coupler 1 2. Connect: Pocket tester (between the engine ground and oil pressure switch terminal)
3. Check: Oil pressure switch continuity No continuity Replace the oil pressure switch.
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
3 1
1. Remove the intake air temperature sensor.
CAUTION:
Handle the intake air temperature sensor with special care. Never subject it to shock or allow it to be dropped. If it is dropped, it must be replaced. 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the intake air temperature sensor)
NOTE:
Set the tester selector to the 100 position. 3. Immerse the intake air temperature sensor 1 in water 2 and check the intake temperature sensor operation. Intake air temperature sensor resistance: 290 ~ 390 at 80 C (176 F)
3 Thermometer
4. If the intake air temperature sensor operation is defective, replace it. 5. Install the intake air temperature sensor.
7-26

NOTE:
FI
ISC (IDLE SPEED CONTROL) UNIT

Do not remove the ISC (idle speed control) unit completely from the throttle body. 1. Inspect: ISC (idle speed control) unit Inspection steps: Disconnect the ISC (idle speed control) unit coupler from the ISC (idle speed control) unit. Connect the pocket tester ( 10) to the terminals of the ISC (idle speed control) unit. Positive tester probe Red/Green 1 Negative tester probe White/Green 2 Positive tester probe Brown/Blue 3 Negative tester probe Pink/Blue 4 Pocket tester: 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester: YU-03112-C Measure the ISC (idle speed control) unit resistance. Out of specification Replace the throttle body. ISC (idle speed control) unit resistance: 57 ~ 63 at 20 C (68 F)
2
R/G W/G R/Y P/L Br/L R/Y
7-27
AIR FILTER CASE AIR FILTER CASE
FI
: 3 Nm (0.3 m kg, 2.2 ft lb) : 7 Nm (0.7 m kg, 5.1 ft lb)
New 4 7 5 7 7 9 8 10 6 6
11
New
Order
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Job name/Part name Air filter case removal Steering column Radiator cover Intake air temperature sensor coupler Intake air temperature sensor Air filter case cover Air filter element frame Air filter element Radiator bolt Air filter case joint clamp screw Oil tank breather hose Cylinder head breather hose Air vent hose Air filter case
Qty
1 1 1 1 1 4 3 1 1 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to STEERING in CHAPTER 3. Refer to RADIATOR in CHAPTER 6. Disconnect.
Loosen. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
7-28
THROTTLE BODY THROTTLE BODY

: 3 Nm (0.3 m kg, 2.2 ft lb) 8 1 7
FI
7 9 7 9 2 7 4
7 7 5
Order
Job name/Part name Throttle body removal Coolant
Qty
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Steering column Radiator Air filter case assembly Fuel injection system sub-wire harness coupler Fuel hose Air vent hose Throttle cable Throttle body heater inlet hose Throttle body heater outlet hose Throttle body joint clamp screw Throttle body assembly Throttle body joint
1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1 3
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Drain. Refer to COOLING SYSTEM in CHAPTER 2. Refer to STEERING in CHAPTER 3. Refer to RADIATOR in CHAPTER 6. Refer to AIR FILTER CASE. Disconnect. Disconnect.
Loosen.

7-29
THROTTLE BODY
INJECTORS
FI
3 2
14
6 5 13 8 4 1 10 12
New 15 15 15 New
10
10
New
11
10
10
Order 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Job name/Part name Injectors removal Throttle position sensor coupler Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) coupler Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) coupler Cylinder-#1 injector coupler Cylinder-#2 injector coupler Cylinder-#3 injector coupler ISC (idle speed control unit) coupler Fuel injection system sub-wire harness Throttle position sensor Negative pressure hose ISC (idle speed control) unit hose Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1)
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 1 1
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect. Disconnect.
7-30
THROTTLE BODY
FI
3 2
14
6 5 13 8 4 1 10 12
New 15 15 15 New
10
10
New
11
10
10
Order 13 14 15
Job name/Part name Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) Fuel rail Injector
Qty 1 1 3
Remarks
7-31
THROTTLE BODY
REMOVAL
FI
1. Extract the fuel in the fuel tank through the fuel tank cap with a pump. 2. Remove: Fuel hose
CAUTION:
Be sure to disconnect the fuel hose by hand. Do not forcefully disconnect the hose with tools. Although the fuel has been removed from the fuel tank be careful when removing the fuel hose, since there may be fuel remaining in it.
NOTE:
To remove the fuel hose from the throttle body, slide the fuel hose connector cover 1 on the end of the hose in direction of the arrow shown, press the two buttons 2 on the sides of the connector, and then remove the hose. Before removing the hose, place a few rags in the area under where it will be removed.
INSPECTION
1. Inspect: Injectors Damage Replace the defective parts. 2. Inspect: Throttle body Cracks/damage Replace the throttle body. 3. Check: Fuel passages Obstructions Clean.
NOTE:
Use a petroleum based solvent for cleaning. Blow out all passage with compressed air. 4. Check: Throttle body joints Cracks/damage Replace the defective parts.
7-32
THROTTLE BODY
1. Inspect: Fuel pressure
FI
FUEL PRESSURE INSPECTION
4 3 1
Measurement steps: Remove the fuel hose connector holder, and then disconnect the fuel hose. Refer to SEAT AND FUEL TANK in CHAPTER 5. Connect the fuel pressure adapter 1 between the fuel hose 2 and fuel pump 3. Connect the pressure gauge 4 to the fuel pressure adapter. Pressure gauge: 90890-03153 YU-03153 Fuel pressure adapter: 90890-03176 YM-03176 Start the engine. Measure the fuel pressure. Fuel pressure: 324 kPa (3.24 kg/cm2, 46.1 psi) Faulty Replace the fuel pump.
7-33
THROTTLE BODY
1. Inspect: Throttle position sensor
FI
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Inspect steps: Disconnect the throttle position sensor coupler. Remove the throttle position sensor from the throttle body. Connect the pocket tester ( 1k) to the throttle position sensor. Positive tester probe Blue terminal 1 Negative tester probe Black/Blue terminal 2 Measure the maximum throttle position sensor resistance. Out of specification Replace the throttle position sensor. Maximum throttle position sensor resistance: 2.64 ~ 6.16 k at 20 C (68 F) (Blue Black/Blue)
1
L Y B/L
2. Adjust: Throttle position sensor angle
1
L Y B/L
Adjustment steps: Connect the fuel injection system sub-wire harness coupler to the wire harness. Connect the digital circuit tester to the throttle position sensor. Positive tester probe Yellow terminal 1 Negative tester probe Black/Blue terminal 2 Digital circuit tester: 90890-03174 Model 88 Multimeter with tachometer: YU-A1927
7-34
THROTTLE BODY
FI
Measure the throttle position sensor voltage. Adjust the throttle position sensor angle so the measured voltage is within the specified range. Throttle position sensor voltage: 0.63 ~ 0.73 V (Yellow Black/Blue) After adjusting the throttle position sensor angle, tighten the throttle position sensor screws.
7-35
FI
7-36
SWITCH INSPECTION
ELEC
ELECTRICAL
SWITCH INSPECTION
SWITCH INSPECTION
Use a pocket tester to check the terminals for continuity. If the continuity is faulty at any point, replace the switch. Pocket tester: 90890-03112 Analog pocket tester: YU-03112-C
NOTE:
Set the pocket tester to 0 before starting a test. When testing the switch for continuity the pocket tester should be set to the 1 range. When checking the switch turn it on and off a few times.
b
Br R Br/W R/W OFF
INSPECTING A SWITCH SHOWN IN THE MANUAL

The terminal connections for switches (main switch, handlebar switch, engine stop switch, light switch, etc.) are shown in a chart similar to the one on the left. This chart shows the switch positions a in the column and the switch lead colors b in the top row. For each switch position, indicates the terminals with continuity. The example chart shows that: There is continuity between the brown and red leads when the switch is set to ON. There is continuity between the brown and red and between the brown/white and red/white leads when the switch is set to START.
ON START
R Br
R/W Br/W
8-1
IGNITION SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
L/B G/B R/B R/L
P/W Y B/L L
R/G R/Y W/G P
P/L Br/L
(GRAY)
Gy
WIRE HARNESS
3
I J K J L J
O/G R/W (BLACK)
R /W R /G
Gy B/L
B Gy
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
B/L
R/G

G/Y L/R
L/B O B B G/B
R/B Gy/R O/G
L/W R/W
M
R/W R /L L/R
R/L L /R
(GRAY)
OFF ON START
1
W W W
R/L R/B
O
R/B R /L
(GRAY)
R /L A R /L
R/L
(BLACK)
R/L G/B
N
B
R R
5
R/G R/W
R R
R/G L/W R/W
B/Y Br/L G/Y
P Q
L/B R /L
R Br
R
0 A
L/W (BLACK) L/W L/W
R/W
R /L L /B (GRAY)
R/W
Y/R Lg L/Y Y/G
L/R R/L L Y W
R R
9 7 8
W B
Br
Br/L
W Br/L
R
B Lg
W
B/Y B B B/L Y/G
RUN STOP CLOSE OPEN
B F
Lg Br Br/W (BLACK)
Lg Ch Ch Y/R Y/R
C
(BLACK) Ch
Y B/L (BLACK)
L W B/L
Y/R
L/R G
Lg
G B
e f d
L/R P
8-2
B B R/W Br (BLACK)
B B
r q p o n G
Y/R B
S
P O /R B/W L W B /L
O/B
L/W
L/R
Br/B
R/Y
(BLACK)
Lg
O/B
R/W Br/B
m E
B B
l
B
Br/B
R/G P/L W /G Br/L
T
R/Y R/Y
O/B B
G W/B
L G/Y
R/W
G/Y
E
R/Y A R/Y P/W A P/W
L P /W B/L L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
U
L/R F L/R P A P/B
P/W B/L L (BLACK)
L/R

L/R
V
G/W
P/B B/L L (BLACK)
L/W
IGNITION SYSTEM
j c
G L/R
HI LO
L/W
]
OFF ON
L/W
R/W E R/W
[
P Br
Lg L/W
Lg G B
W
B/L

B /L G B /L
(BLACK)
Br/W
P
X
Br/W B/L
_ a
G B
g
Y
L Y B
G L/R B
(BLACK)
\
B
B/L
ELEC
Y E Y
b
Ch Ch E Ch
Y Ch R/B (GRAY)
Ch Ch
(GREEN)
B B
Z
Ch G/B (GREEN)
B C B B F B
Y/W Ch Y/L
Y/L Y/W
Ch
Y /W Y /L B/L
IGNITION SYSTEM IGNITION SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
3 4 5 7 B C H I J K L R S Z d n Crankshaft position sensor Main switch Main fuse Battery Engine stop switch Throttle switch ECU (engine control unit) Cylinder-#1 ignition coil Spark plug Cylinder-#2 ignition coil Cylinder-#3 ignition coil Throttle position sensor Speed sensor Frame ground Multi-function meter Ignition fuse
ELEC
8-3
IGNITION SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
NO SPARK OR WEAK SPARK.
ELEC
Check the main fuse and ignition fuse. Refer to FUSE INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. OK FAULTY Replace the main fuse and/or ignition fuse.
Check the battery. Refer to BATTERY INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. OK OUT OF SPECIFICATION Replace or charge the battery. Refer to BATTERY INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2.
Check the spark plug gap. Refer to SPARK PLUGS in CHAPTER 2. OK OUT OF SPECIFICATION Repair or replace the spark plug(s). Refer to SPARK PLUGS in CHAPTER 2.
Check the ignition spark gap. OK OUT OF SPECIFICATION Replace the ignition coil(s).
Check the ignition coil resistance. OK OUT OF SPECIFICATION Replace the ignition coil(s).
Check the crankshaft position sensor. OK OUT OF SPECIFICATION Replace the crankshaft position sensor.
Check the engine stop switch, throttle switch and main switch. OK FAULTY Replace the right handlebar switch and/or main switch.
Check the throttle position sensor. Refer to THROTTLE BODY in CHAPTER 7. OK FAULTY Replace the throttle position sensor. Refer to THROTTLE BODY in CHAPTER 7.
Check the ignition system wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. OK FAULTY Properly connect or repair the ignition system wiring.
Correct the connection and/or replace the ECU.
8-4
IGNITION SYSTEM
T.O.R.S. OPERATES.
ELEC
Is self-diagnosis code 15, 16, or 42 displayed? NO YES Check the affected item(s).
Has throttle body icing occurred or is foreign material stuck in the throttle body? NO YES Perform throttle body maintenance.
Is the throttle switch malfunctioning? NO YES Repair or replace the right handlebar switch.
Is the throttle cable free play out of specification? NO YES Adjust the throttle cable free play. Refer to THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT in CHAPTER 2.
Was the engine revved with the V-belt removed? NO YES When the engine is revved with the V-belt removed, the speed sensor is diagnosed as malfunctioning and T.O.R.S. operates.
Is the throttle position sensor, speedometer unit, or speed sensor installed incorrectly? NO YES Install correctly.
Correct the connection and/or replace the speedometer unit and/or ECU.
2 3
7 6 9 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Crankshaft position sensor Engine speed ECU (engine control unit) Ignition Throttle position sensor Throttle switch Speed Speed sensor Speedometer unit
8-5
IGNITION SYSTEM
ELEC
IGNITION SPARK GAP

The following procedure applies to all of the ignition coils. 1. Measure: Ignition spark gap Out of specification Replace the ignition coil(s). Measurement steps: Disconnect the ignition coil 1 from the spark plug. Connect the opama pet-4000 spark checker 2 or ignition checker 3. Opama pet-4000 spark checker: YM-34487 Ignition checker: 90890-06754 Measure the ignition spark gap a. Crank the engine by setting the engine stop switch to RUN and turning the main switch to start and gradually increase the spark gap until a misfire occurs. Ignition spark gap: 6.0 mm (0.24 in)
For USA/Canada For Europe
IGNITION COIL
The following procedure applies to all of the ignition coils. 1. Disconnect: Ignition coil coupler 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the ignition coil) 3. Measure: Primary coil resistance a Secondary coil resistance b Out of specification Replace the ignition coil(s). Primary coil resistance: 1.19 ~ 1.61 at 20 C (68 F) Secondary coil resistance: 8.5 ~ 11.5 k at 20 C (68 F)
8-6
IGNITION SYSTEM
ELEC
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

1. Disconnect: Crankshaft position sensor coupler 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the crankshaft position sensor coupler) 3. Measure: Crankshaft position sensor resistance Out of specification Replace. Crankshaft position sensor resistance: 336 ~ 504 at 20 C (68 F) (Gray Black)
B Gy
8-7
IGNITION SYSTEM
ELEC
THROTTLE OVERRIDE SYSTEM (T.O.R.S.)
WARNING
If the T.O.R.S. is activated, make sure that the cause of the malfunction has been corrected and that the engine can be operated without a problem before restarting the engine. Be sure to use the specified spark plug and ignition coil. Otherwise, the T.O.R.S. will not work properly. If the throttle bodies or throttle cable malfunctions during operation, the T.O.R.S. will operate when the throttle lever is released. The T.O.R.S. is designed to override the fuel injection and limit the engine speed to less than the clutch engagement speed if the throttle valves fail to return to the idle position when the throttle lever is released. Engagement speed: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA 3,550 ~ 3,950 r/min FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada 3,300 ~ 3,700 r/min FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe 3,100 ~ 3,500 r/min
Mode Idling/ starting Off Closed Run Running On Open Run Trouble Off Open T.O.R.S. will operate
Item
Throttle switch
Throttle position sensor Engine
1 2 3 a b c d
Idling/starting Running Trouble Throttle position sensor (throttle valve position) Throttle switch Throttle cable On Off Open Closed
8-8
IGNITION SYSTEM
6 5 4
NOTE:
ELEC
When the T.O.R.S. is activated, the warning light 4 and self-diagnosis warning indicator 5 will flash and the two-digit code 84 6 will flash in the odometer/tripmeter/engine speed meter LCD. The T.O.R.S. monitors the condition of the throttle position sensor, speedometer unit, and speed sensor, and will operate if any of the monitored items is disconnected or malfunctioning.
ENGINE STOP SWITCH

1. Disconnect: Engine stop switch coupler 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the engine stop switch coupler) 3. Check: Engine stop switch continuity Faulty Replace the right handlebar switch. Switch position RUN (pulled out) OFF (pushed in) Continuity Yes No
1 +
Br Br/W
THROTTLE SWITCH
1 +
B/L
B/Y
1. Disconnect: Throttle switch couplers 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the throttle switch couplers) 3. Check: Throttle switch continuity Faulty Replace the right handlebar switch. Throttle switch position Throttle lever is operated. Throttle lever is not operated. Continuity Yes No
8-9
IGNITION SYSTEM
MAIN SWITCH
ELEC
R Br
R/W Br/W
1. Disconnect: Main switch coupler 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the main switch coupler) 3. Check: Main switch continuity Faulty Replace. Switch position OFF ON START Continuity Color code Br R Br/W R/W
8-10
ELECTRICAL STARTING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
A B C R/L R/B G/B L/B L B/L Y P/W G L/R Y/G Y/G B (BLACK) R/W WIRE HARNESS O O R/W (BLACK) OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SUB-LEAD WIRE HARNESS TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT SUB-LEAD WIRE HARNESS SPEEDOMETER UNIT SUB-LEAD WIRE HARNESS REVERSE SWITCH SUB-WIRE HARNESS WIRE HARNESS COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SUB-LEAD (BLACK) G/W B/L B/L G/W G/B R/B Ch Ch R/B G/B L/R B B L/R P/B W/G R/Y R/G Br/L P/L (GRAY) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM SUB-WIRE HARNESS L/R G B R/W Y L/Y L/Y Y R/W E F G
L/B G/B R/B R/L
P/W Y B/L L
R/G R/Y W/G P
P/L Br/L
(GRAY)
Gy
WIRE HARNESS
3
R/W Gy/R Gy/R R/W
Gy B/L
B Gy
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
B/L
(BLACK)
R /W R /G
R/G

G/Y L/R
L/B O B B G/B
R/B Gy/R O/G
L/W R/W
R/L
R/W
L /R
O/G R/W
(GRAY)
OFF ON START
(BLACK)
R /L L/R
1
W W W
4 5 7 I 8 J 9 K A J B L J Z n
R/L R/B
Main switch Main fuse Battery Starter motor Starter relay Diode M stop switch Engine Frame ground Ignition fuse
O
R/B R /L R/L G/B (GRAY)
R /L A R /L
R/L
(BLACK)
N
B
R R
5
R/G R/W
R R
R/G L/W R/W
B/Y Br/L G/Y
P Q
L/B R /L
R Br
R
0 A
L/W (BLACK) L/W L/W
R/W
R /L L /B (GRAY)
R/W
Y/R Lg L/Y Y/G
L/R R/L L Y W
R R
9 7 8
W B
Br
Br/L
W Br/L
R
B Lg
W
B/Y B B B/L Y/G
RUN STOP CLOSE OPEN
B F
Lg Br Br/W (BLACK)
Lg Ch Ch Y/R Y/R
C
(BLACK) Ch
Y B/L (BLACK)
L W B/L
Y/R
L/R G
Lg
G B
e f d
L/R P
8-11
B B R/W Br (BLACK)
B B
r q p o n G
Y/R B
S
P O /R B/W L W B /L
O/B
L/W
L/R
Br/B
R/Y
(BLACK)
Lg
O/B
R/W Br/B
m E
B B
l
B
Br/B
R/G P/L W /G Br/L
T
R/Y R/Y
O/B B
G W/B
L G/Y
R/W
G/Y
E
R/Y A R/Y P/W A P/W
L P /W B/L L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
U
L/R F L/R P A P/B
P/W B/L L (BLACK)
L/R

L/R
V
G/W
P/B B/L L (BLACK)
L/W
j c
G L/R
HI LO
L/W
]
OFF ON
L/W
R/W E R/W
[
P Br
Lg L/W
Lg G B
W
B/L

B /L G B /L
(BLACK)
Br/W
P
X
Br/W B/L
_ a
G B
g
Y
L Y B
G L/R B
(BLACK)
\
B
B/L
ELEC
Y E Y
b
Ch Ch E Ch
Y Ch R/B (GRAY)
Ch Ch
(GREEN)
B B
Z
Ch G/B (GREEN)
B C B B F B
Y/W Ch Y/L
Y/L Y/W
Ch
Y /W Y /L B/L

TROUBLESHOOTING
STARTER MOTOR DOES NOT OPERATE.
ELEC
1. Connect: Starter relay terminals (battery side and starter motor side)
NO
Check the battery and connectors. Refer to BATTERY INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. OK NO Charge or replace the battery. Refer to BATTERY INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2.
1 Jumper lead
2. Check: Starter motor operation Repair or replace the starter motor. OK
WARNING
A wire for the jumper lead 1 must have the equivalent capacity as that of the battery lead or more, otherwise it may cause the jumper lead to be burned. This check is likely to produce sparks, so be sure that no flammable gas or fluid is in the vicinity.
3. Disconnect: Starter relay coupler 4. Connect: Starter relay coupler terminals
NO
1 Jumper lead
5. Check: Starter motor operation OK
Replace the starter relay.
*
8-12
ELEC
*
Check the main fuse and ignition fuse. Refer to FUSE INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. OK FAULTY
Replace the main fuse and/or ignition fuse. FAULTY
Check the engine stop switch and main switch. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM. OK
Replace the right handlebar switch and/or main switch. Check the electrical starting system wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. OK Correct the connection. FAULTY
Properly connect or repair the electrical starting system wiring.
8-13

STARTER MOTOR
ELEC
Order
Job name/Part name Starter motor removal Engine assembly Starter motor lead Starter motor assembly
Qty
Remarks Remove the parts in the order listed below. Refer to ENGINE ASSEMBLY in CHAPTER 5.
1 2
1 1 For installation, reverse the removal procedure. Remove the parts in the order listed below. 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Starter motor disassembly O-ring Front bracket Gasket Bearing Oil seal Rear bracket Brush Brush spring
8-14
ELEC
Order 9 0 A B
Job name/Part name Brush holder Bearing Armature assembly Starter motor yoke
Qty 1 1 1 1
Remarks
8-15
ELEC
Inspection 1. Inspect: Commutator (outer surface) Dirty Clean with #600 grit sandpaper 1. Hold the armature in a vise 2 and copper or aluminium plate 3.
CAUTION:
Lightly grip the armature with a vise.
2. Measure: Commutator diameter a Measure the diameter a of the commutator at points where the brush comes in contact. Out of specification Replace the starter motor. Commutator diameter wear limit: 27.0 mm (1.06 in)
3. Measure: Mica undercut (insulation depth) a (between commutator segments) Out of specification Scrape mica 1 to proper limits. Use a hacksaw blade 2 that is ground to fit. Mica undercut: 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
4. Measure: Armature coil resistance (insulation/continuity) Out of specification Replace the starter motor. Inspecting steps: Connect the pocket tester for the continuity check 1 and the insulation check 2. Measure the armature coil resistances. Armature coil resistance: Continuity check: 0.0081 ~ 0.0099 at 20 C (68 F) Insulation check: Above 1 M at 20 C (68 F) If the resistance is incorrect, replace the starter motor.
8-16
ELEC
5. Measure: Brush length a Out of specification Replace the brushes as a set. Brush length wear limit: 4.4 mm (0.17 in) 6. Measure: Brush spring pressure Fatigue/out of specification Replace the brush spring as a set. Brush spring pressure: 7.36 ~ 11.04 N (750 ~ 1,126 g, 26.49 ~ 39.74 oz) 7. Check: Bearings Oil seal Damage/wear Replace the starter motor.
Assembly 1. Install: Gaskets New Starter motor yoke 1 (to the rear bracket 2)
a b
NOTE:
Align the projection a on the rear bracket with the slot b on the starter motor yoke.
8-17
CHARGING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
A B C R/L R/B G/B L/B L B/L Y P/W G L/R Y/G Y/G B (BLACK) R/W WIRE HARNESS O O R/W (BLACK) OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SUB-LEAD WIRE HARNESS TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT SUB-LEAD WIRE HARNESS SPEEDOMETER UNIT SUB-LEAD WIRE HARNESS REVERSE SWITCH SUB-WIRE HARNESS WIRE HARNESS COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SUB-LEAD (BLACK) G/W B/L B/L G/W G/B R/B Ch Ch R/B G/B L/R B B L/R P/B W/G R/Y R/G Br/L P/L (GRAY) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM SUB-WIRE HARNESS L/R G B R/W Y L/Y L/Y Y R/W E F G
L/B G/B R/B R/L
P/W Y B/L L
R/G R/Y W/G P
P/L Br/L
(GRAY)
Gy
WIRE HARNESS
3
Gy B/L
B Gy
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
1 2 5 I 7 J Z K
J
R /W R /G R/G
Rectifier/regulator AC magneto Main fuse Battery Frame ground

M
R/W R/L L /R
B/L

G/Y L/R
L/B O B B G/B
R/B Gy/R O/G
L/W R/W
(GRAY)
OFF ON START
L J
O/G R/W (BLACK)
R /L L/R
1
W W W
R/L R/B
O
R/B R /L
(GRAY)
R /L A R /L
R/L
(BLACK)
R/L G/B
N
B
R R
5
R/G R/W
R R
R/G L/W R/W
B/Y Br/L G/Y
P Q
L/B R /L
R Br
R
0 A
L/W (BLACK) L/W L/W
R/W
R /L L /B (GRAY)
R/W
Y/R Lg L/Y Y/G
L/R R/L L Y W
R R
9 7 8
W B
Br
Br/L
W Br/L
R
B Lg
W
B/Y B B B/L Y/G
RUN STOP CLOSE OPEN
B F
Lg Br Br/W (BLACK)
Lg Ch Ch Y/R Y/R
C
(BLACK) Ch
Y B/L (BLACK)
L W B/L
Y/R
L/R G
Lg
G B
e f d
L/R P
8-18
B B R/W Br (BLACK)
B B
r q p o n G
Y/R B
S
P O /R B/W L W B /L
O/B
L/W
L/R
Br/B
R/Y
(BLACK)
Lg
O/B
R/W Br/B
m E
B B
l
B
Br/B
R/G P/L W /G Br/L
T
R/Y R/Y
O/B B
G W/B
L G/Y
R/W
G/Y
E
R/Y A R/Y P/W A P/W
L P /W B/L L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
U
L/R F L/R P A P/B
P/W B/L L (BLACK)
L/R

L/R
V
G/W
P/B B/L L (BLACK)
L/W
CHARGING SYSTEM
j c
G L/R
HI LO
L/W
]
OFF ON
L/W
R/W E R/W
[
P Br
Lg L/W
Lg G B
W
B/L

B /L G B /L
(BLACK)
Br/W
P
X
Br/W B/L
_ a
G B
g
Y
L Y B
G L/R B
(BLACK)
\
B
B/L
ELEC
Y E Y
b
Ch Ch E Ch
Y Ch R/B (GRAY)
Ch Ch
(GREEN)
B B
Z
Ch G/B (GREEN)
B C B B F B
Y/W Ch Y/L
Y/L Y/W
Ch
Y /W Y /L B/L
CHARGING SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
BATTERY IS NOT CHARGED.
ELEC
1. Connect: Pocket tester (to the battery terminals) 2. Measure: Battery voltage Battery voltage: More than 12 V at 20 C (68 F)
OUT OF SPECIFICATION
OK 3. Start the engine and accelerate to 5,000 r/min.
Check the battery. Replace or charge the battery. Refer to BATTERY INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2.
NOTE:
Place the snowmobile onto a suitable stand to raise the track off of the ground. 4. Measure: Charging voltage Charging voltage: 14 V/5,000 r/min OUT OF SPECIFICATION
Check the main fuse. Refer to FUSE INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. Check the stator coil. OK FAULTY Replace the main fuse and/or the stator coil.
CAUTION:
Never disconnect the battery leads while the generator is operating; otherwise, the rectifier/ regulator will be damaged. OK Check the charging system wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. OK Correct the connector. Properly connect or repair the charging system wiring. FAULTY Replace the rectifier/regulator.
8-19
CHARGING SYSTEM
BATTERY
ELEC
Inspection 1. Inspect: Battery condition Refer to BATTERY INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. Battery Storage The battery should be stored if the snowmobile is not going to be used for a long period. 1. Remove: Battery
WARNING
When removing the battery, disconnect the negative battery lead first.
Battery storage and maintenance tips: Recharge the battery periodically. Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Recharge the battery before reinstalling. Refer to BATTERY INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2.
STATOR COIL
1. Disconnect: Stator coil coupler 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the stator coil coupler) 3. Measure: Stator coil resistance Out of specification Replace. Stator coil resistance: 0.22 ~ 0.26 at 20 C (68 F) (White White)
W W W
8-20
CHARGING SYSTEM
ELEC
8-21
LIGHTING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
L/B G/B R/B R/L
P/W Y B/L L
R/G R/Y W/G P
P/L Br/L
(GRAY)
Gy
WIRE HARNESS
3
I J K J L J
O/G R/W (BLACK)
R /W R /G
Gy B/L
B Gy
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
B/L
R/G

G/Y L/R
L/B O B B G/B
R/B Gy/R O/G
L/W R/W
M
R/W R /L L/R
R/L L /R
(GRAY)
OFF ON START
1
W W W
R/L R/B
O
R/B R /L
(GRAY)
R /L A R /L
R/L
(BLACK)
R/L G/B
N
B
R R
5
R/G R/W
R R
R/G L/W R/W
B/Y Br/L G/Y
P Q
L/B R /L
R Br
R
0 A
L/W (BLACK) L/W L/W
R/W
R /L L /B (GRAY)
R/W
Y/R Lg L/Y Y/G
L/R R/L L Y W
R R
9 7 8
W B
Br
Br/L
W Br/L
R
B Lg
W
B/Y B B B/L Y/G
RUN STOP CLOSE OPEN
B F
Lg Br Br/W (BLACK)
Lg Ch Ch Y/R Y/R
C
(BLACK) Ch
Y B/L (BLACK)
L W B/L
Y/R
L/R G
Lg
G B
e f d
L/R P
8-22
B B R/W Br (BLACK)
B B
r q p o n G
Y/R B
S
P O /R B/W L W B /L
O/B
L/W
L/R
Br/B
R/Y
(BLACK)
Lg
O/B
R/W Br/B
m E
B B
l
B
Br/B
R/G P/L W /G Br/L
T
R/Y R/Y
O/B B
G W/B
L G/Y
R/W
G/Y
E
R/Y A R/Y P/W A P/W
L P /W B/L L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
U
L/R F L/R P A P/B
P/W B/L L (BLACK)
L/R

L/R
V
G/W
P/B B/L L (BLACK)
L/W
LIGHTING SYSTEM
j c
G L/R
HI LO
L/W
]
OFF ON
L/W
R/W E R/W
[
P Br
Lg L/W
Lg G B
W
B/L

B /L G B /L
(BLACK)
Br/W
P
X
Br/W B/L
_ a
G B
g
Y
L Y B
G L/R B
(BLACK)
\
B
B/L
ELEC
Y E Y
b
Ch Ch E Ch
Y Ch R/B (GRAY)
Ch Ch
(GREEN)
B B
Z
Ch G/B (GREEN)
B C B B F B
Y/W Ch Y/L
Y/L Y/W
Ch
Y /W Y /L B/L
LIGHTING SYSTEM LIGHTING SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 4 5 6 7 B H Z _ d g h i j n p q Rectifier/regulator AC magneto Main switch Main fuse Load control relay Battery Engine stop switch ECU (engine control unit) Frame ground Tail/brake light Multi-function meter High beam indicator light Headlight Headlight relay Headlight beam switch Ignition fuse Signal fuse Headlight fuse
ELEC
8-23
LIGHTING SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
ELEC
HEADLIGHT AND/OR HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHT DO NOT COME ON.
Check the headlight bulb(s). OK NO CONTINUITY Replace the bulb(s).
Check the main fuse, ignition fuse, and headlight fuse. Refer to FUSE INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. OK FAULTY Replace the main fuse, ignition fuse, and/or headlight fuse.
Check the stator coil. Refer to CHARGING SYSTEM. OK OUT OF SPECIFICATION Replace the stator coil.
Check the engine stop switch and main switch. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM. OK FAULTY Replace the right handlebar switch and/or main switch.
Check the headlight beam switch. OK FAULTY Replace the left handlebar switch.
Check the headlight relay. OK FAULTY Replace the headlight relay.
Check the load control relay. OK FAULTY Replace the load control relay.
Check the lighting system wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. OK FAULTY Properly connect or repair the lighting system wiring.
Correct the connection and/or replace the speedometer unit, rectifier/regulator, and/or ECU.
8-24
LIGHTING SYSTEM
METER LIGHT DO NOT COME ON.
ELEC
Correct the connection and/or replace the speedometer unit.
8-25
LIGHTING SYSTEM
TAIL LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON.
ELEC
Check the main fuse, ignition fuse, and signal fuse. Refer to FUSE INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. OK FAULTY Replace the main fuse, ignition fuse, and/or signal fuse.
Check the load control relay. OK FAULTY Replace the load control relay.
Correct the connection and/or replace the tail/brake light, rectifier/regulator, and/or ECU.
8-26
LIGHTING SYSTEM
BULB(S) NOTE:
ELEC
Do not check any of the lights that use LEDs. 1. Remove: Headlight bulb 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the bulb terminals)
WARNING
Keep flammable products and your hands away from the bulb while it is on; it will be hot. Do not touch the bulb until it cools down. 3. Check: Bulb(s) Terminal 13 23 Continuity Yes Yes
HEADLIGHT BEAM SWITCH

1. Disconnect: Headlight beam switch coupler 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the headlight beam switch coupler)
1 +
3. Check: Headlight beam switch continuity Faulty Replace the left handlebar switch. Switch position HI LO Continuity Yes No
8-27
LIGHTING SYSTEM
HEADLIGHT RELAY
ELEC
1
L/W Y Lg G B
1. Remove: Headlight relay (with the black coupler) Inspection steps: Connect the pocket tester ( 1) to the headlight relay terminals as shown. Positive tester probe Blue/White 1 Negative tester probe Green 2 If headlight relay does not have continuity between the blue/white and green terminals, replace it. Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and battery (12 V) to the headlight relay terminals as shown.
B
5 6
Lg L/W Y G
Positive battery terminal Light green 3 Negative battery terminal Black 4 Positive tester probe Blue/White 5 Negative tester probe Yellow 6 If headlight relay does not have continuity between the blue/white and yellow terminals, replace it.
LOAD CONTROL RELAY
3 4
Br R W Br/L
1. Remove: Load control relay Inspection steps: Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and battery (12 V) to the load control relay terminals as shown. Positive battery terminal Brown 1 Negative battery terminal Brown/Blue 2 Positive tester probe Red 3 Negative tester probe White 4 If load control relay does not have continuity between the red and white terminals, replace it.
8-28
LIGHTING SYSTEM
ELEC
8-29
SIGNAL SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
L/B G/B R/B R/L
P/W Y B/L L
R/G R/Y W/G P
P/L Br/L
(GRAY)
Gy
WIRE HARNESS
3
I J K J L J
O/G R/W (BLACK)
R /W R /G
Gy B/L
B Gy
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
B/L
R/G

G/Y L/R
L/B O B B G/B
R/B Gy/R O/G
L/W R/W
M
R/W R /L L/R
R/L L /R
(GRAY)
OFF ON START
1
W W W
R/L R/B
O
R/B R /L
(GRAY)
R /L A R /L
R/L
(BLACK)
R/L G/B
N
B
R R
5
R/G R/W
R R
R/G L/W R/W
B/Y Br/L G/Y
P Q
L/B R /L
R Br
R
0 A
L/W (BLACK) L/W L/W
R/W
R /L L /B (GRAY)
R/W
Y/R Lg L/Y Y/G
L/R R/L L Y W
R R
9 7 8
W B
Br
Br/L
W Br/L
R
B Lg
W
B/Y B B B/L Y/G
RUN STOP CLOSE OPEN
B F
Lg Br Br/W (BLACK)
Lg Ch Ch Y/R Y/R
C
(BLACK) Ch
Y B/L (BLACK)
L W B/L
Y/R
L/R G
Lg
G B
e f d
L/R P
8-30
B B R/W Br (BLACK)
B B
r q p o n G
Y/R B
S
P O /R B/W L W B /L
O/B
L/W
L/R
Br/B
R/Y
(BLACK)
Lg
O/B
R/W Br/B
m E
B B
l
B
Br/B
R/G P/L W /G Br/L
T
R/Y R/Y
O/B B
G W/B
L G/Y
R/W
G/Y
E
R/Y A R/Y P/W A P/W
L P /W B/L L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
U
L/R F L/R P A P/B
P/W B/L L (BLACK)
L/R

L/R
V
G/W
P/B B/L L (BLACK)
L/W
SIGNAL SYSTEM
j c
G L/R
HI LO
L/W
]
OFF ON
L/W
R/W E R/W
[
P Br
Lg L/W
Lg G B
W
B/L

B /L G B /L
(BLACK)
Br/W
P
X
Br/W B/L
_ a
G B
g
Y
L Y B
G L/R B
(BLACK)
\
B
B/L
ELEC
Y E Y
b
Ch Ch E Ch
Y Ch R/B (GRAY)
Ch Ch
(GREEN)
B B
Z
Ch G/B (GREEN)
B C B B F B
Y/W Ch Y/L
Y/L Y/W
Ch
Y /W Y /L B/L
SIGNAL SYSTEM SIGNAL SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 4 5 6 7 B H S W Z [ \ ] _ a b d e f Rectifier/regulator AC magneto Main switch Main fuse Load control relay Battery Engine stop switch ECU (engine control unit) Speed sensor Coolant temperature sensor Frame ground DC back buzzer Gear position switch Brake light switch Tail/brake light Fuel sender Oil level switch Multi-function meter Warning light Low coolant temperature indicator light n Ignition fuse p Signal fuse FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA FX10/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/ FX10MTR/FX10MTRA
ELEC
8-31
SIGNAL SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
BRAKE LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON.
ELEC
Check the brake light switch. OK FAULTY Replace the brake light switch.
Check the load control relay. Refer to LIGHTING SYSTEM. OK FAULTY Replace the load control relay.
Check the signal system wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. OK FAULTY Properly connect or repair the signal system wiring.
Correct the connection and/or replace the tail/brake light, rectifier/regulator, and/or ECU.
8-32
SIGNAL SYSTEM
ELEC
LOW COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR LIGHT, COOLANT TEMPERATURE WARNING INDICATOR AND/OR WARNING LIGHT DO NOT COME ON.
Check the coolant temperature sensor. OK FAULTY Replace the coolant temperature sensor.
8-33
SIGNAL SYSTEM
ELEC
FUEL METER AND/OR FUEL LEVEL WARNING INDICATOR AND/OR WARNING LIGHT DO NOT COME ON.
Check the fuel sender. OK FAULTY Replace the fuel sender.
8-34
SIGNAL SYSTEM
ELEC
OIL LEVEL WARNING INDICATOR AND/OR WARNING LIGHT DO NOT COME ON.
Check the oil level switch. OK FAULTY Replace the oil level switch.
8-35
SIGNAL SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER DOES NOT OPERATE.
ELEC
Check the speed sensor. OK FAULTY Replace the speed sensor.
8-36
SIGNAL SYSTEM
ELEC
BACK BUZZER DOES NOT SOUND. (FX10/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
Check the load control relay. Refer to LIGHTING SYSTEM. OK FAULTY Replace the load control relay.
Check the DC back buzzer. OK DOES NOT SOUND Replace the DC back buzzer.
Correct the connection and/or replace the rectifier/ regulator and/or ECU.
8-37
SIGNAL SYSTEM
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
ELEC
G L/R
1. Disconnect: Brake light switch coupler 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the brake light switch coupler) 3. Check: Brake light switch continuity Faulty Replace. Switch position Brake lever operates Brake lever does not operate Continuity Yes No
DC BACK BUZZER (FX10/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)

1. Disconnect: DC back buzzer coupler 2. Connect: Battery (to the DC back buzzer coupler) 3. Check: DC back buzzer Does not sound Replace.
8-38
SIGNAL SYSTEM
ELEC
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Remove the coolant temperature sensor.
CAUTION:
Handle the coolant temperature sensor with special care. Never subject it to shock or allow it to be dropped. If it is dropped, it must be replaced.
2. Connect: Pocket tester 1 (to the coolant temperature sensor)
NOTE:
Set the tester selector to the 1k position. 3. Immerse the coolant temperature sensor 2 in coolant 3 and check the coolant temperature sensor operation. Coolant temperature sensor resistance: 5.21 ~ 6.37 k at 0 C (32 F) 0.290 ~ 0.354 k at 80 C (176 F)
4 Thermometer
CAUTION:
Never heat the coolant to a temperature of 120 C (248 F) or more. 4. If the coolant temperature sensor operation is defective, replace it. 5. Install the coolant temperature sensor. Coolant temperature sensor: 23 Nm (2.3 m kg, 17 ft lb)
CAUTION:
Do not overtighten the coolant temperature sensor.
T.
R.
8-39
SIGNAL SYSTEM
OIL LEVEL SWITCH
Ch R/B
ELEC
1. Remove: Oil level switch 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the oil level switch coupler) 3. Check: Oil level switch continuity Faulty Replace. Switch position Down position Good condition Bad condition
Up position : Continuity : No continuity
FUEL SENDER
1. Remove: Fuel sender (from the fuel tank) 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the fuel sender coupler) 3. Measure: Fuel sender resistance (full a) Fuel sender resistance (empty b) Out of specification Replace. Fuel sender resistance (full): 10 ~ 12 at 20 C (68 F) Fuel sender resistance (empty): 179 ~ 185 at 20 C (68 F)
8-40
SIGNAL SYSTEM
SPEED SENSOR
1. Inspect: Speed sensor
ELEC
Inspection steps: Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the speed sensor coupler (wire harness side) as shown. Positive tester probe White Negative tester probe Black/Blue Positive battery terminal Blue Negative battery terminal Black/Blue Elevate the track and slowly rotate it. Measure the voltage (DC 5 V) of white and black/blue. With each full rotation of the track the voltage reading should cycle from 0.6 V to 4.8 V to 0.6 V to 4.8 V. Out of specification Replace.
8-41
GRIP WARMER SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
L/B G/B R/B R/L
P/W Y B/L L
R/G R/Y W/G P
P/L Br/L
(GRAY)
Gy
WIRE HARNESS
3
I J K J L J
O/G R/W (BLACK)
R /W R /G
Gy B/L
B Gy
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
B/L
R/G

G/Y L/R
L/B O B B G/B
R/B Gy/R O/G
L/W R/W
M
R/W R /L L/R
R/L L /R
(GRAY)
OFF ON START
1
W W W
R/L R/B
O
R/B R /L
(GRAY)
R /L A R /L
R/L
(BLACK)
R/L G/B
N
B
R R
5
R/G R/W
R R
R/G L/W R/W
B/Y Br/L G/Y
P Q
L/B R /L
R Br
R
0 A
L/W (BLACK) L/W L/W
R/W
R /L L /B (GRAY)
R/W
Y/R Lg L/Y Y/G
L/R R/L L Y W
R R
9 7 8
W B
Br
Br/L
W Br/L
R
B Lg
W
B/Y B B B/L Y/G
RUN STOP CLOSE OPEN
B F
Lg Br Br/W (BLACK)
Lg Ch Ch Y/R Y/R
C
(BLACK) Ch
Y B/L (BLACK)
L W B/L
Y/R
GRIP WARMER SYSTEM
L/R G
Lg
G B
e f d
L/R P
8-42
B B R/W Br (BLACK)
B B
r q p o n G
Y/R B
S
P O /R B/W L W B /L
O/B
L/W
L/R
Br/B
R/Y
(BLACK)
Lg
O/B
R/W Br/B
m E
B B
l
B
Br/B
R/G P/L W /G Br/L
T
R/Y R/Y
O/B B
G W/B
L G/Y
R/W
G/Y
E
R/Y A R/Y P/W A P/W
L P /W B/L L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
U
L/R F L/R P A P/B
P/W B/L L (BLACK)
L/R

L/R
V
G/W
P/B B/L L (BLACK)
L/W
j c
G L/R
HI LO
L/W
]
OFF ON
L/W
R/W E R/W
[
P Br
Lg L/W
Lg G B
W
B/L

B /L G B /L
(BLACK)
Br/W
P
X
Br/W B/L
_ a
G B
g
Y
L Y B
G L/R B
(BLACK)
\
B
B/L
ELEC
Y E Y
b
Ch Ch E Ch
Y Ch R/B (GRAY)
Ch Ch
(GREEN)
B B
Z
Ch G/B (GREEN)
B C B B F B
Y/W Ch Y/L
Y/L Y/W
Ch
Y /W Y /L B/L
GRIP WARMER SYSTEM GRIP WARMER SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
4 5 7 B D E H Y Main switch Main fuse Battery Engine stop switch Thumb warmer Grip warmer ECU (engine control unit) Grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch Z Frame ground d Multi-function meter n Ignition fuse
ELEC
8-43
GRIP WARMER SYSTEM

TROUBLESHOOTING
GRIP WARMER AND THUMB WARMER DO NOT OPERATE.
ELEC
Check the engine stop switch and main switch. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM. OK NO CONTINUITY Replace the right handlebar switch and/or main switch.
Check the grip warmer and thumb warmer. OK NO CONTINUITY Replace the grip warmer and/or thumb warmer.
Check the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch. CORRECT NO CONTINUITY Replace the left handlebar switch.
Check the grip warmer system wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. OK FAULTY Properly connect or repair the grip warmer system wiring.
8-44
GRIP WARMER SYSTEM
ELEC
GRIP WARMER AND THUMB WARMER
2
B W 1 + B B
1. Disconnect: Grip warmer couplers Thumb warmer coupler 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the grip warmer couplers and/or thumb warmer coupler) 3. Measure: Grip warmer resistance 1 Thumb warmer resistance 2 Out of specification Replace the defective part(s). Grip warmer resistance: 6.12 ~ 7.48 at 20 C (68 F) (Black Black) Thumb warmer resistance: 36.99 ~ 45.21 at 20 C (68 F) (White Black)
GRIP/THUMB WARMER ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Y/W Y/L B/L
1. Disconnect: Grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch coupler 2. Connect: Pocket tester (to the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch coupler) 3. Check: Grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch continuity Faulty Replace the left handlebar switch. Switch position THUMB OFF GRIP Continuity Color code Y/W B/L Y/L
8-45
COOLING SYSTEM
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
L/B G/B R/B R/L
P/W Y B/L L
R/G R/Y W/G P
P/L Br/L
(GRAY)
Gy
WIRE HARNESS
3
I J K J L J
O/G R/W (BLACK)
R /W R /G
Gy B/L
B Gy
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
B/L
R/G

G/Y L/R
L/B O B B G/B
R/B Gy/R O/G
L/W R/W
M
R/W R /L L/R
R/L L /R
(GRAY)
OFF ON START
1
W W W
R/L R/B
O
R/B R /L
(GRAY)
R /L A R /L
R/L
(BLACK)
R/L G/B
N
B
R R
5
R/G R/W
R R
R/G L/W R/W
B/Y Br/L G/Y
P Q
L/B R /L
R Br
R
0 A
L/W (BLACK) L/W L/W
R/W
R /L L /B (GRAY)
R/W
Y/R Lg L/Y Y/G
L/R R/L L Y W
R R
9 7 8
W B
Br
Br/L
W Br/L
R
B Lg
W
B/Y B B B/L Y/G
RUN STOP CLOSE OPEN
B F
Lg Br Br/W (BLACK)
Lg Ch Ch Y/R Y/R
C
(BLACK) Ch
Y B/L (BLACK)
L W B/L
Y/R
L/R G
Lg
G B
e f d
L/R P
8-46
B B R/W Br (BLACK)
B B
r q p o n G
Y/R B
S
P O /R B/W L W B /L
O/B
L/W
L/R
Br/B
R/Y
(BLACK)
Lg
O/B
R/W Br/B
m E
B B
l
B
Br/B
R/G P/L W /G Br/L
T
R/Y R/Y
O/B B
G W/B
L G/Y
R/W
G/Y
E
R/Y A R/Y P/W A P/W
L P /W B/L L
(BLACK) (BLACK)
U
L/R F L/R P A P/B
P/W B/L L (BLACK)
L/R

L/R
V
G/W
P/B B/L L (BLACK)
L/W
COOLING SYSTEM
j c
G L/R
HI LO
L/W
]
OFF ON
L/W
R/W E R/W
[
P Br
Lg L/W
Lg G B
W
B/L

B /L G B /L
(BLACK)
Br/W
P
X
Br/W B/L
_ a
G B
g
Y
L Y B
G L/R B
(BLACK)
\
B
B/L
ELEC
Y E Y
b
Ch Ch E Ch
Y Ch R/B (GRAY)
Ch Ch
(GREEN)
B B
Z
Ch G/B (GREEN)
B C B B F B
Y/W Ch Y/L
Y/L Y/W
Ch
Y /W Y /L B/L
COOLING SYSTEM COOLING SYSTEM

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
4 5 7 B H W Z k l n o Main switch Main fuse Battery Engine stop switch ECU (engine control unit) Coolant temperature sensor Frame ground Radiator fan motor Radiator fan motor relay Ignition fuse Radiator fan motor fuse
ELEC
8-47
COOLING SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
THE RADIATOR FAN MOTOR DOES NOT MOVE
ELEC
Check the main fuse, ignition fuse, and radiator fan motor fuse. Refer to FUSE INSPECTION in CHAPTER 2. OK FAULTY Replace the main fuse, ignition fuse, and/or radiator fan motor fuse.
Check the engine stop switch and main switch. Refer to IGNITION SYSTEM. OK NO CONTINUITY Replace the right handlebar switch and/or main switch.
Check the radiator fan motor. OK FAULTY Replace the radiator fan motor.
Check the radiator fan motor relay. OK FAULTY Replace the radiator fan motor relay.
Check the coolant temperature sensor. Refer to SIGNAL SYSTEM. OK FAULTY Replace the coolant temperature sensor.
Check the cooling system wiring. Refer to CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. OK FAULTY Properly connect or repair the cooling system wiring.
Correct the connection and/or replace the ECU.
8-48
COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR
ELEC
1. Disconnect: Radiator fan motor coupler 2. Connect: Battery (to the radiator fan motor coupler) 3. Inspect: Radiator fan motor Positive battery terminal Blue 1 Negative battery terminal Black 2 Does not move Replace the radiator fan motor.
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR RELAY

1. Remove: Radiator fan motor relay Inspection steps: Connect the pocket tester ( 1) and battery (12 V) to the radiator fan motor relay terminals as shown. Positive battery terminal Red/White 1 Negative battery terminal Green/Yellow 2 Positive tester probe Brown/Black 3 Negative tester probe Blue 4 If radiator fan motor relay does not have continuity between the brown/black and blue terminals, replace it.
8-49
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPEC
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Model code number: FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 8GL1 (FX10 USA/Canada) 8GL2 (FX10 Europe) 8HJ1 (FX10RT USA/Canada) 8HB1 (FX10RTR USA/Canada) 8HB2 (FX10RTR Europe) 8HB3 (FX10RTRA USA/Canada) 8HB4 (FX10RTRA Europe) 8HA1 (FX10MT USA) 8HA5 (FX10MTR USA/Canada) 8HA6 (FX10MTR Europe) 8HA7 (FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 8HA8 (FX10MTRA Europe) 2,815 mm (110.8 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 3,240 mm (127.6 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 1,205 mm (47.4 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 1,225 mm (48.2 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 1,160 mm (45.7 in) 233.0 kg (513.7 lb) (FX10RT) 236.0 kg (520.3 lb) (FX10RTR USA/Canada/FX10RTRA USA/Canada) 237.0 kg (522.5 lb) (FX10 USA/Canada/FX10RTR Europe/FX10RTRA Europe) 238.0 kg (524.7 lb) (FX10 Europe) 247.0 kg (544.5 lb) (FX10MT) 251.0 kg (553.4 lb) (FX10MTR USA/Canada/FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 252.0 kg (555.6 lb) (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 3.8 m (12.47 ft) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 4.1 m (13.45 ft) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 3.8 m (12.47 ft) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 4.1 m (13.45 ft) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
Dimensions: Overall length
Overall width
Overall height Weight: Dry weight
Minimum turning radius: Clockwise Counterclockwise
9-1
Model Engine: Engine type Cylinder arrangement Displacement Bore stroke Compression ratio Maximum hose power r/min Maximum torque r/min Vacuum pressure at engine idling speed Standard compression pressure (at sea level) Starting system Lubrication system: Engine oil: Type Recommended grade Oil capacity Periodic oil change With oil filter cartridge replacement Total amount Oil tank capacity Oil filter: Oil filter type Drive chain oil: Type Capacity Coolant: Radiator cap opening pressure Capacity
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA Liquid-cooled, 4-stroke, DOHC Backward-inclined parallel 3-cylinder 1,049.0 cm3 82.0 66.2 mm (3.23 2.61 in) 11.0 : 1 8,750 r/min 7,000 r/min 25.37 ~ 28.03 kPa (0.25 ~ 0.28 kg/cm2, 3.61 ~ 3.99 psi) 1,500 kPa (15.0 kg/cm2, 213.3 psi) at 400 r/min Electric starter Dry sump YAMALUBE 4-S (0W-30) or SAE 0W-30 (USA/Canada) SAE 0W-30 (Europe) API service SG type or higher, JASO standard MA 3.00 L (2.64 Imp qt, 3.17 US qt) 3.20 L (2.82 Imp qt, 3.38 US qt) 3.90 L (3.43 Imp qt, 4.12 US qt) 2.70 L (2.38 Imp qt, 2.85 US qt) Cartridge (paper) Gear oil GL-3 75W or 80W 0.20 L (0.18 Imp qt, 0.21 US qt) 107.9 ~ 137.3 kPa (1.08 ~ 1.37 kg/cm2, 15.3 ~ 19.5 psi) 3.40 L (2.99 Imp qt, 3.59 US qt) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 4.70 L (4.14 Imp qt, 4.97 US qt) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Regular unleaded gasoline only Pump Octane (R + M)/2; 86 or higher (USA/Canada) Research Octane; 91 or higher (Europe) 28.0 L (6.16 Imp gal, 7.40 US gal) 41EIDW 2 MIKUNI CR9E NGK 0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.031 in)
Fuel: Type
Tank capacity Throttle body: Type/Quantity Manufacture Spark plug: Type Manufacture Gap
9
9-2
Model Transmission: Primary reduction system Primary reduction ratio Clutch type Secondary reduction system Secondary reduction ratio
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA V-Belt 3.80 ~ 1.00 : 1 Automatic centrifugal engagement Chain 1.86 (39/21) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 1.82 (40/22) (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 2.00 (40/20) (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada) No (FX10RT/FX10MT) Yes (FX10/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 2.38 (FX10/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 2.50 (FX10MTR USA/Canada/FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 2.27 (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) Monocoque 23.0 1,050 mm (41.3 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 980 mm (38.6 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Double wishbone Slide rail suspension Molded rubber, fiberglass-rod reinforced Internal drive type 381.0 mm (15.00 in) 810 mm (31.9 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 1,092 mm (43.0 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 25.0 ~ 30.0 mm (0.98 ~ 1.18 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 30.0 ~ 35.0 mm (1.18 ~ 1.38 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Hydraulic disc type (ventilated disc) Handle lever, left hand operated T.C.I. AC magneto
Reverse system
Reverse gear ratio
Chassis: Frame type Caster Ski stance (center to center) Suspension: Front suspension type Rear suspension type Track: Material Track type Track width Length on ground Track deflection mm/100 N (10 kg, 22 lb)
Brake: Brake type Operation method Electrical: Ignition system Generator system
9-3
Model Headlight bulb type: Bulb wattage Quantity: Headlight Tail/brake light Meter light Warning light High beam indicator light Low coolant temperature indicator light
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA Halogen bulb 12 V, 60/55 W 2 LED LED LED LED LED
9-4
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE
Model Cylinder head: Volume (with spark plug) <Warpage limit>
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 25.21 ~ 26.01 cm3 (1.54 ~ 1.59 cu.in) 0.10 mm (0.0039 in) Lines indicate straight edge measurement.
Cylinder: Material Bore size <Taper limit> <Out of round> Camshaft: Drive system Camshaft cap inside diameter Camshaft journal diameter Camshaft-journal-to-camshaft-cap clearance Camshaft lobe dimensions Intake A <Limit> B A <Limit> Exhaust A <Limit> B B <Limit> Camshaft runout
Aluminum alloy with dispersion coating 82.000 ~ 82.010 mm (3.2283 ~ 3.2287 in) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in) Chain drive (right) 24.500 ~ 24.521 mm (0.9646 ~ 0.9654 in) 24.459 ~ 24.472 mm (0.9630 ~ 0.9635 in) 0.028 ~ 0.062 mm (0.0011 ~ 0.0024 in)
34.350 ~ 34.450 mm (1.3524 ~ 1.3563 in) 34.250 mm (1.3484 in) 24.950 ~ 25.050 mm (0.9823 ~ 0.9862 in) 24.850 mm (0.9783 in) 33.950 ~ 34.050 mm (1.3366 ~ 1.3406 in) 33.850 mm (1.3327 in) 24.950 ~ 25.050 mm (0.9823 ~ 0.9862 in) 24.850 mm (0.9783 in) 0.030 mm (0.0012 in)
Timing chain: Model/Number of links Tensioning system
98XRH2010/140 Automatic
9-5
MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Model Valves, valve seats, valve guides: Valve clearance (cold) Intake Exhaust Valve dimensions Valve head diameter A Intake A Exhaust Valve face width B Intake Exhaust Valve seat width C Intake Exhaust Valve margin thickness D Intake Exhaust Valve stem diameter Intake <Limit> Exhaust <Limit> Valve guide inside diameter Intake <Limit> Exhaust <Limit> Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance Intake <Limit> Exhaust <Limit> Valve stem runout limit
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA
0.15 ~ 0.22 mm (0.0059 ~ 0.0087 in) 0.21 ~ 0.25 mm (0.0083 ~ 0.0098 in)
30.90 ~ 31.10 mm (1.2165 ~ 1.2244 in) 25.90 ~ 26.10 mm (1.0197 ~ 1.0276 in)
B
1.90 ~ 2.62 mm (0.0748 ~ 0.1031 in) 1.90 ~ 2.62 mm (0.0748 ~ 0.1031 in) 0.90 ~ 1.10 mm (0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) 0.90 ~ 1.10 mm (0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) 0.80 ~ 1.20 mm (0.0315 ~ 0.0472 in) 0.50 ~ 0.90 mm (0.0197 ~ 0.0354 in) 4.475 ~ 4.490 mm (0.1762 ~ 0.1768 in) 4.445 mm (0.1750 in) 4.460 ~ 4.475 mm (0.1756 ~ 0.1762 in) 4.430 mm (0.1744 in) 4.500 ~ 4.512 mm (0.1772 ~ 0.1776 in) 4.550 mm (0.1791 in) 4.500 ~ 4.512 mm (0.1772 ~ 0.1776 in) 4.550 mm (0.1791 in) 0.010 ~ 0.037 mm (0.0004 ~ 0.0015 in) 0.080 mm (0.0031 in) 0.025 ~ 0.052 mm (0.0010 ~ 0.0020 in) 0.100 mm (0.0039 in) 0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
Valve seat width Intake <Limit> Exhaust <Limit>
0.90 ~ 1.10 mm (0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) 1.6 mm (0.0630 in) 0.90 ~ 1.10 mm (0.0354 ~ 0.0433 in) 1.6 mm (0.0630 in)
9-6
Model Valve spring: Free length Intake <Limit> Exhaust <Limit> Installed length (valve closed) Intake Exhaust Compressed spring force (installed) Intake Exhaust Spring tilt Intake Exhaust Winding direction (top view) Intake Exhaust Valve lifter: Valve lifter outside diameter Intake <Limit> Exhaust <Limit> Valve lifter hole inside diameter Intake <Limit> Exhaust <Limit> Piston: Piston size (D) Measuring point (H) D Piston to-cylinder clearance <Limit> Piston pin bore off set Off-set direction Piston pin bore inside diameter <Limit> Piston pin: Piston pin outside diameter <Limit> Piston pin length Piston pin to piston pin bore clearance <Limit>
SPEC
39.57 mm (1.56 in) 37.59 mm (1.48 in) 39.57 mm (1.56 in) 37.59 mm (1.48 in) 34.60 mm (1.36 in) 34.60 mm (1.36 in) 112.30 ~ 129.30 N (11.45 ~ 13.18 kg, 25.24 ~ 29.07 lb) 112.30 ~ 129.30 N (11.45 ~ 13.18 kg, 25.24 ~ 29.07 lb) 2.5/1.7 mm (2.5/0.07 in) 2.5/1.7 mm (2.5/0.07 in) Clockwise Clockwise
26.482 ~ 26.488 mm (1.0426 ~ 1.0428 in) 26.457 mm (1.0416 in) 26.482 ~ 26.488 mm (1.0426 ~ 1.0428 in) 26.457 mm (1.0416 in) 26.500 ~ 26.518 mm (1.0433 ~ 1.0440 in) 26.548 mm (1.0452 in) 26.500 ~ 26.518 mm (1.0433 ~ 1.0440 in) 26.548 mm (1.0452 in) 81.950 ~ 81.965 mm (3.2264 ~ 3.2270 in) 11.0 mm (0.43 in) 0.035 ~ 0.060 mm (0.0014 ~ 0.0024 in) 0.120 mm (0.0047 in) 0.5 mm (0.020 in) Exhaust side 19.004 ~ 19.015 mm (0.7482 ~ 0.7486 in) 19.045 mm (0.7498 in) 18.991 ~ 19.000 mm (0.7477 ~ 0.7480 in) 18.971 mm (0.7469 in) 52.7 ~ 53.0 mm (2.07 ~ 2.09 in) 0.004 ~ 0.024 mm (0.0002 ~ 0.0009 in) 0.074 mm (0.0029 in)
9-7
Model Piston ring: Top ring B Ring type T Dimensions (B T) 2nd ring B T Top ring (same or no) Ring type Dimensions (B T) B Oil ring T Dimensions (B T) End gap (installed) Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring Side clearance (installed) Top ring 2nd ring Oil ring Plating/coating Top ring 2nd ring Connecting rod: Small end diameter Big end diameter Crankshaft-pin-to-big-end-bearing clearance Bearing color code Crank pin: Crank pin outside diameter Crankshaft:
C C
SPEC
Barrel 1.00 2.80 mm (0.039 0.110 in) No Taper 1.00 2.90 mm (0.039 0.114 in) 1.50 2.50 mm (0.059 0.098 in) 0.33 ~ 0.45 mm (0.013 ~ 0.018 in) 0.70 ~ 0.85 mm (0.028 ~ 0.033 in) 0.20 ~ 0.60 mm (0.008 ~ 0.024 in) 0.030 ~ 0.070 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0028 in) 0.020 ~ 0.060 mm (0.0008 ~ 0.0024 in) 0.040 ~ 0.110 mm (0.0016 ~ 0.0043 in) Chrome plated/parkerizing Parkerizing 19.005 ~ 19.027 mm (0.7482 ~ 0.7491 in) 41.000 ~ 41.018 mm (1.6142 ~ 1.6149 in) 0.033 ~ 0.050 mm (0.0013 ~ 0.0020 in) 0 = White 1 = Blue 2 = Black 3 = Brown 4 = Green 5 = Yellow 37.976 ~ 38.000 mm (1.4951 ~ 1.4961 in)
A B
Measuring point 1 Measuring point 2 Width A Width B Crankshaft runout C Big end side clearance D Crankshaft-journal-to-crankshaft-journalbearing clearance Bearing color code
62.0 mm (2.44 in) 100.0 mm (3.94 in) 62.25 ~ 62.65 mm (2.45 ~ 2.47 in) 234.65 ~ 235.65 mm (9.24 ~ 9.28 in) 0.03 mm (0.0012 in) 0.160 ~ 0.262 mm (0.0063 ~ 0.0103 in) 0.027 ~ 0.045 mm (0.0011 ~ 0.0018 in) 2 = Black 3 = Brown 4 = Green 5 = Yellow 6 = Pink 7 = Red 8 = White
9-8
Model Throttle body: Type Quantity Manufacturer I.D. mark Throttle valve (Th.V) Throttle cable free play Engine idle speed Fuel pump: Type Model/Manufacturer Oil filter: Oil filter type Bypass valve opening pressure Oil pump: Oil pump type Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clearance Relief valve operating pressure Oil pressure (hot) Cooling system: Radiator cap opening pressure Thermostat opening temperature Valve lift Water pump type Coolant type Coolant mixing ratio (coolant: water) Capacity
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 41EIDW 2 MIKUNI 8GL1 00 818-41005-100 ( = 10) 3.0 ~ 4.0 mm (0.12 ~ 0.16 in) 1,450 ~ 1,550 r/min Electrical 8GL/DENSO Cartridge (paper) 78 ~ 118 kPa (0.78 ~ 1.18 kg/cm2, 11.1 ~ 16.8 psi) Trochoidal 0.090 ~ 0.150 mm (0.0035 ~ 0.0059 in) 0.030 ~ 0.080 mm (0.0012 ~ 0.0032 in) 440 ~ 560 kPa (4.40 ~ 5.60 kg/cm2, 63.8 ~ 81.2 psi) 50.0 kPa (0.50 kg/cm2, 7.3 psi) at 1,400 r/min 107.9 ~ 137.3 kPa (1.08 ~ 1.37 kg/cm2, 15.3 ~ 19.5 psi) 69.0 ~ 73.0 C (156.2 ~ 163.4 F) 8.0 mm/85.0 C (0.31 in/185.0 F) Single-suction centrifugal pump (Impeller type) High-quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing corrosion inhibitors 3 : 2 (60% : 40%) 3.40 L (2.99 Imp qt, 3.59 US qt) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 4.70 L (4.14 Imp qt, 4.97 US qt) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
Max. impeller shaft tilt
9-9
POWER TRAIN
Model Transmission: Type Range of ratio Engagement speed r/min
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA V-belt automatic 3.80 ~ 1.00 : 1 3,550 ~ 3,950 r/min (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 3,300 ~ 3,700 r/min (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 3,100 ~ 3,500 r/min (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 8,500 ~ 9,000 r/min 267.0 ~ 270.0 mm (10.51 ~ 10.63 in) 13.5 ~ 16.5 mm (0.53 ~ 0.65 in) 1.0 ~ 2.0 mm (0.04 ~ 0.08 in) 35.0 ~ 35.8 mm (1.38 ~ 1.41 in) 0.5 ~ 1.5 mm (0.02 ~ 0.06 in) 8DN-17641-01/MITSUBOSHI 1,129 ~ 1,137 mm (44.4 ~ 44.8 in) 34.1 mm (1.34 in) 32.5 mm (1.28 in) 90501-582L1 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 90501-603L3 (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 90501-580A2 (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) Yellow-Silver-Yellow (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) Green-White-Green (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada) Blue-Brown-Blue (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 59.5 mm (2.34 in) 5.8 mm (0.228 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/ FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 6.0 mm (0.236 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 343 N (34.98 kg, 77.11 lb) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) 441 N (44.97 kg, 99.14 lb) (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/ Canada/FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 490 N (49.96 kg, 110.15 lb) (FX10MTR Europe/ FX10MTRA Europe) 24.5 N/mm (2.50 kg/mm, 139.89 lb/in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 27.0 N/mm (2.75 kg/mm, 154.18 lb/in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 19.6 N/mm (2.00 kg/mm, 111.91 lb/in) (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe)
Shift r/min Sheave distance Sheave offset Secondary sheave free play (clearance) Secondary sheave clearance V-belt height (standard) V-belt: Part number/Manufacturer Circumference Width A Wear limit B Primary sheave spring: Part number
Color code
Diameter Wire diameter
Preload
Spring rate
9-10
Model Number of coils
SPEC
Free length
Set length Primary sheave weight arm: Part number (with bush) Weight (without bush and rivets)
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 4.92 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 5.08 (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 5.64 (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 87.4 mm (3.44 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 89.8 mm (3.54 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 98.4 mm (3.87 in) (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 73.4 mm (2.89 in) 8GL-17605-00 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 8FS-17605-00 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 49.43 g (1.745 oz) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 65.52 g (2.313 oz) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Rivet None (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 90261-06015 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 90261-06033 (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) Steel 10.3 mm (0.406 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 17.2 mm (0.677 in) (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 3 pcs 3 pcs None (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 90261-06033 Steel 17.2 mm (0.677 in) 3 pcs 3 pcs None (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 90261-06033 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 90266-06002 (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) Steel (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) Steel with hole (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 17.2 mm (0.677 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 13.3 mm (0.524 in) (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 3 pcs 3 pcs
Additional weight type Rivet: Outer Part number Material Size
Quantity Hole quantity Center Part number Material Size Quantity Hole quantity Inner Part number Material Size
Quantity Hole quantity
9-11
Model Secondary sheave spring: Part number Color code Outside diameter Wire diameter Hole position Sheave side-spring seat side (twist angle)
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 90508-60012 Pink 69.5 mm (2.74 in) 6.0 mm (0.236 in) 2-6 (80) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 1-6 (70) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
Spring rate Compression Torsion Number of coils Free length Torque cam angle Drive chain: Type Model/Manufacturer
12.3 N/mm (1.25 kg/mm, 70.23 lb/in) 11,876 N mm/rad (1,211 kg mm/rad, 67,811 lb in/rad) 5.53 75.0 mm (2.95 in) 43 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 39 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Silent chain enclosed in both 23RH303-68ASM/Borg Warner Automotive (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 23RH303-70ASM/Borg Warner Automotive (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 68L (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/ FX10MTR USA/Canada FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 70L (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 1.86 (39/21) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 1.82 (40/22) (FX10MTR Europe/FX10MTRA Europe) 2.00 (40/20) (FX10MT/FX10MTR USA/Canada/ FX10MTRA USA/Canada) 133.35 mm (5.25 in) 137.35 mm (5.41 in)
Number of links
Secondary reduction ratio
Maximum 14 link drive chain section length <Limit>
9-12
Model Track: Part number Width Length
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 8FA-47110-00 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 8HA-47110-00 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 381.0 mm (15.0 in) 3,072.4 mm (120.96 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 3,886.2 mm (153.00 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 64.0 mm (2.52 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 76.2 mm (3.00 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 48 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 51 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 5.1 mm (0.20 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 5.5 mm (0.22 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 31.8 mm (1.25 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 57.2 mm (2.25 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 25.0 ~ 30.0 mm (0.98 ~ 1.18 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 30.0 ~ 35.0 mm (1.18 ~ 1.38 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 205.0 mm (8.07 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 183.0 mm (7.20 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 368.0 mm (14.49 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 356.0 mm (14.02 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 25.0 N/mm (2.55 kg/mm, 142.7 lb/in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 45.0 N/mm (4.59 kg/mm, 257.0 lb/in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 1,900 N mm/deg (193.7 kg mm/deg, 10,848.8 lb in/deg) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 1,300 N mm/deg (132.6 kg mm/deg, 7,422.9 lb in/deg) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 7.8 mm (0.31 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 9.0 mm (0.35 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 10.3 mm (0.41 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 10.0 mm (0.39 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
Pitch Number of links Thickness A Height B Track deflection at 100 N (10 kg, 22 lb)
Slide rail suspension (rear suspension): Front travel Rear travel Suspension spring rate Front
Rear
Suspension wire diameter Front Rear
9-13
Model Shock absorber: Damping force Front Extension
SPEC
Compression
1,373 N/0.3 m/s (140.0 kg/0.3 m/s, 308.6 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 USA/Canada) 1,359 N/0.3 m/s (138.6 kg/0.3 m/s, 305.5 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 Europe) 1,346 N/0.3 m/s (137.2 kg/0.3 m/s, 302.6 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 620 N/0.3 m/s (63.2 kg/0.3 m/s, 139.4 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 410 N/0.3 m/s (41.8 kg/0.3 m/s, 92.2 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 USA/Canada) 891 N/0.3 m/s (90.9 kg/0.3 m/s, 200.3 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 Europe) 831 N/0.3 m/s (84.7 kg/0.3 m/s, 186.8 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10RT/FX10RTR USA/Canada/FX10RTRA USA/Canada) 1,180 N/0.3 m/s (120.3 kg/0.3 m/s, 265.3 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10RTR Europe/FX10RTRA Europe) 990 N/0.3 m/s (100.9 kg/0.3 m/s, 222.6 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 1,244 N/0.3 m/s (126.8 kg/0.3 m/s, 279.6 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 USA/Canada) 2,207 N/0.3 m/s (225.0 kg/0.3 m/s, 496.1 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 Europe) 1,682 N/0.3 m/s (171.5 kg/0.3 m/s, 378.1 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10RT/FX10RTR USA/Canada/FX10RTRA USA/Canada) 1,993 N/0.3 m/s (203.2 kg/0.3 m/s, 448.0 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10RTR Europe/FX10RTRA Europe) 840 N/0.3 m/s (85.7 kg/0.3 m/s, 188.8 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 694 N/0.3 m/s (70.8 kg/0.3 m/s, 156.0 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 USA/Canada) 952 N/0.3 m/s (97.1 kg/0.3 m/s, 214.0 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 Europe) 578 N/0.3 m/s (58.9 kg/0.3 m/s, 129.9 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10RT/FX10RTR USA/Canada/FX10RTRA USA/Canada) 1,301 N/0.3 m/s (132.7 kg/0.3 m/s, 292.5 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10RTR Europe/FX10RTRA Europe) 440 N/0.3 m/s (44.9 kg/0.3 m/s, 98.9 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
Rear Extension
Compression
9-14
Model Slide runner: Thickness Wear limit Track sprocket wheel: Material Number of teeth Rear guide wheel: Material Outside diameter Brake: Recommended brake fluid Pad thickness Pad wear limit Pad to disc clearance Parking brake pad wear limit Parking brake cable distance Disc outside diameter Disc thickness Disc minimum thickness
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 18.3 mm (0.72 in) 10.5 mm (0.41 in) Ultra high molecular weight polyethylene 9 T (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 7 T (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) High molecular weight polyethylene with rubber 178.0 mm (7.01 in) DOT 4 10.2 mm (0.40 in) 1.5 mm (0.06 in) 0.025 ~ 0.115 mm (0.0010 ~ 0.0045 in) 1.2 mm (0.047 in) 43.5 ~ 46.5 mm (1.713 ~ 1.831 in) 200.0 mm (7.87 in) 4.0 mm (0.16 in) 3.5 mm (0.14 in)
9-15
CHASSIS
Model Frame: Frame material Seat height Luggage box location Steering: Lock-to-lock angle
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA Aluminum and Steel 770.0 mm (30.31 in) Front (left) (right) 29.6 (R ski) 35.6 (L ski) 35.6 (R ski) 29.6 (L ski) Toe-out 0 ~ 15 mm (0 ~ 0.59 in) 23.0 1,050 mm (41.3 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 980 mm (38.6 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Plastic 1,021.0 mm (40.20 in) 132.0 mm (5.20 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 182.0 mm (7.17 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Steel No 8 mm (0.31 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 6 mm (0.24 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 12 mm (0.47 in) (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 13 mm (0.51 in) (FX10) 24 mm (0.95 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 216.0 mm (8.50 in) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 225.0 mm (8.86 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Coil spring (FX10/FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Air spring (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 25.0 N/mm (2.55 kg/mm, 142.7 lb/in) (FX10) 17.0 N/mm (1.73 kg/mm, 97.07 lb/in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 517.0 kPa (5.2 kg/cm2, 75.0 psi) (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 8.8 mm (0.346 in) (FX10) 7.8 mm (0.307 in) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
Ski alignment Toe-out size Caster angle Ski stance (center to center) Ski: Ski material Length Width Ski runner material Ski cover Ski runner wear limit Plastic ski wear limit
Ski suspension (front suspension): Travel Spring type Spring rate
Wire diameter
9-16
Model Shock absorber: Damping force Extension
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 1,371 N/0.3 m/s (139.8 kg/0.3 m/s, 308.2 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 USA/Canada) 1,334 N/0.3 m/s (137.1 kg/0.3 m/s, 302.1 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 Europe) 1,290 N/0.3 m/s (131.5 kg/0.3 m/s, 290.0 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 1,704 N/0.3 m/s (173.8 kg/0.3 m/s, 383.1 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 612 N/0.3 m/s (62.4 kg/0.3 m/s, 137.6 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 USA/Canada) 755 N/0.3 m/s (77.0 kg/0.3 m/s, 169.7 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10 Europe) 691 N/0.3 m/s (70.5 kg/0.3 m/s, 155.3 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 498 N/0.3 m/s (50.8 kg/0.3 m/s, 112.0 lb/0.3 m/s) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
Compression
9-17
ELECTRICAL
Model Voltage Ignition system: Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) Advanced type Ignition coil: Model/Manufacturer Ignition spark gap Primary coil resistance Secondary coil resistance Charging system: Type Nominal output DC-T.C.I.: Magneto model/Manufacturer Standard Stator coil resistance (color code) ECU model/Manufacturer
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 12 V 5.0 at 1,500 r/min Digital type F6T558/MITSUBISHI 6.0 mm (0.24 in) 1.19 ~ 1.61 at 20 C (68 F) 8.5 ~ 11.5 k at 20 C (68 F) AC magneto 14 V/less than 35 A at 5,000 r/min F074T39771/MITSUBISHI 14 V 32.8 A, 460 W at 5,000 r/min 0.22 ~ 0.26 at 20 C (68 F) (White White) F8T84071/MITSUBISHI (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) F8T84073/MITSUBISHI (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Short circuit type FH012AA/SHINDENGEN 14.2 ~ 14.8 V 50.0 A 40.0 V YUASA YTX20L-BS 12 V, 18.0 Ah 1.8 A Constant mesh type 8GL/YAMAHA 0.95 kW 0.0081 ~ 0.0099 at 20 C (68 F) Above 1 M at 20 C (68 F) 9.8 mm (0.39 in) 4.4 mm (0.17 in) 7.36 ~ 11.04 N (750 ~ 1,126 g, 26.49 ~ 39.74 oz) 28.0 mm (1.10 in) 27.0 mm (1.06 in) 1.0 mm (0.04 in) MS5F-571/JIDECO 180 A 4.18 ~ 4.62 at 20 C (68 F)
9-18
Rectifier/regulator: Type Model/Manufacturer No load regulated voltage (DC) Capacity (DC) Withstand voltage Battery: Manufacturer Model Voltage, capacity Ten hour rate amperage Electric starter system: Type Starter motor: Model/Manufacturer Output Armature coil resistance Continuity check Insulation check Brush Overall length <Wear limit> Spring pressure Commutator diameter <Wear limit> Mica undercut Starter relay: Model/Manufacturer Amperage rating Coil resistance
Model T.P.S. (throttle position sensor): Model/Manufacturer Resistance Oil level switch: Model/Manufacturer Fuel sender: Model/Manufacturer Sender resistance (full) (empty) Fuel injection system relay: Model/Manufacturer Coil resistance Headlight relay: Model/Manufacturer Coil resistance Grip warmer: Heater resistance (left) (right) Thumb warmer: Heater resistance Fuse: Main fuse Fuel injection system fuse Headlight fuse Signal fuse Ignition fuse Auxiliary DC jack fuse Radiator fan motor fuse Reserve fuse Reserve fuse Reserve fuse Coolant temperature sensor: Model/Manufacturer Resistance Speed sensor: Model/Manufacture Crankshaft position sensor: Model/Manufacture Resistance Intake air pressure sensor: Model/Manufacture Intake air temperature sensor: Model/Manufacture Resistance
SPEC
FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 8GL/ALPS 2.64 ~ 6.16 k at 20 C (68 F) (Blue Black/Blue) 8GL/ASTI 8GL/NIPPON SEIKI 10 ~ 12 at 20 C (68 F) 179 ~ 185 at 20 C (68 F) ACM33211 M11/MATSUSHITA 86.4 ~ 105.6 G8HN-1C4T-DJ/OMRON 94.5 ~ 115.5 at 20 C (68 F) 6.12 ~ 7.48 at 20 C (68 F) (Black Black) 6.12 ~ 7.48 at 20 C (68 F) (Black Black) 36.99 ~ 45.21 at 20 C (68 F) (White Black) 40 A 1 10 A 1 20 A 1 3A1 20 A 1 3 A 1 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 10 A 1 20 A 1 10 A 2 3A1 8CC/MITSUBISHI 5.21 ~ 6.37 k at 0 C (32 F) 0.290 ~ 0.354 k at 80 C (176 F) 8FP/NIPPON SEIKI 8GL/YAMAHA 336 ~ 504 at 20 C (68 F) (Gray Black) 2CO/DENSO 8FP/MITSUBISHI 290 ~ 390 at 80 C (176 F)
9-19
TIGHTENING TORQUE TIGHTENING TORQUE

ENGINE
Parts to be tightened Spark plug Cylinder head bolt (M10 1.25) Cylinder head bolt Cylinder head cover bolt Camshaft cap bolt Camshaft sprocket bolt Timing chain tensioner bolt Timing chain guide (exhaust and intake) bolt Cylinder head water jacket bolt Thermostat housing cover bolt Coolant temperature sensor Water pump assembly bolt Coolant reservoir bolt Radiator bolt Radiator cover bolt Radiator stay bolt Bleed bolt (heat exchanger) Oil cooler bolt Rear engine mounting bolt spacer Engine mounting nut Engine mounting bracket bolt Engine mounting bracket nut Front frame bolt Rear frame cross member Oil pan bolt Oil pan engine oil drain bolt Oil filter cartridge Oil pump assembly bolt Oil pump drive chain guide bolt Oil pump housing cover screw Oil pan divider screw Relief valve cover screw Oil pump driven gear bolt Oil tank engine oil drain bolt Oil tank bolt Oil pressure switch Oil check bolt Oil tank inlet pipe bolt Exhaust pipe joint bolt Muffler band bolt Exhaust pipe bolt Exhaust pipe band bolt Muffler bolt Muffler end cover bolt Muffler stay bolt Muffler cover nut Exhaust pipe joint cover bolt Tightening torque Nm m kg ft lb 13 1.3 9.4 See NOTE.*1 12 1.2 8.7 12 1.2 8.7 10 1.0 7.2 24 2.4 17 12 1.2 8.7 10 1.0 7.2 10 1.0 7.2 10 1.0 7.2 23 2.3 17 12 1.2 8.7 7 0.7 5.1 7 0.7 5.1 7 0.7 5.1 7 0.7 5.1 4 0.4 2.9 10 1.0 7.2 9 0.9 6.5 65 6.5 47 25 2.5 18 25 2.5 18 25 2.5 18 23 2.3 17 10 1.0 7.2 10 1.0 7.2 17 1.7 12 12 1.2 8.7 10 1.0 7.2 4 0.4 2.9 4 0.4 2.9 4 0.4 2.9 15 1.5 11 16 1.6 11 10 1.0 7.2 15 1.5 11 20 2.0 14 10 1.0 7.2 25 2.5 18 20 2.0 14 23 2.3 17 9 0.9 6.5 23 2.3 17 10 1.0 7.2 23 2.3 17 10 1.0 7.2 6 0.6 4.3
SPEC
Remarks
Apply the engine oil.
Apply the engine oil.
Apply LOCTITE
(FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Apply LOCTITE
Apply LOCTITE
9-20
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Parts to be tightened Crankcase bolt (M9 1.25) Crankcase bolt (M8 1.25) Crankcase bolt (M6 1.0) Crankcase bolt (M6 1.0) Tightening torque Nm m kg ft lb See NOTE.*2 24 2.4 17 12 1.2 8.7 12 1.2 8.7
SPEC
Remarks
Apply the engine oil. Apply the engine oil. Apply the engine oil. Black bolt Apply Yamaha bond No. 1215 (Three Bond No.1215) Apply the molybdenum disulfide oil. Apply LOCTITE Apply the engine oil. Apply LOCTITE Apply LOCTITE Apply LOCTITE Apply LOCTITE Apply LOCTITE
Primary sheave drive shaft assembly bolt Connecting rod nut Balancer weight (left and right) bolt Balancer shaft bearing retainer bolt AC magneto rotor bolt AC magneto rotor cover bolt (M6 1.0) 11 AC magneto rotor cover bolt (M6 1.0) 1 Starter clutch bolt Stator coil bolt Crankshaft position sensor bolt Stator coil lead holder bolt Air filter case bolt Air filter case joint clamp screw Throttle body joint clamp screw Starter motor bolt Starter motor lead nut Brush terminal nut Fuel pump nut Fuel sender bolt Fuel tank bolt Throttle cable locknut (throttle body side) Rectifier/regulator nut Rectifier/regulator bracket bolt Ground earth lead bolt (engine mounting bracket) Ground earth lead bolt (Rectifier/regulator bracket) Battery bracket bolt
12 1.2 8.7 See NOTE.*3 35 10 130 12 12 12 10 10 10 7 3 3 27 7 7 7 4 10 6 7 7 25 7 23 3.5 1.0 13.0 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.7 0.3 0.3 2.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.4 1.0 0.6 0.7 0.7 2.5 0.7 2.3 25 7.2 94 8.7 8.7 8.7 7.2 7.2 7.2 5.1 2.2 2.2 19 5.1 5.1 5.1 2.9 7.2 4.3 5.1 5.1 18 5.1 17
NOTE:
*1: Tighten the cylinder head bolts to 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) in the proper tightening sequence, loosen and retighten the cylinder head bolts to 25 Nm (2.5 m kg, 18 ft lb) in the proper tightening sequence, and then tighten the cylinder head bolts further to reach the specified angle 175 ~ 185 in the proper tightening sequence. *2: Tighten the crankcase bolts to 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb) in the proper tightening sequence, loosen and retighten the crankcase bolts to 15 Nm (1.5 m kg, 11 ft lb) in the proper tightening sequence, and then tighten the crankcase bolts further to reach the specified angle 65 ~ 70 in the proper tightening sequence. *3: Tighten the connecting rod nuts to 20 Nm (2.0 m kg, 14 ft lb), and then tighten the connecting rod nuts further to reach the specified angle 115 ~ 125.
9-21
TIGHTENING TORQUE
POWER TRAIN
Parts to be tightened Primary sheave bolt Spider and sliding sheave Primary sheave cap and sliding sheave bolt Roller and weight nut (primary sheave) Set bolt (primary sheave collar) Secondary sheave bolt Stopper screw (secondary sheave) Spring seat nut (secondary sheave) Secondary sheave adjusting bolt Drive chain adjusting locknut Drive chain cover bolt Drive chain cover bolt Driven sprocket nut Drive chain oil drain bolt Set bolt (secondary shaft collar) Shift lever assembly bolt Shift rod end locknut Shift lever assembly and shift rod nut Gear position shaft and shift rod nut Reverse drive gear shaft plate bolt Reverse driven gear bolt Counter gear bolt Bearing housing bolt Brake caliper bolt Brake caliper bleed screw Brake caliper retaining pin Screw plug Brake hose union bolt Parking brake assembly bolt Parking brake adjusting locknut Parking brake cable locknut Parking brake cable and parking brake lever bolt Brake master cylinder holder bolt Brake master cylinder holder and parking brake lever bolt Slide rail suspension mounting nut Slide rail suspension mounting bolt (M10) Slide rail suspension mounting bolt (M10) Stopper band nut
SPEC
Remarks m kg ft lb See NOTE. 200 20.0 145 Left-hand thread. Apply LOCTITE 14 1.4 10 6 0.6 4.3 4 0.4 2.9 Apply LOCTITE 64 6.4 46 7 0.7 5.1 23 2.3 17 10 1.0 7.2 25 2.5 18 28 2.8 20 10 1.0 7.2 Apply LOCTITE 90 9.0 65 (Without reverse model) 16 1.6 11 6 0.6 4.3 Apply LOCTITE 23 2.3 17 (With reverse model) 7 0.7 5.1 (With reverse model) 10 1.0 7.2 (With reverse model) 10 1.0 7.2 (With reverse model) 10 1.0 7.2 (With reverse model) Apply LOCTITE 55 5.5 40 (With reverse model) Apply LOCTITE 10 1.0 7.2 (With reverse model) Apply LOCTITE 30 3.0 22 48 4.8 35 6 0.6 4.3 17 1.7 12 2 0.2 1.4 30 3.0 22 10 1.0 7.2 15 1.5 11 6 0.6 4.3 10 1.0 7.2 10 1.0 7.2 23 2.3 17 Nm 60 69 72 4 6.0 6.9 7.2 0.4 43 50 52 2.9 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) Apply LOCTITE (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Apply LOCTITE
Tightening torque
9-22
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Parts to be tightened Slide runner and front pivot arm Shaft and sliding frame bolt Shaft and sliding frame bolt Shock absorber and front pivot arm nut Shock absorber and front suspension bracket nut Front pivot arm and front pivot arm bracket nut Front pivot arm bracket and sliding frame nut Front pivot arm and connecting arm nut Front pivot arm and sliding frame bolt Front suspension bracket and connecting arm nut Front suspension bracket, rear suspension bracket, shaft, and sliding frame bolt Front suspension bracket, shaft and sliding frame bolt Suspension wheel bolt Suspension wheel nut Suspension wheel and front pivot arm bracket bolt Wheel bracket, shaft, and sliding frame bolt Set bolt (wheel bracket) Set bolt (collar) Collar and sliding frame bolt Rear shock absorber and rear pivot arm nut Rear shock absorber and rear pivot arm nut Pull rod, rear shock absorber, and rear suspension bracket bolt Pull rod, rear shock absorber, and rear suspension bracket bolt Rear suspension bracket, shaft, and sliding frame Rear pivot arm and pull rod bolt Rear pivot arm and pull rod nut Rear shock absorber and rear pivot arm nut Rear pivot arm bracket and sliding frame bolt Rear pivot arm and rear pivot arm bracket bolt Rear pivot arm and control rod stopper nut Control rod adjusting locknut Tightening torque Nm 10 72 60 49 49 60 60 72 60 72 72 60 60 60 60 60 6 9 60 60 49 60 49 60 60 49 49 72 72 60 25
SPEC
Remarks m kg ft lb 1.0 7.2 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) Apply LOCTITE 7.2 52 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) Apply LOCTITE 6.0 43 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 4.9 35 4.9 35 6.0 43 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) 6.0 43 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) 7.2 52 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 6.0 43 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 7.2 52 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 7.2 52 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) Apply LOCTITE 6.0 43 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) Apply LOCTITE 6.0 43 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) 6.0 43 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 6.0 43 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) 6.0 43 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 0.6 4.3 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 0.9 6.5 6.0 43 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) 6.0 43 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) 4.9 35 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 6.0 43 (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) 4.9 35 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 6.0 6.0 4.9 4.9 7.2 7.2 6.0 2.5 43 43 35 35 52 52 43 18 (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) Apply LOCTITE (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) Apply LOCTITE (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) Apply LOCTITE (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) (FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA)
9-23
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Parts to be tightened Control rod shaft and sliding frame Rear axle nut Set bolt (front axle) Speed sensor Bearing holder (front axle) Bearing housing bolt Bearing housing bolt Gear unit (speed sensor) bolt Tightening torque Nm 72 75 9 24 24 30 24 40 m kg ft lb 7.2 52 7.5 54 0.9 6.5 2.4 17 2.4 17 3.0 22 2.4 17 4.0 29
SPEC
Remarks
(FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) Apply LOCTITE
Left side Right side
NOTE:
Tightening steps: 1. Tighten the bolt to a torque at 120 Nm (12.0 m kg, 85 ft lb). 2. Loosen the bolt completely. 3. Retighten the bolt to a torque of 60 Nm (6.0 m kg, 43 ft lb).
9-24
TIGHTENING TORQUE
CHASSIS
Parts to be tightened Headlight stay nut Front cover screw Lower cover bolt Front bumper bolt Seat bolt Rear upper cover screw Rear side cover bolt Tail/brake light assembly bolt Wind deflector bracket and wind deflector bolt Tightening torque Nm 4 7 7 23 23 7 8 7 7
SPEC
Handlebar holder bolt Steering joint holder bolt Steering column and rear frame cross member nut Steering column and front frame nut Steering shaft and steering column nut Steering shaft end locknut Steering shaft and pivot arm nut Pivot arm bolt Tie rod and pivot arm nut Tie rod and steering knuckle nut Tie rod end locknut Ski and steering knuckle nut Ski runner nut Ski and ski handle nut (M8 55) Ski and ski handle nut (M8 100) Shock absorber nut (upper) Shock absorber nut (lower) Upper arm ball joint and upper arm nut Upper arm and frame bolt Upper arm ball joint and steering knuckle bolt Lower arm and frame nut Lower arm and steering knuckle nut Stabilizer and stabilizer joint nut Stabilizer joint and lower arm nut Stabilizer holder bolt
23 23 23 23 35 25 35 67 35 28 25 48 19 12 17 45 45 90 45 45 65 65 45 34 34
Remarks m kg ft lb 0.4 2.9 0.7 5.1 0.7 5.1 2.3 17 2.3 17 0.7 5.1 0.8 5.8 0.7 5.1 0.7 5.1 Apply LOCTITE (FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA) 2.3 17 2.3 17 (FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 2.3 17 2.3 17 3.5 25 2.5 18 Apply LOCTITE 3.5 25 6.7 48 3.5 25 2.8 20 2.5 18 Apply LOCTITE 4.8 35 1.9 13 1.2 8.7 1.7 12 4.5 32 4.5 32 9.0 65 4.5 32 4.5 32 6.5 47 6.5 47 4.5 32 3.4 24 3.4 24
9-25
GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS/ DEFINITION OF UNITS GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

This chart specifies torque for standard fasteners with standard I.S.O. pitch threads. Torque specifications for special components or assemblies are included in the applicable sections of this book. To avoid warpage, tighten multi-fastener assemblies in a crisscross fashion, in progressive stages, until full torque is reached. Unless otherwise specified, torque specifications call for clean, dry threads. Components should be at room temperature. A (nut) 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm 17 mm 19 mm 22 mm B (bolt) 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm 14 mm 16 mm
SPEC
General torque specifications Nm 6 15 30 55 85 130 m kg 0.6 1.5 3.0 5.5 8.5 13.0 ft lb 4.3 11 22 40 61 94
A: Distance across flats B: Outside thread diameter
DEFINITION OF UNITS
Unit mm cm kg N Nm m kg Pa N/mm L cm3 r/min Read Millimeter Centimeter Kilogram Newton Newton meter Meter kilogram Pascal Newtons per millimeter Liter Cubic centimeter Rotations per minute
-3
Definition 10 meter 10-2 meter 103 gram 1 kg m/sec Nm m kg N/m2 N/mm

2
Measurement Length Length Weight Force Torque Torque Pressure Spring rate Volume or capacity Engine speed
9-26
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E F G H I J
6 l k j i h g 9 f e d c b a D
_ ] \ U [ V
K L M N O P Q R S T
W Y X
9-27
CABLE ROUTING CABLE ROUTING

1 2 3 4 5 6 ECU (engine control unit) Load control relay Headlight relay Fuel injection system relay Radiator fan motor relay Fasten the wire harness and stator coil lead to the front frame with the plastic band. To the left handlebar switch To the AC magneto To the radiator Main fuse Starter relay Coolant temperature sensor coupler Coolant temperature sensor sublead Fasten the wire harness at the positioning tape to the rear frame cross member with the plastic band. Oil tank breather hose To the main switch Oil level switch coupler Main switch coupler Thermostat outlet hose Fasten the wire harness to the frame rear cross member with the plastic band. Fasten the wire harness and fuel tank breather hose to the frame rear cross member. Fasten the hose protector of the fuel tank breather hose to the rear frame cross member with the plastic band, making sure to fasten it after the bend in the hose as shown in the illustration. Fuel tank breather hose The ends of the hose protector should be 20 mm (0.79 in) or less from each other. Fasten the fuel tank breather hose with the holder, making sure to position the portion of the hose from the fuel tank to the rear of the portion after the bend in the hose. Face the cutout in the hose joint flange downward. Bend the fuel tank breather hose as shown in the illustration, and then fasten it after the bend in the hose with the holder as shown in the illustration. Face the open ends of the holder toward the fuel tank.
SPEC
7 8 9 0 A B C D
E F G H I J
M N
P Q
9-28
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E F G H I J
6 l k j i h g 9 f e d c b a D
_ ] \ U [ V
K L M N O P Q R S T
W Y X
9-29
CABLE ROUTING
R Face the ends of each hose clamp toward the fuel tank. S Fuel sender coupler T Fasten the tail/brake light lead (wire harness side) to the frame rear cross member with the plastic band. U Tail/brake light coupler V Fuel pump lead W Fasten the tail/brake light lead with the holders, making sure to push the lead against the fuel tank. X Fuel hose connector holder Y Fuel hose Z Fasten the fuel hose and fuel pump lead with the plastic band. Align the plastic band with the positioning tape on the fuel pump lead and install it with its buckle facing toward the fuel tank. [ Be sure to install the fuel tank breather hose with its long end facing to the right. \ Face the ends of the hose clamp rearward. ] ISC (idling speed control) unit _ 20 ~ 40 mm (0.79 ~ 1.57 in) a Speed sensor coupler b Radiator fan motor coupler c Fuel injection system sub-wire harness coupler d Intake air pressure sensor 1 (cylinders #1, #2, and #3) e Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) f Fasten the wire harness, oil pressure switch sub-lead, and crankshaft position sensor lead to the frame rear cross member with the plastic band. g Cylinder head breather hose. h Fasten the coolant reservoir hose with the holder. i Intake air temperature sensor j Coolant reservoir hose k Fasten the wire harness, at the portion just before the leads split, to the front frame with the plastic band. l To the coolant reservoir m Install the ground lead terminal to the left side of the front frame, making sure to face the crimped portion of the terminal inward.
SPEC
9-30
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC
a _ ] \ [ Z Y X W V U T S R Q
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B A B C D E F
L K J I H
d e c
f d A B b
9-31
CABLE ROUTING
1 To the auxiliary DC jack (FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA) 2 Throttle cable 3 Radiator fan motor coupler 4 Wire harness 5 Fuel injection system sub-wire harness coupler 6 Speed sensor coupler 7 To the radiator fan motor 8 Fasten the speed sensor lead to the frame rear cross member with the plastic band. 9 Pass the auxiliary DC jack lead between the radiator fan motor lead and the fuel injection system sub-wire harness. (FX10MT/ FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) 0 Fuel tank breather hose A Fasten the speed sensor lead and fuel tank breather hose to the frame rear cross member with the plastic band, making sure not to pinch the hose. B Speed sensor lead C Fasten the speed sensor lead and fuel tank breather hose to the frame with a plastic locking tie, and then cut off the excess end of the tie. D Face the ends of the hose clamp rearward. E Install the fuel tank breather hose completely onto the hose joint, making sure that the end of the hose contacts the frame. F Fasten the corrugated tube of the speed sensor lead with the holders. G Speed sensor H Water pump inlet hose I Fasten the wire harness, at the portion just before the leads split, to the frame rear cross member with the plastic band. J Water pump outlet hose (to oil cooler) K Throttle body outlet hose L Water pump outlet hose (to water jacket) M Fasten the wire harness, oil pressure switch sub-lead, and crankshaft position sensor lead to the frame rear cross member with the plastic band. N Fasten the wire harness and stator coil lead to the front frame with the plastic band. O Stator coil lead
SPEC
9-32
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC
a _ ] \ [ Z Y X W V U T S R Q
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B A B C D E F
L K J I H
d e c
f d A B b
9-33
CABLE ROUTING
P Rectifier/regulator lead Q Rectifier/regulator R Route the coolant reservoir breather hose above the coolant reservoir check window. S ECU (engine control unit) T Fasten the coolant reservoir breather hose to the front frame with the plastic band, making sure not to pinch the hose. U Intake air temperature sensor V Route the wire harness above the intake air temperature sensor. W Fasten the wire harness, at the portion just before the leads split, to the headlight stay with the plastic band. X To the headlight (left) Y Slide the rubber coupler over the engine stop switch coupler, throttle switch couplers, right grip warmer coupler, and thumb warmer coupler. Z Pass the plastic band through the holes in the rubber cover, and then fasten the cover with the band, making sure that the band is not fastened over the projections at the top of the cover. [ To the headlight (right) \ Speedometer unit sub-lead coupler ] To the right handlebar switch _ To the speedometer unit a Route the fuel injection system sub-wire harness (to the throttle body) to the right of the radiator outlet hose. b 10 mm (0.39 in) c Radiator fan motor lead d To the wire harness e Ignition coils f Rearward
SPEC
9-34
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC
1 ] \ [ Z Y X W V
cd1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a b
9 0 A
B C D E F B B A A G H I
U T S R
J K
N M L
e 8 d g f
h A-A B-B
9-35
CABLE ROUTING
1 Fasten the wire harness to the frame rear cross member with the plastic band. Face the end of the plastic band downward. 2 Positive battery lead 3 Coolant reservoir hose 4 To the main switch 5 To the brake master cylinder 6 Brake hose 7 To the parking brake lever 8 Parking brake cable 9 To the left handlebar switch 0 Pass the plastic band through the holes in the rubber cover, and then fasten the cover with the band, making sure that the band is not fastened over the projections at the top of the cover. A Slide the rubber coupler over the grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch coupler, left grip warmer coupler, brake light switch coupler, and headlight beam switch coupler. B To the air filter case C Fasten the wire harness to the headlight stay with the plastic band. D Oil tank breather hose E Main fuse F Starter relay G Starter motor lead H Fasten the starter motor lead to the oil tank inlet hose with the plastic band, making sure not to pinch the hose. I Fasten the stator coil lead to the front frame with the plastic band, making sure to route it to the inside of the frame. J To the rectifier/regulator K To the engine L Fasten the positive battery lead to the oil tank breather pipe with the plastic band. M To the AC magneto N Pass the negative battery lead between the parking brake cable and the frame. O Route the starter motor lead (to the starter motor) to the rear of the engine. P Thermostat outlet hose Q Pass the parking brake cable through the holder, making sure that the holder is positioned to the front of the bolt.
SPEC
9-36
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC
1 ] \ [ Z Y X W V
cd1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a b
9 0 A
B C D E F B B A A G H I
U T S R
J K
N M L
e 8 d g f
h A-A B-B
9-37
CABLE ROUTING
R Make sure that the catch of the holder is facing downward. (FX10/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/ FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) S DC back buzzer (FX10/ FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/ FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) T Fuse box U Pass the wire harness and DC back buzzer lead through the guide, making sure that the guide is positioned to the front of the bolt. (FX10/FX10RTR/ FX10RTRA/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA) V Route the tail/brake light lead below the rib on the fuel tank, making sure not to pinch it between the tank and the right fuel tank cover. W Right fuel tank cover X Tail/brake light coupler Y Negative battery lead Z Negative battery lead coupler [ Fuel sender coupler \ Battery ] DC back buzzer coupler (FX10/ FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/ FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) _ Fuel tank breather hose a Fasten the brake hose with the holder. b Fasten the fuel tank breather hose to the rear cross member with the plastic band. c Main switch coupler d Wire harness e To the wire harness f Pass the wire harness through the guide, making sure that the guide positioned to the front of the bolt. (FX10RT/FX10MT) g DC back buzzer lead (FX10/ FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/ FX10MTR/FX10MTRA) h Fasten the parking brake cable with the holder, making sure to bend the holder so that its end contacts the side of the bolt head as shown in the illustration.
SPEC
9-38
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC
L 6 J
1 L
M A A N M 1 2
1 6
A-A K
M L
6 I 7 8 9 0
A H 0 0
CB
F E P L 1 O
9-39
CABLE ROUTING
1 Corrugated tube (left grip warmer lead, grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch lead, brake light switch lead, and headlight beam switch lead) 2 Parking brake cable 3 Brake master cylinder 4 Left handlebar switch 5 Left grip warmer lead 6 Brake hose 7 Route the brake hose behind the throttle cable and in front of the corrugated tubes. 8 Route the corrugated tube (engine stop switch lead, throttle switch leads, right grip warmer lead, and thumb warmer lead) in front of the corrugated tube (left grip warmer lead, grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch lead, brake light switch lead, and headlight beam switch lead). 9 Fasten the wire harness and corrugated tube (engine stop switch lead, throttle switch lead, right grip warmer lead, and thumb warmer lead) to the headlight stay with the plastic band, making sure to route the tube to the rear of the stay and the harness to the rear of the tube. 0 To the wire harness A Fasten the headlight unit lead and speedometer unit sub-lead to the headlight stay with the plastic band. B To the headlight (left) C To the throttle body D To the headlight (right) E To the coolant reservoir F To the parking brake G To the brake caliper H Fasten the wire harness and corrugated tube (left grip warmer lead, grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch lead, brake light switch lead, and headlight beam switch lead) to the headlight stay with the plastic band, making sure to route the tube to the rear of the stay and the harness to the rear of the tube. I Pass the corrugated tubes and parking brake cable through the guide. J Right handlebar switch K Right grip warmer lead L Corrugated tube (engine stop switch lead, throttle switch leads, right grip warmer lead, and thumb warmer lead) M Throttle cable
SPEC
9-40
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC
L 6 J
1 L
M A A N M 1 2
1 6
A-A K
M L
6 I 7 8 9 0
A H 0 0
CB
F E P L 1 O
9-41
CABLE ROUTING
N Fasten the corrugated tube (left grip warmer lead, grip/thumb warmer adjustment switch lead, brake light switch lead, and headlight beam switch lead), corrugated tube (engine stop switch lead, throttle switch leads, right grip warmer lead, and thumb warmer lead), and brake hose with the plastic band (FX10MT/ FX10MTR/FX10MTRA). O 40 ~ 70 mm (1.57 ~ 2.76 in) P 30 ~ 60 mm (1.18 ~ 2.36 in)
SPEC
9-42
CABLE ROUTING
SPEC
1 2
9 5
6 6 7 7
9-43
CABLE ROUTING
1 Fasten the tail/brake light lead with the holder, making sure to push the lead against the fuel tank. 2 Fasten the tail/brake light lead with the holder. 3 Tail/brake light lead 4 After routing the tail/brake light lead, bend the holder around the lead to fasten it. 5 Fasten the tail/brake light lead with the holder. (FX10/FX10RT/ FX10RTR/FX10RTRA) 6 Pass the tail/brake light lead through the notch in the tail/ brake light bracket. 7 Tail/brake light 8 Tail/brake light sub-wire harness 9 Tail/brake light sub-wire harness coupler
SPEC
9-44
YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
PRINTED ON RECYCLED PAPER
PRINTED IN U.S.A. 2007.07 CR (E)
WIRING DIAGRAM FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/ FX10MTRA 2008 8GL-0F001-00/8HA-0F001-00 1 Rectifier/regulator X Intake air temper- COLOR CODE 2 AC magneto ature sensor B ..............Black Br.............Brown 3 Crankshaft posi- Y Grip/thumb Ch............Chocolate tion sensor warmer adjustDg............Dark green 4 Main switch ment switch G..............Green 5 Main fuse Z Frame ground Gy............Gray 6 Load control relay [ DC back buzzer L ..............Blue 7 Battery \ Gear position Lg ............Light green 8 Starter motor switch O..............Orange 9 Starter relay ] Brake light switch P ..............Pink 0 Fuel injection sys- _ Tail/brake light R..............Red tem fuse a Fuel sender W .............White A Diode b Oil level switch Y ..............Yellow B Engine stop c Speedometer unit B/L ...........Black/Blue B/W..........Black/White switch d Multi-function B/Y...........Black/Yellow C Throttle switch meter Br/B .........Brown/Black D Thumb warmer e Warning light E Grip warmer f Low coolant tem- Br/G .........Brown/Green Br/L..........Brown/Blue F Oil pressure perature indicator Br/W ........Brown/White switch light G/B ..........Green/Black G CO adjustment g High beam indica- G/W .........Green/White coupler tor light G/Y ..........Green/Yellow H ECU (engine con- h Headlight Gy/R ........Gray/Red trol unit) i Headlight relay L/B ...........Blue/Black L/R...........Blue/Red I Cylinder-#1 igni- j Headlight beam L/W ..........Blue/White tion coil switch L/Y ...........Blue/Yellow J Spark plug k Radiator fan O/B ..........Orange/Black K Cylinder-#2 ignimotor O/G..........Orange/ tion coil l Radiator fan Green L Cylinder-#3 ignimotor relay O/R ..........Orange/Red tion coil m Auxiliary DC jack P/B...........Pink/Black M Fuel injection sys- n Ignition fuse P/L ...........Pink/Blue tem relay o Radiator fan P/W..........Pink/White N Fuel pump motor fuse R/B ..........Red/Black O Injector #1 p Signal fuse R/G ..........Red/Green R/L...........Red/Blue P Injector #2 q Headlight fuse Q Injector #3 r Auxiliary DC jack R/W .........Red/White R/Y ..........Red/Yellow R Throttle position fuse W/B..........White/Black sensor FX10MT/ W/G .........White/Green S Speed sensor FX10MTR/ Y/G ..........Yellow/Green T ISC (idle speed FX10MTRA Y/L ...........Yellow/Blue control) unit FX10/FX10RTR/ Y/R ..........Yellow/Red U Intake air presFX10RTRA/ Y/W..........Yellow/White sure sensor 1 (cylFX10MTR/ inders #1, #2, and FX10MTRA #3) V Intake air pressure sensor 2 (cylinder #1) W Coolant temperature sensor
WIRING DIAGRAM FX10/FX10RT/FX10RTR/FX10RTRA/FX10MT/FX10MTR/FX10MTRA 2008

8GL-0F001-00/8HA-0F001-00
A B
(BLACK) (GRAY) WIRE HARNESS (GRAY) FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM SUB-WIRE HARNESS WIRE HARNESS OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SUB-LEAD WIRE HARNESS TAIL/BRAKE LIGHT SUB-LEAD WIRE HARNESS
(BLACK)
SPEEDOMETER UNIT SUB-LEAD
WIRE HARNESS
REVERSE SWITCH SUB-WIRE HARNESS
WIRE HARNESS
COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SUB-LEAD
3
(BLACK) (BLACK)
I J K J L J O
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
M
(BLACK)
(GRAY)
4
OFF ON START
1
(BLACK)
A (GRAY)
A A A
N P
(GRAY)
5 0 9 6 7 8
B
A
(BLACK)
(GRAY)
R B
RUN STOP
C
CLOSE OPEN
A A A
F S
(BLACK)
r q p o n
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
G
A A A A
l E k
(BLACK) (BLACK)
T
(BLACK)
E
A A
U
(BLACK)
V
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
HI LO
c e f d
E E E
]
OFF ON
[ W
(DARK GREEN)
G
(BLACK)
X _ a \ Z
F (GREEN) C (BLACK)
g
E
b
(GRAY) E
(GREEN)

2008 FX Nytro Servis Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 FX Nytro Servis Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 FX Nytro Servis Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

FX10X FX10RTX FX10RTRX FX10RTRAX FX10MTX FX10MTRX FX10MTRAX

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

ILLUSTRATED SYMBOLS (Refer to the illustration)

Illustrated symbols 0 to F are used to identify the specifications which appear.

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 2. PERIODIC INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

CHAPTER 4. POWER TRAIN

CHAPTER 6. COOLING SYSTEM

CHAPTER 7. FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

IMPORTANT INFORMATION IMPORTANT INFORMATION

PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY

5. Keep all parts away from any source of fire.

ALL REPLACEMENT PARTS

LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS

BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS

SPECIAL TOOLS SPECIAL TOOLS

FOR ENGINE SERVICE

FOR POWER TRAIN SERVICE

FOR FUEL INJECTION SERVICE

FOR ELECTRICAL SERVICE

INTRODUCTION/PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

PERIODIC INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART FOR THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

It is recommended that these items be serviced by a Yamaha dealer.

1 month or 800 km (500 mi) (40 hr)

Engine oil Engine oil filter cartridge Cooling system

Primary and secondary clutches

It is recommended that these items be serviced by a Yamaha dealer.

SPARK PLUGS/FUEL LINE INSPECTION ENGINE

FUEL LINE INSPECTION

VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

Measure the valve clearance with a thickness gauge 1.

Valve clearance measuring sequence Cylinder #3 #2 #1

5. Remove: Intake camshaft Exhaust camshaft

VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

INSTALLED PAD NUMBER

INSTALLED PAD NUMBER

VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT/ THROTTLE BODY SYNCHRONIZATION

Install the new valve pad 1 and the valve lifter 2.

THROTTLE BODY SYNCHRONIZATION NOTE:

THROTTLE BODY SYNCHRONIZATION

3. Install: Vacuum gauge 1

THROTTLE BODY SYNCHRONIZATION THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT

THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT NOTE:

THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ADJUSTMENT

Tighten the locknut.

THROTTLE OVERRIDE SYSTEM (T.O.R.S.) CHECK

THROTTLE OVERRIDE SYSTEM (T.O.R.S.) CHECK

COMPRESSION PRESSURE MEASUREMENT

COMPRESSION PRESSURE MEASUREMENT NOTE:

COMPRESSION PRESSURE MEASUREMENT

Same as without oil

ENGINE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION